JP7346229B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing games.

2. Description of the Related Art Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, which are examples of gaming machines, include electronic components such as display means such as a liquid crystal display and light emitting means such as LEDs (light emitting diodes).

As this type of gaming machine, for example, there is one that executes a pending consecutive notification effect that notifies that the next jackpot will occur consecutively within the range of pending storage information that existed when the jackpot occurred (for example, (See Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2018-99309

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, when displaying a specific display corresponding to the execution of a continuous notification effect on hold until the next jackpot, if the specific display is not cleared normally due to a malfunction or the like, the player There was a risk that this would give rise to a sense of distrust .

The present invention has been made with attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably perform effects .

The gaming machine of means A is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a retention storage means capable of storing information regarding the variable display as retention information;
Notification performance execution means capable of executing a notification performance for notifying that suspension information corresponding to being controlled to the advantageous state is stored in the suspension storage means when the system is controlled to be in the advantageous state;
A specific display means capable of displaying a specific display upon execution of the notification effect;
erasing effect execution means capable of executing a specific display erasing effect for erasing the specific display at a predetermined timing of the variable display corresponding to the specific display;
An electronic component that is visible to the player;
a specific member provided around the electronic component;
a translucent member that is a translucent member and is provided so that a player can visually recognize the electronic component and the specific member through the member;
Equipped with
special control for erasing the specific display at a specific timing later than the predetermined timing, if the specific display is not erased at the predetermined timing due to a predetermined event occurring while the specific display is being displayed; is executable,
The predetermined event is that the process for executing the specific display erasing effect was not executed normally ;
There are a plurality of predetermined timings at which the specific display can be erased,
The specific display means can display the specific display in one of a plurality of display modes including a first mode and a second mode that is more advantageous to the player than the first mode. can be,
The predetermined timing at which the specific display can be erased is different between when the specific display is displayed in the first mode and when the specific display is displayed in the second mode.
It is characterized by
(1) The gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1, 75SG001) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state, a small winning gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
Electronic components (for example, LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) provided so as to be visible to the player;
a specific member (for example, base member 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a similar color to the electronic component;
a translucent member (e.g., cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) that is a translucent member and is provided so that a player can see the electronic component and the specific member through the member;
Equipped with
The light-transmitting member (e.g., cover member 302) has a decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern 331) formed across the electronic component (e.g., LED board 303) and the specific member (e.g., base member 301). ) (see Figure 10-12),
moreover,
a reservation storage means (for example, a reservation information storage area for performance control) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as reservation information;
When controlled to be in the advantageous state, notification that can execute a notification effect (for example, continuous notification of hold) that notifies that the hold storage means stores hold information corresponding to being controlled to be in the advantageous state. Production execution means (for example, production control CPU 120 that executes the processing of steps 010AKS004 and 010AKS007),
A specific display means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 010AKS007) that can display a specific display when the notification performance is executed;
Erase effect execution means (for example, step 010AKS024, A production control CPU 120) that executes the process of step 010AKS025,
If the specific display is not erased at the predetermined timing due to a predetermined event (for example, missing a variable pattern command or an error in the erasure effect setting process) while the specific display is being displayed, It is also possible to perform special control to erase the specific display at a later specific timing (for example, timing TD) (for example, it is possible to execute the process of step 010AKS045).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the electronic parts are arranged so that they can be seen by the player, the decorative pattern makes the electronic parts less noticeable, so it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in design. Further, it is possible to prevent the specific display from continuing to be displayed and giving the player a sense of distrust, and it is possible to suitably execute the notification effect.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention to be described later include inventions related to the following gaming machines (2) to (6). Conventionally, in gaming machines, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-99309, a hold system that notifies that the next jackpot will occur consecutively within the range of hold storage information that existed at the time of the jackpot occurrence. There was something that executed a continuous notification effect. However, in such gaming machines, when displaying a specific display corresponding to the execution of a continuous notification effect that is on hold until the next jackpot, if the specific display is not cleared normally due to a malfunction etc., the game In view of this, there is a need to provide a gaming machine that can suitably perform effects.

(2) The gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to characteristic part 010AK) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state, a small winning gaming state) that is advantageous for the player,
a reservation storage means (for example, a reservation information storage area for performance control) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as reservation information;
When controlled to be in the advantageous state, notification that can execute a notification effect (for example, continuous notification of hold) that notifies that the hold storage means stores hold information corresponding to being controlled to be in the advantageous state. Production execution means (for example, production control CPU 120 that executes the processing of steps 010AKS004 and 010AKS007),
A specific display means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 010AKS007) that can display a specific display when the notification performance is executed;
Erase effect execution means (for example, step 010AKS024, A production control CPU 120) that executes the process of step 010AKS025,
If the specific display is not erased at the predetermined timing due to a predetermined event (for example, missing a variable pattern command or an error in the erasure effect setting process) while the specific display is being displayed, It is also possible to perform special control to erase the specific display at a later specific timing (for example, timing TD) (for example, it is possible to execute the process of step 010AKS045).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the specific display from continuing to be displayed and giving the player a sense of distrust, and it is possible to suitably execute the notification effect.

(3) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
A game control means (for example, main board 11, game control microcomputer 100, CPU 103) that controls the progress of the game;
A performance control means (for example, performance control board 12, performance control CPU 120) that controls the performance based on information from the game control means,
The performance control means controls the game control when the specific display is not erased at the predetermined timing due to failure to normally receive information (for example, a variable pattern designation command) from the game control means at the start of the variable display. The special control may be executable based on information (for example, a winning start designation command) received from the means at the start of the advantageous state.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the specific display from continuing to be displayed and giving the player a sense of distrust, and it is possible to suitably execute the notification effect.

(4) In the gaming machine of (3) above,
The advantageous state start effect executed based on the information received at the start of the advantageous state is set to have a higher display priority than the specific display,
During the effect period at the start of the advantageous state, the specific display may be erased (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-9 (H) to (J)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the specific display from continuing to be displayed and giving the player a sense of distrust, and it is possible to suitably execute the notification effect.

(5) In any of the gaming machines set forth in (2) to (4) above,
There are multiple predetermined timings,
The specific timing may be a timing later than the last timing among a plurality of predetermined timings (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-4).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the specific display from being erased in a situation where there is still time to execute the specific display erasing effect and giving the player a sense of discomfort.

(6) In any of the gaming machines set forth in (2) to (5) above,
The specific display means can display the specific display in one of a plurality of display modes including at least a first mode and a second mode that is more advantageous to the player than the first mode. ,
If the specific display is not erased at the predetermined timing due to the occurrence of a predetermined event while the specific display is displayed in the second mode, the display mode of the specific display is changed to the first mode at the specific timing. It may be possible to perform control for changing the mode to the second mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-11).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the specific display of the second mode from continuing to be displayed and giving the player a sense of distrust, and it is possible to suitably execute the notification effect.

Note that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something that you have.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a figure showing the example of composition of the production control board concerning feature parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure showing the example of composition of the storage area concerning feature parts 91AK and 92AK. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of determining moving image data and text display process tables related to characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the text display process table regarding characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the example of text display control regarding characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the text display setting information regarding characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a text display regarding characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a text display regarding characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a text display regarding characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a screen display related to characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing effect drawing commands related to feature parts 01AK and 02AK. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a screen display related to characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an effect drawing synthesis process related to feature parts 01AK and 02AK. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of execution of image processing related to characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the example of an image display regarding characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the reach effect content and drawing processing pattern regarding the characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of determining drawing processing patterns related to characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure showing the production execution period concerning feature parts 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the example of performance execution concerning characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the example of performance execution concerning characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the example of performance execution concerning characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the example of performance execution concerning characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. It is a front view showing a pachinko game machine as a characteristic part 75SG. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine as a characteristic part 75SG. It is a front view showing a game board of a pachinko game machine as a characteristic part 75SG. FIG. 10-3 is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 10-3. It is a front view showing a light guide plate device. (A) is an enlarged front view showing the main parts of the light guide plate device, (B) is a sectional view taken along the line BB in (A), and (C) is an enlarged view showing the main parts in (B). (A) is a front view showing the first production unit, and (B) is a rear view. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the configuration of the first production unit as viewed diagonally from the front. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in Figure 10-7(A), (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in Figure 10-7(A), and (C) is a cross-sectional view taken along line E- in Figure 10-7(A). It is an E sectional view. (A) is a front view showing the base member, (B) is a front view showing the LED board, and (C) is a front view showing the cover member. (A) is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member removed, and (B) is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member attached. 10-11(B) is an enlarged view showing the main part of FIG. 10-11(B). FIG. (A) is a front view showing the variable winning ball unit, and (B) is a FF sectional view of (A). (A) and (B) are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the first production unit, and (C) and (D) are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the variable winning ball unit. It is a diagram for comparing the first performance unit and the variable winning ball unit. It is a diagram for explaining similar colors. (A) is a front view showing the second production unit, and (B) is a front view showing the second production unit with the cover member removed. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along line GG in FIG. 10-17(A), and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line H-H in FIG. 10-17(A). (A) is a diagram explaining the boundary between the base member and the LED board, and (B) is a diagram showing the configuration of the second presentation unit. (A) is a front view showing a third performance unit and a fourth performance unit. (A) is a sectional view taken along line II in FIG. 10-20, and (B) is a sectional view taken along line JJ in FIG. 10-20. 10-20 is a sectional view taken along line KK in FIG. 10-20. It is an explanatory diagram showing the visibility situation of the 3rd production unit and the 4th production unit. It is a figure showing composition of a 3rd production unit and a 4th production unit. It is a figure which shows the presentation mode when the 3rd presentation unit and the 4th presentation unit emit light. (A) is a schematic front view showing a state in which the third production unit is located at the origin position, and (B) is a schematic front view showing a state in which the third production unit is located in the production position. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 152F. It is a figure showing a hit type table. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. It is an explanatory diagram showing a hit determination table and a jackpot type determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the production control command. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the production control command. It is a flowchart which shows starting port switch passage processing. It is a flowchart showing special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows small hit release preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows processing during small hit release. It is a flowchart which shows small hit end processing. FIG. 7 is a display screen diagram showing an example of a notification effect. It is an explanatory view showing a notification performance execution/non-execution determination table, a notification performance content determination table, a V mode determination table, a hit suggestion performance execution determination table, and a no hit suggestion performance execution determination table. It is a flowchart which shows notification production processing. It is a flowchart which shows the holding continuous notification setting process of the characteristic part 003AK. It is a figure which shows an example of the reservation information storage area for production control of the characteristic part 003AK. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in the continuous notification process of the characteristic part 003AK. It is a timing chart showing the execution timing of the erasing effect of the characteristic part 003AK. It is a timing chart which shows the execution timing of the change production of the characteristic part 003AK. It is a flowchart etc. which shows the change effect setting process of the characteristic part 003AK. It is a flowchart showing the erasure effect processing of the characteristic part 003AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation of the characteristic part 003AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation of the characteristic part 003AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation of the characteristic part 003AK. It is a flowchart which shows the change effect setting process of the modification of the characteristic part 003AK. It is a flowchart which shows the holding continuous notification setting process of the characteristic part 010AK. It is a figure which shows an example of the reservation information storage area for production control of the characteristic part 010AK. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in the continuous notification setting process of the characteristic part 010AK. It is a timing chart showing the execution timing of the erasing effect of the characteristic part 010AK. It is a flowchart etc. which shows the erasure|elimination effect setting process of the characteristic part 010AK. It is a flowchart which shows the erasure|elimination effect process of the characteristic part 010AK. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd erasure|elimination effect setting process of the characteristic part 010AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation of the characteristic part 010AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation of the characteristic part 010AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation of the characteristic part 010AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation of the characteristic part 010AK.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A mode for implementing a gaming machine according to the present invention will be explained below based on the drawings.

(form)
Type 1 gaming machine is
A gaming machine capable of playing games (for example, pachinko gaming machine 75SG001),
Electronic components (for example, LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) provided so as to be visible to the player;
a specific member (for example, base member 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a similar color to the electronic component;
a translucent member (e.g., cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) that is a translucent member and is provided so that a player can see the electronic component and the specific member through the member;
It is characterized by having the following.
According to this feature, even if the electronic parts are arranged so that they can be seen by the player, the electronic parts become less noticeable due to the specific members having similar colors, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

The gaming machine of Form 2 is the gaming machine described in Form 1,
Predetermined electronic parts (for example, first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) that are difficult or invisible to the player;
A predetermined member provided around the predetermined electronic component (for example, a member for fixing the first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.);
Equipped with
The predetermined member is characterized in that it has a color that is not similar to the predetermined electronic component.
According to this feature, for the predetermined electronic parts that are difficult or invisible to the player, general-purpose products can be used without considering the balance with the predetermined members, so that manufacturing costs can be reduced.

The gaming machine of Form 3 is the gaming machine described in Form 1 or 2,
Comprising a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
The electronic component (for example, the LED board 303) is provided at a position farther from the display means than the specific member (for example, the upper part of the base member 301).
According to this feature, the electronic components are located away from the display means that attracts the attention of the player, so that they are less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 3,
A protruding portion (e.g., protruding portion 3A) provided above the electronic component (e.g., LED board 603, 803) and protruding toward the player side than the electronic component;
The protrusion is larger than the electronic component.
According to this feature, the electronic component is in the shadow of the protrusion and becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 5 is the gaming machine described in Form 4,
The electronic component (e.g., LED board 603, 803) and the specific member (e.g., base member 601, 801) are dark colored (e.g., black) (modified example)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the electronic component can easily disappear into the shadow of the protrusion, making it less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 5,
The specific member is characterized in that the brightness or saturation of the color is higher than that of the electronic component.
According to this feature, since the specific member has higher visibility than the electronic component, it is possible to make the electronic component relatively less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 7 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 6,
The light-transmitting member (e.g., cover member 302) has a decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern 331) formed across the electronic component (e.g., LED board 303) and the specific member (e.g., base member 301). ) (see Figure 10-12)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the electronic parts are arranged so that they can be seen by the player, the decorative pattern makes the electronic parts less noticeable, so it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in design.

The gaming machine of Form 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 7,
The electronic component (for example, LED board 303) is a circuit board,
The specific member (e.g., base member 301) has a decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern 341) that has at least some aspects in common with the circuit pattern (e.g., printed wiring 320) formed on the circuit board. (See Figure 10-12)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the circuit pattern formed on the circuit board becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 9 is the gaming machine described in Form 7 or 8,
The specific member (e.g., base member 301) has a predetermined area (e.g., rear wall portions 313A to 313D) that is visible from the player side without passing through the light-transmitting member (e.g., cover member 302). ,
A predetermined decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern 341) that is the same or similar in aspect to the decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern 331) of the transparent member is provided in the predetermined area (see FIG. 10-12).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes difficult to understand that the specific member and the light-transmitting member are different members.

The gaming machine of Form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 9,
A decorative portion (e.g., decorative portion 420) provided at a position corresponding to a boundary (e.g., boundary portion BD) between the electronic component (e.g., LED board 403) and the specific member (e.g., base member 401). (See Figure 10-19)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if electronic components are placed so that they can be seen by the player, the boundaries between the electronic components and specific components are obscured by the decorative parts, making the electronic components less noticeable, which increases the degree of freedom in design. can be increased.

The gaming machine of Form 11 is the gaming machine according to Form 10,
The decorative part includes a plurality of decorative parts,
A plurality of predetermined decorative parts are provided at positions that do not correspond to the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member,
The plurality of decorative parts are larger in number than the plurality of predetermined decorative parts.
According to this feature, the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member is made difficult to see by the plurality of decorative parts, so that the electronic component becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 11,
The light-transmitting member (e.g., cover member 402) has a boundary corresponding area corresponding to the boundary (e.g., boundary portion BD) between the electronic component (e.g., LED board 403) and the specific member (e.g., base member 401). (for example, a convex portion 410) and a boundary non-corresponding region (for example, a region other than the convex portion 410) that does not correspond to the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member,
The light transmittance of the boundary corresponding area is lower than the light transmittance of the boundary non-corresponding area.
According to this feature, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member through the boundary corresponding area, so that the electronic component becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 13 is the gaming machine according to Form 11 or 12,
A logotype (for example, the letter "V") is displayed on the decoration part (for example, the decoration part 420) (see FIG. 10-19).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player focuses on the logotype and becomes less aware of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 14 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 11 to 13,
The electronic component (for example, LED board 403) includes a light emitting means (for example, second presentation LED 404A) that can cause the decoration part (for example, decoration part 420) to emit light (see FIG. 10-18).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the decorative portion stands out due to the light emission, it becomes difficult for the player to be aware of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 15 is the gaming machine described in Form 14,
The light emitting means (for example, the second effect LED 404A) is provided so that the decoration part (for example, the decoration part 420) can be surface-emitted (for example, the light from the second effect LED 404A is emitted from the inner lens). The entire front surface of the convex part 410, including the decorative part 420, emits light from the entire front surface of the convex part 410 by being emitted substantially uniformly forward from the entire front surface of the convex part 405 and incident on the area corresponding to the convex part 410.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the decorative portion stands out due to the surface emission, it becomes difficult for the player to be aware of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 16 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 15,
Around the electronic component (e.g., LED board 803) and the specific member (e.g., base member 801), a presentation means (e.g., third presentation unit 600) having higher visibility than the electronic component and the specific member is provided. (See Figure 10-20)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if electronic parts are placed so that they can be seen by players, the visibility of the presentation means is higher than the visibility of the electronic parts, making the electronic parts less noticeable, increasing the degree of freedom in design. be able to.

The gaming machine of Form 17 is the gaming machine described in Form 16,
The presentation means (for example, the third presentation unit 600) is provided closer to the player (front side) than the electronic component (for example, the LED board 803) (see FIG. 10-22).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the visibility of the presentation means can be easily improved.

The gaming machine of Form 18 is the gaming machine according to Form 16 or 17,
The presentation section (e.g., light emitting presentation section 630) provided so as to be visible to the player in the presentation means (e.g., third presentation unit 600) is larger than the electronic component (e.g., LED board 803) (FIG. 10). -20 reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the visibility of the presentation means can be easily improved.

The gaming machine of Form 19 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 16 to 18,
A presentation section (e.g., light emitting presentation section 630) provided in the presentation means (for example, third presentation unit 600) so as to be visible to the player has better visibility than the color of the electronic component (e.g., LED board 803). It is characterized by being a color with a high level of color.
According to this feature, the visibility of the presentation means can be easily improved.

The gaming machine of Form 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 16 to 19,
The effect means (for example, the third effect unit 600) has a light emitting means (for example, third effect LEDs 604A, 604B) capable of emitting light toward the player (see FIG. 10-21(A)).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the visibility of the presentation means can be easily improved.

The gaming machine of Form 21 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 20,
It further includes a specific light-transmitting member (for example, the cover plate 702A of the variable winning ball unit 700) that is a member having light-transmitting properties and is provided at a different position from the light-transmitting member,
The transmittance (for example, XA%, XB%) of transmitting the light that has entered the light-transmitting member (for example, the cover member 302) in a predetermined direction (for example, the T direction) is higher than that of the light that has entered the specific light-transmitting member. Lower than the transmittance (for example, Y%) that transmits light in the predetermined direction (see Figure 10-14)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if electronic components are placed so that they can be seen by players, the electronic components become less noticeable because the translucency of the translucent member is lower than the translucency of the specific translucent member. The degree of freedom can be increased.

The gaming machine of Form 22 is the gaming machine according to Form 21,
The thickness of the light-transmitting member (for example, the front-to-back dimensions L1A, L1B of the cover member 302) is thicker than the thickness of the specific light-transmitting member (for example, the front-to-back dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A) (see FIG. 10-14). )
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the light transmittance of the light transmitting member is reduced, making the electronic components less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 22,
The light-transmitting member (for example, the cover member 302) is colored in a predetermined color,
The predetermined color is similar to the electronic component (for example, the LED board 303) and the specific member (for example, the base member 301).
According to this feature, the light-transmitting member blends in with the electronic component and the specific member, making the electronic component less noticeable.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the gaming area), special symbols (also referred to as special symbols) as multiple types of special identification information are variably displayed (also referred to as a special symbol game). A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special design may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. Further, the sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

Furthermore, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). , the first suspension display 25A displays the first suspension storage number based on the number of LEDs lit, and the second suspension display 25B displays the second suspension storage number based on the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, a starting winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 81, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the starting winning hole door is in the closed position, so that the second starting winning hole is opened. It becomes a closed state in which game balls do not enter (it is also said that the second starting prize opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state where the game ball can enter the second starting winning port (second It is also said that the starting prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable prize winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the left and right lower sides of the game area), general winning holes 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects, etc. are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), which operates according to the performance.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). A batted ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided below the upper tray from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Summary of game progress)
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period (the second starting winning hole is in an open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", it is controlled to a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and upper limit opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc., described later), and the jackpot can be adjusted accordingly. The type is set. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is in the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after the power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, when a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of variable display of decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd-numbered decorative patterns (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, the variable probability state is changed. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a pre-read preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo-like multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (the jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. You can.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 2, for example. In addition, various other boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, a power supply board, and the like.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary figure hold display 25C, and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has the function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The performance random number may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process to clear the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command instructing initialization to the production control board 12 (step S9). When receiving the performance control command, the performance control CPU 120 displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power outage), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes unable to operate due to the power supply stop. In this power supply stop processing, processing for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, data protection processing for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes adding error detection codes (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for proceeding with the game (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.), but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check on the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S4). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time of power supply stop, using, for example, a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the gaming state is restored to the state at the time of power supply stoppage, and if the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols will be restarted from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. That will happen.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command to the production control board 12 to instruct recovery from the power outage (step S7). In line with this, a performance control command that specifies the backed-up gaming state before the power outage, or a performance control command that specifies the display result of the special game that is currently being executed if the special game is being executed. A command may also be sent. These commands can be the same as the commands that are set to be sent in the special design process described later. When the performance control CPU 120 receives a performance control command specifying the time of recovery from a power outage, the performance control CPU 120 indicates, for example, that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power outage or is in the process of recovering from the power outage. , performs a screen display for notification. The performance control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the performance control command.

After completing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the gaming control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated at a predetermined time interval (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of the gaming state, etc. (For details, see (described later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing for when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a starting winning, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The effect control command at the time of start winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is transferred from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the presentation content (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start the round execution in the jackpot gaming state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the opening upper limit period for keeping the big winning hole open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of executions of the round with the jackpot opening in the open state has reached the set upper limit number of executions, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of executions has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is performed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process that changes the probability in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be in an open state in the small winning game state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small winning opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big prize opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and checking a predetermined operation.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the contents specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process processing, for example, the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the control contents of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 7, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the pre-read notice effect are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state or a small win game state, if the command specifies the start of a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the setting content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of the small win game state, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation example of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 using a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device, etc. The software may also be distributed by being installed on a storage device owned by the software. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios may be "0%" and the other ratio may be "100%" or a ratio less than "100%."

(Explanation of characteristic parts regarding setting values)
Hereinafter, the characteristic parts regarding the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

Although not shown, the main board 11 of the pachinko game machine 1 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1 while being housed in a board case that is configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. ing. Although not shown in the drawings, the main board 11 also includes a lock switch for switching the pachinko game machine 1 to a setting value changing state in which the setting value can be changed, and a lock switch for changing the setting value changing state, which will be described later. A setting changeover switch that functions as a setting switch for changing setting values such as winning probability (ball output rate), and an opening sensor that detects opening of a slot for a gaming machine are provided. Note that the setting value change state in this embodiment is also a state in which a gaming hall attendant or the like can confirm the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (setting value confirmation state).

The operation parts, such as the lock switch and the setting changeover switch, which can be operated by an attendant of the game parlor, etc., are provided in the setting changeover main body part, and are housed in the board case together with the main board 11. The lock switch and the setting changeover switch are exposed on the back side through an opening formed on the back side of the board case so that they can be operated without opening the board case.

A board case housing a lock switch and a setting changeover switch is provided on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Therefore, it is extremely difficult or impossible to operate the lock switch and setting changeover switch when the gaming machine frame is closed, but they can be operated by opening the gaming machine frame using a designated door key. . Furthermore, since the lock switch requires the operation of a setting key owned by an attendant of the game parlor, it can only be operated by an administrator who possesses the setting key. The lock switch is also a switch that can be turned on and off using a setting key. In this embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but a single key may be used for both.

A display monitor that can display set values and base values is arranged in the board case. The display monitor is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged at the top of the board case. That is, the display monitor is placed in front of the main board 11 in the board case when viewed visually. The main board 11 cannot be seen when the gaming machine frame is not open, so the front side when viewing the main board 11 means the back side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame is open. This is the front of the pachinko game machine 1, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. In this way, the display monitor is placed in front when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame open. However, the front side from which the main board 11 is viewed may be the same as the front side of the pachinko game machine 1.

The display monitor includes a first display section, a second display section, a third display section, and a fourth display section. The first to fourth display sections of the display monitor are each composed of 7 segments that form a figure 8, and dots arranged at the lower right side of the 7 segments. . The first to fourth display sections of the display monitor are capable of lighting up or blinking in various colors, such as red, blue, green, yellow, white, etc., respectively. It is also possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in extremely short cycles.

A game information display section may be provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, at the lower left position of the game area. In the game information display section, a round display, a right-handed lamp, a probability change lamp, and a time saving lamp are arranged all together. The round display device can display the number of rounds of the jackpot game and the type of jackpot during the jackpot game. The right-handed lamp lights up in a game state in which the game ball is launched toward the right game area, such as a low-accuracy/high-base state as a time-saving state or a jackpot game state. The variable probability lamp lights up when in a variable probability state. The time saving lamp lights up when the time is being saved. The round indicator consists of five segments (LEDs).

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot (ball payout rate) changes depending on a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the probability of winning the jackpot (ball payout rate) is changed by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. The setting value has six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest ball payout rate and decreasing values in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage is the highest for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. Further, as for the setting value, the largest value, 6, is the most disadvantageous value for the gaming parlor side, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the value becomes more advantageous for the gaming parlor side. If the ball payout rate changes depending on the setting value, for example, the probability of jackpot may change depending on the setting value, or the jackpot probability may be constant but the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change depending on the setting value. Good too. In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

(Explanation regarding characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK)
FIG. 8-1 shows an example of the configuration of various circuits mounted on the production control board 12 regarding the characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 8-1, various circuits such as a production control microprocessor 91AK100, an input circuit 91AK121, a memory controller 91AK122, a production data memory 91AK123, a ROM91AK124, a RAM91AK125, and a watchdog timer 91AK126 are mounted on the production control board 12. ing. The production control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU91AK131, a VDP91AK132, an audio processing circuit 91AK133, a lamp control circuit 91AK134, a motor control circuit 135, and a built-in memory 91AK136. The VDP91AK132 includes an instruction decoder 91AK141, a demultiplexer 91AK142, a video decoder 91AK143, a moving image renderer 91AK144, a character image renderer 91AK145, a text image renderer 91AK146, a VRAM 91AK147, and a display drive circuit 91AK148. The audio processing circuit 91AK133 includes an audio decoder 91AK151.

The performance control microprocessor 91AK100 executes data processing and signal processing based on the performance control command received from the main board 11, thereby controlling the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps 9, and other decorations. It is sufficient if it is an integrated processor in which a circuit that can control execution of a performance using some or all of a plurality of performance devices such as LEDs for use in production, movable members for performance such as the movable body 32, etc., is integrated into one chip. . The production control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU 91AK131, a VDP91AK132, and a built-in memory 91AK136, while some or all of the audio processing circuit 91AK133, lamp control circuit 91AK134, and motor control circuit 91AK135 are included in the production control microprocessor. It may be provided outside the 91AK100.

The input circuit 91AK121 may include a buffer circuit or the like. The buffer circuit of the input circuit 91AK121 is used to receive the production control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The memory controller 91AK122 executes various processes on the data stored in the performance data memory 91AK123 in response to a request signal supplied from the performance control microprocessor 91AK100. The performance data memory 91AK123 stores in advance performance data that can be used to execute a performance using the performance device, such as various image data representing display images on the image display device 5, for example. The image data stored in the effect data memory 91AK123 only needs to include moving image data and still image data. As still image data, for example, character image data that is sprite image data that is a plurality of types of image element data corresponding to a plurality of types of effect images, such as a plurality of types of decorative patterns that are variably displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, is used. It's fine if it's prepared. The effect image corresponding to the decorative pattern may be included in the character image. In addition, image data of arbitrary character images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, specifically, effect images showing people, figures, symbols, etc., and background images are stored in advance in the effect data memory 91AK123. All you have to do is stay there. As the still image data, for example, text image data that allows characters to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 may be prepared. In addition to the image data, the effect data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of the audio data used for audio output by the speakers 8L and 8R. The performance data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of the lamp drive data used to drive lighting of light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs. The effect data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of motor drive data used for rotationally driving a drive motor that operates a movable member such as the movable body 32. The performance data memory 91AK123 may be any nonvolatile semiconductor memory that can be electrically erased, written, or rewritten, such as a NAND flash memory. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal use state where the progress of the performance is controlled, the performance data memory 91AK123 is used as a read-only storage device.

The ROM91AK124 stores computer programs and fixed data for effect control. The RAM91AK125 provides a work area for the CPU91AK131 of the production control microprocessor 91AK100. The watchdog timer 91AK126 has a counter circuit that counts up or down based on the settings of the built-in register, and when the measurement time passes the start time (timeout time) and a timeout occurs, a timeout signal is generated as a time elapsed signal. generate a signal. The timeout signal is input to the CPU91AK131 of the production control microprocessor 91AK100. Upon generation of the timeout signal, the CPU 91AK131 enters a reset state and restarts the production control microprocessor 91AK100.

The ROM91AK124 stores various table data used to control performance operations in addition to programs for performance control. For example, the ROM91AK124 contains table data constituting a plurality of judgment tables and decision tables prepared for the CPU91AK131 of the production control microprocessor 91AK100 to perform various judgments, decisions, and settings, and table data constituting various production control patterns. Pattern data etc. are stored. The performance control pattern includes, for example, performance control execution data (display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, motor control data, operation detection control data, etc.) associated with the performance control process timer judgment value, an end code, etc. It consists of process data. Part or all of the production control pattern and production control execution data may be configured as a display list. The display list is data of a group of commands in which a series of transfer commands and the like to be executed by the VDP91AK132 are written in accordance with the order of image processing. The display list may include a mixture of display control commands, audio control commands, lamp control commands, and motor control commands. By controlling the progress of the performance using such a display list, it is sufficient to be able to control the electric components for the performance in a coordinated manner. The RAM91AK125 stores programs and various data used to control the electric components for presentation. The CPU 91AK131 only needs to be able to read the programs and data stored in the RAM 91AK125 in a shorter reading time than the reading time of the programs and data stored in the ROM 91AK124.

The CPU91AK131 executes control processing according to a computer program for effect control. At this time, the CPU 91AK131 executes a performance control process for controlling the progress of the performance using the electric parts for performance according to the program read from the ROM 91AK124. The effect control processing includes, for example, fixed data read processing in which the CPU 91AK131 reads fixed data from the ROM 91AK124, variable data write processing in which the CPU 91AK131 writes various variable data to the RAM 91AK125 and temporarily stores it, and CPU 91AK131 performs various types of data temporarily stored in the RAM 91AK125. Variation data read processing for reading variation data of Good too.

The VDP91AK132 determines the content of control of image display in the image display device 5 based on display control commands and register settings from the CPU91AK131. For example, the VDP91AK132 controls the variable display of decorative patterns and various types of effect displays by determining the switching timing of effect images to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The VDP91AK132 is an image processor that has image data processing functions such as a high-speed drawing function, a moving image data separation function, and a video decoding function. Note that the VDP91AK132 may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or an image processing microprocessor more generally referred to as a DSP (Digital Signal Processor).

The instruction decoder 91AK141 decodes the instruction part (instruction code) included in the display control command from the CPU 91AK131, and instructs image processing etc. according to the decoding result. For example, a group of instructions for display control included in the decoding result is supplied to the internal circuit of the VDP91AK132. The instruction decoder 91AK141 may generate a control signal according to the decoding result and supply it to the internal circuit of the VDP91AK132. The voice control command group included in the decoding result may be supplied to the voice processing circuit 91AK133. The lamp control command group included in the decoding result may be supplied to the lamp control circuit 91AK134. The motor control command group included in the decoding result may be supplied to the motor control circuit 91AK135.

The demultiplexer 91AK142 receives the moving image data read from the performance data memory 91AK123, etc., and outputs the separated data into video data and audio data. The video data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the video decoder 91AK143. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compression-encoded video data and outputs it. The video data output from the video decoder 91AK143 is supplied to the moving image renderer 91AK144. The video decoder 91AK143 may read compression-encoded character image data and text image data from the performance data memory 91AK123 and the like, decompress and decode the data, and then supply the data to the character image renderer 91AK145 and text image renderer 91AK146.

The moving image renderer 91AK144 writes and stores the video data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143 in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The moving image renderer 91AK144 executes image processing that can adjust the hue, saturation, and brightness of the image shown in the video data, or some or all of these, and temporarily stores the adjusted video data in the VRAM 91AK147. It's okay. The character image renderer 91AK145 receives character image data read from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the like and character image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and writes and stores them in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 may convert the vector format character image data into a bitmap format and temporarily store it in the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 performs image conversion processing to display the character image specified by the character image specification information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the character display setting information. good. The text image renderer 91AK146 receives text image data read from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the like and text image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and writes and stores them in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 may convert vector format text image data into a bitmap format and temporarily store it in the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 performs image conversion processing to display the text image specified by the text image specification information in the display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. good.

The VRAM91AK147 temporarily stores image data and provides a work area for image data processing by the VDP91AK132. The VRAM 91AK 147 may be provided with various areas such as a palette area where palette data is placed, a character buffer where character image data is stored, a text buffer where text image data is stored, and a CG buffer. The CG buffer temporarily stores palette data that defines the display colors of characters and text when drawing processing is executed by the VDP91AK132, and temporarily stores display data for effect images created by drawing processing. It is used for preservation. The display drive circuit 91AK148 is a circuit for outputting signals for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5. The display drive circuit 91AK148 outputs a predetermined clock signal (dot clock signal) and scanning signal (drive control signal) to the image display device 5 along with a color signal (gradation control signal) according to the display data created in the VDP91AK132. do it.

A frame buffer may be provided inside the VRAM91AK147 or in a memory module separate from the VRAM91AK147, such as the built-in memory 91AK136. The frame buffer provides a virtual display area in which display data of effect images created by drawing processing by the VDP91AK132 is expanded and stored. The display data stored in the frame buffer is bitmap format image data (pixel data, raster data) created by the VDP91AK132 based on vector format image data (vector data, vector data) such as points, lines, polygons, etc. data) etc. Note that the frame buffer includes, for example, an actual display area that stores display data of various images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and a real display area that stores display data of various images that are not displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. A virtual display area may also be included. Alternatively, display data for displaying a screen of the same size as the display screen of the image display device 5 in the virtual display area of the frame buffer is created, and the display data in the virtual display area is supplied to the display drive circuit 91AK148. In this way, the image may be output to the image display device 5 side.

For example, an image display area and an image drawing area are allocated to the storage area of the frame buffer. Display data for displaying an effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 is stored in the image display area. The image drawing area stores display data of each effect image created by drawing processing. The image display area and the image drawing area may be switched each time a V blank occurs. The V blank is generated at a period when the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is updated. Each time a V blank is started, a V blank interrupt signal is output from the VDP91AK132 to the CPU91AK131, and various interrupt signals may also be output from the VDP91AK132 to the CPU91AK131. By switching between the image display area and the image drawing area every time a V blank occurs, display data for each effect image is created in the storage area allocated as the image drawing area in a certain V blank cycle (first drawing display period). At the same time, this storage area is switched to the image display area in the next V blank period (second drawing display period). Therefore, the display data created by the drawing process in the first drawing display period is output to the image display device 5 in the second drawing display period, and an image drawing area is allocated in the second drawing display period. Display data created in the drawing process is stored in the storage area.

The audio processing circuit 91AK133 generates an audio signal that enables audio output using the speakers 8L and 8R, based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and the VDP 91AK132. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 of the VDP 91AK132 is supplied to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The audio decoder 91AK151 decompresses and decodes compression-encoded audio data to generate an audio signal. Furthermore, the audio processing circuit 91AK133 may include an audio data memory capable of storing audio data not included in the moving image data in advance. The audio data memory may be provided outside the audio processing circuit 91AK133 by being included in the performance data memory 91AK123, ROM91AK124, etc., for example. The audio processing circuit 91AK133 may generate an audio signal by decompressing and decoding the audio data read from the audio data memory based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and the VDP 91AK132.

The lamp control circuit 91AK134 controls lighting modes (light emission modes) such as lighting, extinguishing, and blinking of light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs. The lamp control circuit 91AK134 generates lamp control data based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and the VDP91AK132, and outputs it to the lamp control board 14 and the lamp driver board. The motor control circuit 91AK135 controls operating states such as rotation, stop, rotation speed, and rotation angle (phase) of a drive motor that operably drives a movable member for performance such as the movable body 32. The motor control circuit 91AK135 generates motor control data based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and the VDP 132, and outputs it to the motor driver board. The built-in memory 91AK136 is a memory circuit built into the performance control microprocessor 91AK100, and is capable of storing various data used to control the progress of the performance.

FIG. 8-2 shows an example of the configuration of the storage area for effect control depending on the storage contents. In this embodiment, storage areas 91AKM01, 91AKM02, and 91AKM11 to 91AKM14 are provided as a plurality of storage areas. Each storage area may be provided, for example, so as to be included in the effect data memory 91AK123, ROM91AKM124, built-in memory 91AK136, or a part or all of these. The plurality of storage areas include a storage area 91AKM11 that stores data related to moving images, and a storage area 91AKM13 that stores data related to text images.

The storage area 91AKM01 stores performance control programs and performance control management data, and functions as a management area for performance control programs and the like. For example, table data that is the configuration data of various tables prepared for the CPU 91AK131 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100 to perform various judgments, decisions, and settings, pattern data that constitutes the performance control pattern, etc. are stored in the storage area as management data. It is sufficient if it is stored in 91AKM01.

The storage area 91AKM02 stores display control programs and display control management data, and functions as a display control program management area. For example, an image processing program prepared for the VDP91AK132 of the production control microprocessor 91AK100 to perform various image processing, a display process table that defines procedures for displaying production images, etc. are stored in the storage area 91AKM02. All you have to do is stay there. The image processing program may include a program that converts vector format image data to bitmap format image data. The image processing program may include a program that generates a bitmap text image based on text written using character codes and font data.

The storage area 91AKM11 stores moving image related data including moving image data and its related data. For video data, compressed image information including reference images, predicted images, etc. is generated by compression encoding processing such as motion compensation predictive encoding using multiple frames of original images, and is multiplexed with audio data. Any multiplexed encoded stream may be used. The moving image related data stored in the storage area 91AKM11 may include table data and data files that constitute a moving image display process table. The moving image display process table performs a display control process that allows the display content and display mode of the moving image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to be changed according to the elapsed time as the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. used. The display content of the moving image is the content of the moving image that is reproduced and displayed in correspondence with the moving image data. The display mode of a moving image is a mode or form when a moving image is played back and displayed, including a display style and a display layout of the moving image. Note that the table data and data files that constitute the moving image display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The storage area 91AKM12 stores character image related data including character image data and its related data. The character image data may be still image data in which arbitrary character images representing a plurality of types of decorative designs, people, figures, symbols, etc. are described in a vector format or a bitmap format. The character image related data stored in the storage area 91AKM12 may include table data and data files that constitute a character display process table. The character display process table is used for display control processing that allows the display content and display mode of the character image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to be changed according to the elapsed time as the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. It will be done. The display content of the character image is the content of the character image displayed corresponding to the character image data. The display mode of the character image is the mode and form when displaying the character image, including the display style and display layout of the character image. Note that the table data and data files that constitute the character display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The storage area 91AKM13 stores text image related data including text image data and its related data. The text image related data may include outline font data. Outline font data is data that can be converted into the glyph shape of each character in bitmap format image data by specifying a combination of multiple vertex coordinates connecting the outline for each character used to display a text image. be. The text image related data may include vector font data or stroke font data instead of or together with the outline font data. Vector font data and stroke font data are data that can be converted into the glyph shape of each character in bitmap format image data by specifying straight line or curve parameters for each character used to display a text image. . Outline fonts and vector fonts are included in scalable fonts whose quality does not easily deteriorate even when the font is enlarged or reduced. Text image data indicates a text image that constitutes a character string that is a combination of multiple character images, and includes arbitrarily set words such as sentences, paragraphs, sentences, clauses, words, or a combination of some or all of these. It is sufficient as long as it indicates the unit of the unit in a recognizable manner. Furthermore, the text image data may represent a text image consisting of only a single character image. The text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 using text image data may indicate subtitles, subtitles, or other information-conveying characters. It may also indicate decorative characters. Since the text image data is included in the effect data for displaying the text image, it may be stored in the effect data memory 91AK123. On the other hand, font data such as outline font data is used when the VDP91AK132 executes an image processing program, so it may be stored in either the ROM91AK124 or the built-in memory 91AK136. In this way, the storage area 91AKM13 may be provided in the effect data memory 91AK123, the ROM 91AK124, or the built-in memory 91AK136. Similarly, other storage areas may be provided in part or all of a plurality of memory devices such as the effect data memory 91AK123, ROM91AKM124, and built-in memory 91AK136.

The text image related data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 may include table data and data files that constitute the text display process table. The text display process table is used for display control processing that allows the display content and display mode of the text image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to be changed according to the elapsed time as the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. It will be done. The display content of the text image is the content of the text image displayed corresponding to the text image data. The display mode of the text image is the mode and form when displaying the character image, including the display style and display layout of the text image. Note that the table data and data files that constitute the text display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The storage area 91AKM14 stores audio-related data including audio data and its related data. The audio data stored in the storage area 91AKM14 is different from the audio that is played back and output in synchronization with the image in the performance using a moving image display, and can be played back and output as any audio as the performance progresses in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is fine as long as it is done. The audio-related data stored in the storage area 91AKM14 may include table data and data files that constitute the audio output process table. The audio output process table is used for audio control processing that can change the sounds such as sound effects and music output from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the elapsed time as the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 progresses. Note that table data and data files that constitute the audio output process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM01 as production control management data.

In the VDP91AK132 of the production control microprocessor 91AK100, the moving image data read from the storage area 91AKM11 is input to the demultiplexer 91AK142, and is separated into video data and audio data. The video data is input to the video decoder 91AK143, and the audio data is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compression-encoded video data and supplies it to the video renderer 91AK144. The moving image renderer 91AK144 executes conversion processing of video data according to the display mode including the display style and display layout of the moving image, and writes and stores the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. In this way, the display of the moving image is controlled using the moving image data that is the data stored in the storage area 91AKM11.

In the VDP91AK132 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100, the text image data read from the storage area 91AKM13 is input to the text image renderer 91AK146. If the text image data is compressed and encoded, it may be decompressed and decoded by the video decoder 91AK143 and then input to the text image renderer 91AK146. The text image renderer 91AK146 executes conversion processing of text image data according to the display mode including the display style and display layout of the text image, and writes and stores the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. In this way, the display of the text image is controlled using the text image data that is the data stored in the storage area 91AKM13.

FIG. 8-3 shows an example of determining the moving image data and text display process table according to the contents of the reach effect. In the super reach reach effects such as SP reach A and SP reach B, it is possible to perform an effect by displaying a moving image using moving image data and an effect by displaying a text image using text image data. The period in which the effect by displaying the moving image is performed and the period in which the effect by displaying the text image is performed may be partly or completely the same period, or may include different periods. The text display process table is a table in which process data used for display control is set, for example, when displaying a text image that is a combination of a plurality of character images.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 8-3, one of the moving image data 91AKD01, 91AKD02, 91AKD11, and 91AKD12 is determined according to the content of the reach effect, and one of the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, 91AKT11, and 91AKT12 is determined. be done. Among these, the moving image data is determined in one-to-one correspondence with the content of the reach effect. For example, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", the moving image data 91AKD01 is determined. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (jackpot)", the moving image data 91AKD02 is determined. When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (lose)", the moving image data 91AKD11 is determined. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (loss)", the moving image data 91AKD12 is determined. On the other hand, there are cases where the text display process table can be determined in common even for different reach effect contents, and cases where it cannot be determined. For example, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 30/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 70/100. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (jackpot)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 20/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 80/100. When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (lose)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 80/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 20/100. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (lose)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 70/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 30/100.

Text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 can be determined when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)" or "SP reach A (loss)", and when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (jackpot)" or In the case of "SP reach B (loss)", the decision cannot be made. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 can be determined when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (jackpot)" or "SP reach B (loss)", and when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)" or In the case of "SP reach A (loss)", the decision cannot be made. In this way, the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 are used to control the display of text images when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 are used to control the display of text images when the SP reach B reach effect is executed.

When the reach performance content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", a video display using video data 91AKD01 is executed, and when the reach performance content is "SP reach A (loss)", a video display is performed. An effect is performed by displaying a moving image using the data 91AKD11. A text image using either text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is added to a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD01 and a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD11. Can be displayed. When the reach performance content is "SP reach B (jackpot)", a video display using video data 91AKD02 is executed, and when the reach performance content is "SP reach B (loss)", a video display is performed. An effect is performed by displaying a moving image using the data 91AKD12. A text image using either text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 is added to a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD02 and a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD12. Can be displayed. Therefore, a text image using a common text display process table can be added to and displayed on a plurality of moving images displayed using different moving image data.

FIG. 8-4 shows an example of the structure of the text display process table. Of these, FIG. 8-4 (A1) shows an example of the structure of the text display process table 91AKT01 that can be used in response to the reach effect of SP reach A, and FIG. 8-4 (A2) shows the reach effect of SP reach A. A configuration example of a text display process table 91AKT02 that can be used in accordance with the production is shown. FIG. 8-4(B) shows an example of the structure of the text display process table 91AKT11 that can be used in response to the SP reach B reach effect.

In each text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with each other for a plurality of text display periods. Note that the text display process table may include text image designation information and text display setting information that are set in association with each other in a single text display period. The text display period specifies, for each text image to be displayed, a start time to start displaying the text image and an end time to end the display. The start time and end time of the text display period may be specified using the elapsed time since the display of the moving image in the reach effect has started, or may be specified using the elapsed time since the variable display has started. You can. However, if the display content of the text image is highly related to the display content of the video image, the start and end times of the text display period are determined using the elapsed time since the video image display started. It is desirable to specify. The elapsed time from the start of the variable display includes, for example, the elapsed time before the variable display changed to the reach mode, so even if the video image is a common reach effect due to the variable display effect before the variable display changed to the reach mode, The timing at which the display starts may vary. Even in such a case, if the start time and end time of the text display period are specified using the elapsed time since the display of the moving image started, the timing at which a specific image in the moving image is displayed, The timing at which a specific text image is displayed can be easily synchronized, and the linkage between the display of the moving image and the display of the text image can be improved. The text image designation information specifies text image data used for displaying a text image in a specifiable manner. For example, the text image designation information may be any information that designates the storage address, readout address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13. Alternatively, the text image specification information can be used to specify the content of the text image to be displayed using any character code, such as ASCII code, UNICODE (UTF-16 or UTF-8, etc.), or JIS code (Shift_JIS code, etc.). may be information that specifies. The text display setting information is information that specifies the display mode of the text image in a configurable manner based on display style information, display layout information, other metadata, etc. of the text image to be displayed. The text display process table may be written using a predetermined markup language such as TTML (Timed Text Markup Language). In addition, the text display process table only needs to be able to set text image designation information and text display setting information in association with each other in a text display period by using arbitrary table data.

FIG. 8-5 shows an example of text image display control using the text display process table. Of these, FIG. 8-5 (A1) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, and FIG. 8-5 (A2) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02. . FIG. 8-5(B) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT11. In these display control examples, when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, the display of the moving image is started at timing T00, and when the reach effect of SP reach B is executed, the display of the moving image is started at timing T10. Display of a moving image starts at a certain time.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A1), as shown in FIG. 8-5 (A1), in the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image designation information 91AKA01 Displays the specified text image. Also, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed. Display. Note that timings T02 to T04 are all included in the period from timing T01 to timing T05. After the timing T05 has elapsed, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA04 is displayed during the text display period from timing T06 to timing T08, and the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA05 is displayed during the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. Displays the specified text image. Note that timing T08 is a timing that arrives after timing T07.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A2), as shown in FIG. 8-5 (A2), in the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image designation information 91AKA01 Displays the specified text image. Furthermore, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed. Display. After timing T05 has elapsed, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA14 is displayed during the text display period from timing T06 to timing T08, and the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA05 is displayed during the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. Displays the specified text image.

In this way, the text image specified by the text image specification information can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in correspondence with the plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table. The first text display period included in the plurality of text display periods may include a period that is partially or entirely common to a second text display period that is different from the first text display period. For example, in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, and the second text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. 3 text display periods are included. In this case, the first text display period has a part in common with the second text display period, and a part in common with the third text display period. In this way, the first text display period includes a period that is partially common to the second text display period, and includes a period that is partially common to the third text display period. On the other hand, the entire period of the second text display period is common to the first text display period, and the entire period of the third text display period is common to the first text display period. Thus, the second text display period is entirely included in the first text display period, and the third text display period is entirely included in the first text display period. Further, the text display period from timing T06 to timing T08 and the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09 include a period in which a part is common to each other. In this way, a part of the first text display period may be included in the second text display period, and a part of the second text display period may be included in the first text display period. Alternatively, the entire first text display period may be included in the second text display period, and the entire second text display period may be included in the first text display period.

Depending on the settings in the text display process table, different text images specified by the text image specification information can be displayed in accordance with a plurality of text display periods. As a result, during the display period of the text image added to the video image, it is possible to change the first component related to the display content of the text image among the multiple components in the display of the text image according to the elapsed time. become. For example, according to the settings in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. As a second text display period included in the first text display period, a text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed in the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. After the second text display period ends at timing T03, as a third text display period included in the first text display period, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, text image designation information 91AKA03 or text The text image specified by the image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed. With such settings, only the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed during the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and from timing T03 to timing T04 in the first text display period. . On the other hand, in the period from timing T02 to timing T03, which is common to the second text display period, in the first text display period, the text image specification is applied to the display of the first text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the display of the second text image specified by the information 91AKA02 is added. On the other hand, during the period from timing T04 to timing T05, which is common to the third text display period, in the first text display period, the text image specification information is used to display the first text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the display of the third text image specified by 91AKA03 or the display of the fourth text image specified by text image specification information 91AKA13 is added. In this case, the display of the text image added to the display of the first text image is changed so that either the third text image or the fourth text image is displayed according to the determination result of the text display process table. It becomes possible to change.

The text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02 display the text image specified by the common text image specification information 91AKA01 during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, and display the text image specified by the common text image specification information 91AKA01 from timing T02 to timing T03. The text image specified by the common text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed during the display period. On the other hand, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed, and in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02, the text The text image specified by the image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed. The text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02 can be determined corresponding to the common moving image data 91AKD01 and 91AKD11. Therefore, even when moving images using common moving image data are displayed, the text images to be displayed are different in at least part of the plurality of text display periods, so that the display of the text images can be improved. Components can be changed. Note that when moving images using common moving image data are displayed, the text image serving as the display mode may be changed in all of the multiple text display periods depending on the determination result of the text display process table. good. When video images using common video data are displayed, some or all of the start time, end time, and period length may be different for multiple text display periods depending on the determination result of the text display process table. You can also let In this way, it may be possible to change part or all of the display period for displaying the text image added to one moving image, or it is possible to change part or all of the text image added to one moving image. You can also use it as

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 8-4(B), as shown in FIG. 8-5(B), in the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15, the text image designation information 91AKA21 Displays the specified text image. Also, during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T12, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA22 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T13 to timing T14, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA23 is displayed. Display. Note that timings T12 to T14 are all included in the period from timing T11 to timing T15. After timing T15 has elapsed, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA24 is displayed during the text display period from timing T16 to timing T17, and the text image designation information 91AKA25 is displayed during the text display period from timing T18 to timing T19. Displays the specified text image.

FIG. 8-6 shows a specific example of text display setting information. The text display setting information includes data corresponding to multiple fields, such as origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration. The origin field can set the origin coordinates when displaying a text image. The fontFamily field allows setting of the font family, which is the font type, for the font of characters included in the text image. The fontSize field allows you to set the font size at which the text image will be displayed. The fontWeight field allows setting the thickness of characters included in the text image. The color field allows setting the display color of characters included in the text image. The backgroundColor field allows setting the display color of the background in the text image. The fontStyle field allows you to set the style of the characters in the text image, such as regular, italic, or italic. The textAlign field allows you to set the alignment of characters included in a text image, such as right alignment, center alignment, or left alignment. The textDecoration field can set decorative displays added to the text image, such as underlines, overlines, strikethroughs, and other effect images. In this way, the text display setting information allows the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, to be set.

FIG. 8-6(A) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB01. FIG. 8-6(B) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB02. FIG. 8-6 (C1) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB03. FIG. 8-6 (C2) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB13. The text display setting information 91AKB01 is included in the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. The text display setting information 91AKB02 is included in the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. The text display setting information 91AKB03 is included in the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11, but is not included in the text display process table 91AKT02. The text display setting information 91AKB13 is included in the text display process table 91AKT02, but not included in the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11.

In the plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table, the text image specified by the text image specification information is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. can be displayed. As a result, during the display period of the text image added to the video image, it is possible to change the second component related to the display mode of the text image among the multiple components in the display of the text image according to the elapsed time. become. For example, due to the settings in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. Displayed in the specified display style and display layout. As a second text display period included in this first text display period, in the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. Displayed in display style and display layout. After the second text display period ends at timing T03, a third text display period included in the first text display period is specified by text image specification information 91AKA03 in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. The text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, and the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display style set by the text display setting information 91AKB13. It may be displayed in different display layouts. With such settings, only the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed as text during the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and from timing T03 to timing T04 in the first text display period. It is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the setting information 91AKB01. On the other hand, in the period from timing T02 to timing T03, which is common to the second text display period, in the first text display period, the text image is added to the display of the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the text image specified by the specification information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. On the other hand, during the period from timing T04 to timing T05, which is common to the third text display period, in the first text display period, the text image specification is added to the display of the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01. The text image specified by the information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, and the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed by the text display setting information 91AKB13. The display of the text image is changed so that it may be displayed in the specified display style and display layout.

In the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed in the text display setting information 91AKB02, which is different from the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. It can be displayed using the display style and display layout set by . In the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed in the text display setting information 91AKB03, which is different from the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. It may be displayed using the display style and display layout set by . Alternatively, in the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed in a text display setting different from the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. The information 91 may be displayed in the display style and display layout set by AKB13. In this way, in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, in the period common to the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed as the first text display period. In addition to displaying the text image in one display mode, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 can be displayed in a second display mode different from the first display mode. In the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, in a period common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed in the first display mode. At the same time, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA03 may be displayed in a third display mode different from the first display mode and the second display mode. Alternatively, in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, in a period common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is first displayed. The text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA13 may be displayed in a fourth display mode different from the first to third display modes. Therefore, during the display period of text images added to a moving image, some text images can be displayed in a different display mode from other text images. Furthermore, after displaying the text image in the second display mode together with the text image in the first display mode, there are cases in which the text image in the second display mode is changed to a text image in the third display mode and then displayed. The display mode of the text image can be changed and displayed, as in the case where the text image of the mode is changed to the text image of the fourth display mode and displayed.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A2), in the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, text The text image specified by the specification information 91AKA01 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. Further, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. Thereby, a common text image can be displayed in a common display mode. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. Display. In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13, corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. This allows different text images to be displayed in different display modes. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT11, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA21 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01, corresponding to the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15. Display. Also, corresponding to the text display period from timing T11 to timing T12, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA22 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. In this case, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA21 can be displayed in the same display mode as the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01. Further, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA22 can be displayed in the same display mode as the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02. In this way, even different text images added to different moving images may be displayed in a common display mode according to setting data based on common text display setting information. Alternatively, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB05, corresponding to the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. let In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB15, corresponding to the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. In this way, even a common text image may be displayed in different display modes depending on the text display setting information.

In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with each other for a plurality of text display periods. Further, in the plurality of text display process tables, at least some of the text image specification information and text display setting information set in association with the plurality of text display periods can be set as common information, and , some or all of the information can be set as different information. With these settings, the first component and second component regarding the text image, such as the display content and display mode of the text image, can be individually changed and displayed.

In the text display setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. 8-6(A), the display color of the text image is set to change stepwise from #FF0040 to #4000FF using the color field. In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A2), in the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, text display A text image in the display mode set by the setting information 91AKB01 is displayed. In the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 8-4(B), a text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is displayed during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15. In these cases, when the text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is displayed as a text image corresponding to the display content that is the common first component in the corresponding text display period, The display mode, which is a second component regarding the text image, such as the display color of the text image, can be changed depending on the elapsed time. Note that, for example, the display color of the text image set by the color field may be changeable depending on the reach effect content etc. even if the same text image is specified by the text image specification information. . In this case, for example, whether or not the display color of the text image is changed at different rates depending on whether the display result of the variable display is a "jackpot" or not is controlled to be in an advantageous state. may be determined, or may be determined to be one of a plurality of display colors. Furthermore, even if the same text image is specified by the text image specification information, the display color of the text image set by the color field, for example, can be changed depending on the execution result of the production control program by the CPU91AK131. It may be possible. In this case, the VDP91AK132 only needs to be able to change the display color of the text image set by the color field to a different display color based on display control commands from the CPU91AK131, register settings, and the like. In this way, the display mode such as the display style of the text image can be changed by simply changing some of the data related to the text image included in the text display process table, thereby preventing an increase in data volume and processing load. , it becomes possible to display a variety of text images. When changing the display color of a text image, other display styles may also be correspondingly changeable. For example, if the display color of the text image is white, the display of the text image will be easier for the player to visually recognize, and if the display color of the text image is red, the display of the text image will be difficult for the player to recognize. Tend. Therefore, when the display color of the text image is changed to red, the text image set by the fontSize field is displayed so that the font size is larger than when the display color of the text image is white. The size may be changed. As a specific example, a text image that is displayed with a font size of 10.5px when the display color is white will be displayed with a font size of 11px when the display color is changed to red. It would be good if it could be changed so that This makes it possible to display a text image that is easy for the player to visually recognize while suppressing the player's discomfort when displaying the text image.

FIG. 8-7 shows an example of performing an effect in which a text image is displayed using a text display process table. In this execution example, text images are displayed in accordance with a plurality of text display periods along with a moving image display when the SP reach A reach effect is executed. In the reach effect of SP Reach A, a moving image is displayed using moving image data 91AKD01 when the display result of the variable display is a "jackpot", and a moving image is displayed using the moving image data 91AKD01 when the display result of the variable display is a "loss". A moving image is displayed using the data 91AKD11. In the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD01 and the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD11, an effect display is performed that is a battle effect in which a common ally character and an enemy character compete, and for example, the battle result is displayed. It is sufficient that the contents of the effect display be the same until the timing of notification. In addition, when the display result of the variable display becomes a "jackpot", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 becomes high, and when the display result of the variable display becomes a "loss", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01. becomes higher. Therefore, in the reach performance of SP Reach A, even in the video display period that is the common content of the performance display, the jackpot expectation level can be varied depending on the display content of the text image according to the text display process table. I can do it.

The effect execution example 91AKD11 shown in FIG. 8-7(A) is the effect content common to the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, and the text image designation information 91AKA01 corresponds to the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. The text image specified by is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. In this case, the text image indicating the reach name "SP reach A" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 has the origin coordinates (300,30), for example, as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. The font family is AA_gothic, which is a Gothic typeface, the font size is 48px, the bold line width corresponds to the bold character thickness, the text image display color changes gradually from #FF0040 to #4000FF, The components in the display of the text image are controlled so that the background display color is #CCF0F0, the character style is italic or italic corresponding to italic, the character arrangement is centered, and the character decoration is not set. In the performance control microprocessor 91AK100, the text image renderer 91AK146 of the VDP91AK132 executes image conversion processing to display the text image in the display mode including the display style and display layout specified by the text display specification information. good.

Further, in the production execution example 91AKD11 shown in FIG. 8-7(A), the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is changed to the text display setting information 91AKB02 corresponding to the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. It is displayed in the display mode set by . In this case, the text image indicating the line "If this character wins..." specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 has the origin coordinates (250,600 ), the font family is BB_mincho, which is classified as a Mincho font, the font size is 36px, the normal line width corresponds to normal character thickness, the text image display color is #FFFFFF, and the background display color is #220C0C. , the components in the display of the text image are controlled so that the character style is normal, the character arrangement is left justified, and the character decoration is not set.

The production execution example 91AKD21 shown in FIG. 8-7 (B1) includes production contents different from the text display process table 91AKT02 when the text display process table 91AKT01 is used, and is executed during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. Correspondingly, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03. In this case, the text image indicating the line "Chance!!" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 has, for example, the origin coordinates (250,600) and the font family as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03. CC_gothic typeface classified as Gothic, font size 60px, normal line width corresponding to normal character thickness, text image display color #000000, background display color #FFFFFF, character style normal Components in the text image are controlled so that the corresponding regular font, character arrangement is centered, and character decoration is not set. This text image has the same origin coordinates and character decorations as the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02, font family, font size, character thickness, text image display color, and background display. Colors, text styles, and text alignment have changed. In this way, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, it may be possible to change and display part of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information. .

The production execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 8-7 (B2) includes production contents different from the text display process table 91AKT01 when the text display process table 91AKT02 is used, and is executed during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. Correspondingly, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13. In this case, the text image indicating the line "Super hot" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 has the origin coordinates (250,600) and the font family DD_mincho as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13. The font size is 72px, the bold line width corresponds to bold, the text image display color is gold, corresponding to "gold", the background display color is #000000, The constituent elements in the text image are controlled so that the character style is normal, the character arrangement is centered, and the character decoration is effect_gold, which is the effect display setting for gold display. Compared to the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02, this text image has only the origin coordinates in common, font family, font size, character thickness, text image display color, background display color, Text style, text placement, and text decoration have been changed. In this way, when displaying a text image specified by text image specification information, among the data corresponding to multiple fields included in the text display setting information, data to be changed and data not to be changed can be individually set. It may be possible. When this text image is compared with the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01, all settings including the origin coordinates have been changed. In this manner, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, it may be possible to change and display all of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information. When displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, if you want to change and display one data among the data corresponding to multiple fields included in the text display setting information, the first data and Other data associated in advance may also be changed and displayed. For example, when changing the display color of a text image to gold corresponding to "gold" and displaying it, it is only necessary to change the text decoration to the effect display setting for gold display using effect_gold.

The display color and background display color of the text image are for each display color of R (red), G (green), and B (blue), for example, the brightness (gradation) is between "0" and "255". The level can be set in 256 steps. In text display setting information, the field data that makes up the color field and backgroundColor field has a common data format with the field data that makes up the color field and backgroundColor field, for example, in character display setting information used to display character images. All you have to do is stay there. Further, the coordinates of the origin when displaying a text image can be set by a combination of the x-coordinate in the horizontal direction and the y-coordinate in the vertical direction on the screen of the image display device 5. In the text display setting information, the field data forming the origin field may have a common data format with the field data forming the origin field in the character display setting information, for example. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information may be shared with field data included in the setting information used to display a production image different from a text image, such as character display setting information. It may have a format. With such text display setting information, it is sufficient if the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, can be changed using information common to a production image different from the text image. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load of changing the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

Font families that can be set when displaying text images are not set when displaying character images. In the text display setting information, the field data forming the fontFamily field may be unique field data that is not included in the character display setting information. Furthermore, instead of the font size that can be set when displaying a text image, it is sufficient if the character size can be set when displaying a character image. In the text display setting information, the field data forming the fontSize field corresponds to the field data forming the characterSize field in the character display setting information, but may have a unique field format. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information may be different from the field data included in the setting information used to display a production image different from a text image, such as character display setting information. It may have a data format. With such text display setting information, it is possible to change the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, using unique information that is not used in a production image different from the text image. Good too. Thereby, a variety of text images can be displayed by flexibly changing the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

For example, if a gold color corresponding to "gold" is set as the display color of the text image, the text decoration becomes the effect display setting for gold display using effect_gold. In the text display setting information, when "gold" is set in the color field, effect_gold is set in the textDecoration field to display a glossy text image and to display gold around the text image. It is possible to add and display a special effect image. In the production execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 8-7 (B2), when the text image specification information 91A13 specifies a specific text image indicating the line "Super hot", the text display setting information 91AKB13 allows for gold display. By setting the display style, etc., a specific text image showing the line "Super hot" is displayed with gloss, and an effect image for golden display is displayed around the specific text image. . This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the text image display and improve the interest of the performance by displaying the text image.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when an effect is executed by displaying a moving image using moving image data, by adding an effect by displaying a text image using text image data, it is easier for the player to recognize the content of the effect. This makes it easier to provide information that is different from the content of the performance. In this case, if the data structure is such that text image data is compressed and encoded and multiplexed as video data included in the video data, the outline of the text image will be Problems such as blurring and deterioration of display quality may occur. Furthermore, if different video image data is prepared depending on the display content of the text image display added to the video image display, the data capacity of the video data tends to increase, and the processing load of the image data also increases. It becomes easier. If special compression encoding processing or decompression decoding processing is performed in order to prevent deterioration of display quality in text image display, there is a risk that the processing load of image data will further increase.

The characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK add a text image display effect using text image data read from the storage area 91AKM13 when a moving image display effect using the moving image data read from the storage area 91AKM11 is executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to display various text images easily and with high quality, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize the content of the performance. In addition, since text image display effects are added using text image data stored separately from the video data, it is possible to avoid an increase in the data capacity of the video data and an increase in the processing load of the image data. , it becomes possible to appropriately control the display so as to prevent it as much as possible.

A text image display added to a moving image display using moving image data is controlled using a text display process table. Similarly, moving image display is controlled using a moving image display process table, character image display is controlled using a character display process table, and audio output is controlled using audio output process data. In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with each other for a plurality of text display periods. The text image designation information, as a first component related to the text image, designates the display content of the text image according to the text image data. The text display setting information sets the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, as a second component related to the text image. In the VDP91AK132 of the production control microprocessor 91AK100, for example, the text image renderer 91AK146 displays the text image specified by the text image specification information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. It is possible to perform image conversion processing, etc. As a result, during the display period of the text image added to one video image, the display content of the text image as the first component and the display mode of the text image as the second component can be changed depending on the elapsed time, etc. Make it changeable. By making it possible to change the first and second components related to the text image added to the first video image, various text image displays can be easily executed with high quality, and the data capacity and processing burden can be reduced. Appropriate display control becomes possible so that the increase is prevented.

When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", when the effect by displaying a moving image using the moving image data 91AKD01 is executed, either the text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is used. It can be displayed with a text image added. If the reach effect content is "SP reach A (lose)", when the effect by displaying a moving image using the moving image data 91AKD11 is executed, either the text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is used. It can be displayed with a text image added. In addition, when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (jackpot)", when the effect by displaying a moving image using the moving image data 91AKD02 is executed, either the text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 is displayed. It is possible to add and display the used text image. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (lose)", when the effect by displaying a moving image using the moving image data 91AKD12 is executed, either the text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 is used. It can be displayed with a text image added. In this way, a text image using data related to a common text image, such as a common text display process table, can be added to and displayed on a plurality of mutually different moving images. By making it possible to add and display text images using common data to multiple video images, various text images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and increases in data volume and processing load are prevented. This makes it possible to control the display appropriately.

In the text display process table 91AKT02, a plurality of text images showing the line "Super hot" are displayed based on the text image designation information 91AKA13 and the text display setting information 91AKB13 that are set in association with the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. The display style and the like may be displayed so as to be changeable at the timing of . A text image that shows the line "Super hot" is a text image that corresponds to a specific first component group, such as a text image that is a display content that suggests that the display result of the variable display has a high probability of becoming a "jackpot". It only needs to be a text image. In this way, when displaying a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group, the second component, such as the display mode regarding the specific text image, may be changeable at multiple timings.

FIG. 8-8 shows an example of display control in a case where the display style of a text image indicating the line "Very hot" can be changed at a plurality of timings. In this display control example, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the display color is black and no text decoration is set during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041, and the text display period from timing T041 to timing T042 is During the display period, the display color is gold and no text decoration is set, and during the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05, the display color is gold and the effect display setting is such that the text decoration is gold. The text image display style that is common to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05 is a font whose font family is DD_mincho, which is classified as a Mincho font by the fontFamily field, and a font size of 72px by the fontSize field, respectively. It is set.

FIG. 8-8(A) shows a case where a text image with the line "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to black, which corresponds to #000000, and the textDecoration field sets the text decoration to no setting, which corresponds to none. As a result, the display mode including the display style of the text image showing the line "Super Hot" is controlled so that the display color is black and no text decoration is set.

FIG. 8-8(B) shows a case where a text image with the line "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T041 to timing T042. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to gold corresponding to "gold", and the textDecoration field sets the text decoration to no setting corresponding to none. As a result, the display mode, including the display style, of the text image showing the line "Super Hot" is controlled so that the display color is gold and no text decoration is set. When the display color of the text image is set to gold, a glossy text image can be displayed, for example, by displaying a gradation of the text image. However, if the text image display is only glossy, it may be difficult for the player to recognize the golden display.

FIG. 8-8(C) shows a case where a text image with the line "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to gold corresponding to "gold", and the textDecoration field sets the text decoration to effect display settings for gold display corresponding to effect_gold. be done. As a result, the display mode, including the display style, of the text image showing the line "Super Hot" is controlled so that the display color is gold and the text decoration is set to effect display settings in gold. In addition to setting the display color of a text image to gold, if the character decoration of the text image is set to display an effect for gold display, in addition to the gradation display of the text image, for example, the outline of the text image Effect images can be added and displayed around text images using display colors such as shading and shading, border display using bevels and embossing, layer styles that add glow, and combinations of some or all of these. As a result, in addition to giving the text image a glossy appearance, by adding and displaying an effect image around the text image, it becomes easier for players to recognize the golden display, and the game It can improve the impression of people.

In the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, one part of the text image is distinguished from the other part by the text image designation information 91AKA02 and the text display setting information 91AKB02 that are set in association with the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. It may be displayed in different display styles. The text image designation information 91AKA02 designates a text image with the line "If this character wins...". The text display setting information 91AKB02 sets a part of the text image called "Character" out of the text information indicating the line "If this character wins..." to display the display color and background of the text image differently from the other parts. All you have to do is set the color and font style.

FIGS. 8-9 show a display example in which a portion of a text image has a display style different from that of other portions. In this display example, a part of the text image "Character" is displayed with a white display color, a black background display color, and an italic text style, and the other part of the text image is displayed with a black display color. Display the background display color as white and the text style as normal. The text display setting information 91AKB02 corresponds to a part of the text image called "Character", and the color field sets the display color of the text image to white corresponding to #FFFFFF, the backgroundColor field sets the background display color to black corresponding to #000000, Set the italics corresponding to the italic character style using the fontStyle field. In addition, the text display setting information 91AKB02 corresponds to other parts of the text image, with the color field setting the text image display color to black corresponding to #000000, the background display color to white corresponding to #FFFFFF, and the fontStyle field setting the display color of the text image to black corresponding to #000000, and the background display color to white corresponding to #FFFFFF. Set the normal font corresponding to the character style normal. Thereby, by displaying a portion of the text image in a display style different from that of other portions, it is possible to enhance the player's impression of the display of the text image.

In displaying a text image constituting a character string that is a combination of a plurality of character images, a portion that is displayed in a display style different from other portions may be changeable in accordance with the progress of the presentation by displaying the moving image. For example, when the performance of a song or the audio playback of dialogue progresses as a video image is displayed, a part of the text image that corresponds to the progress status is displayed in a display style that is different from other parts, such as display in a specific color or highlight display. You may let them. The display style may be changeable so that a portion of the text image is displayed as fade-in or fade-out in accordance with the progress of the performance of the music or the audio reproduction of the lines. This is not limited to the situation in which a song is played along with a video image or the audio of a line is being played, but a part of the text image that is displayed in a different display style from the other parts can be changed depending on the elapsed time in the execution of a given performance. It may be possible. Thereby, in displaying the text image, a portion displayed in a display style different from other portions is changed in accordance with the progress of the performance, thereby making it possible to enhance the player's impression of the display of the text image.

This invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 does not need to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiments, but it is possible to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may also include a part of the configuration.

As a specific example, during the display period of a text image added to one moving image, the display content of the text image that is the first component and the display mode of the text image that is the second component are changed depending on the elapsed time, etc. Execute either one of display control that allows the display to be changed depending on the video image, and display control that allows the display of a text image added to multiple video images using common text image data. It is also possible to do one without executing the other. The first component and the second component related to the text image may be arbitrary components that can be changed, for example, regarding the display content and display mode of the text image. In place of or in addition to part or all of the display content and display mode of a text image, it is possible to change any component related to the display of a text image. It's okay. For example, when moving and displaying a text image, the time interval and movement width for updating the display position, the enlargement and reduction ratios when displaying enlarged or reduced text images, and the enlargement and reduction ratios depending on the elapsed time. Any configuration element that can be set regarding the display of a text image may be changed as long as it is possible to change any component that can be set regarding the display of a text image, such as the time interval or amount of change for updating the enlargement ratio or reduction ratio when changing the enlargement ratio or reduction ratio.

When displaying a text image corresponding to common display content, the display mode of the text image can be changed by changing the text image setting information 91AKB01 shown in Figure 8-6(A). The present invention is not limited to changing the display color, but may be any display mode that can be changed such as an arbitrary display style or display layout. For example, a text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 has origin coordinates, font family, Any display mode such as font size, character thickness, background display color, character style, character arrangement, decorative display, or a combination of some or all of these may be changed. A text image in a display mode set by text display setting information different from the text display setting information 91AKB01 may be able to change a display mode different from the text image in a display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. .

The text image data is not limited to being stored in the storage area 91AKM13 as data different from the moving image data, and at least some text image data may be included in the moving image data. For example, text image data for displaying highly designed characters, such as cursive and cursive, is multiplexed and compression encoded as part of the video data, and the video data separated from this video data is decompressed. It may be possible to display a text image in a specific manner by decoding it or the like. In this case, data regarding a text image in a specific manner is included in the moving image data and stored in the storage area 91AKM11. In this way, the data related to text images includes specific text image related data included in the moving image data and stored in the storage area 91AKM11, and normal text image related data stored in the storage area 91AKM13. You can.

The text display setting information included in the text display process table consists of field data corresponding to part of origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration as data corresponding to multiple fields. It may also be configured to include field data different from these. For example, when specifying the storage address, readout address, data size, etc. of text image data in the storage area 91AKM13 using text image specification information, the text image data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 is read out without using font data. , the corresponding text image can be displayed. In this case, the text display setting information does not require field data related to font settings, so it may be configured without including field data related to font settings, such as fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, and fontStyle. On the other hand, in this case, in order to set the display size of the text image, the text display setting information may be configured to include separate field data regarding text display settings, such as textSize, for example.

The scalable font data such as outline font data and vector font data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 may be prepared only with data corresponding to text images used in display effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or with, for example, general-purpose Japanese font data. Data corresponding to text images, such as word font data, which is not limited to text images used in display effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1, may be prepared. If only the font data corresponding to the text image used in the display effect is stored in the storage area 91AKM13, an increase in data capacity can be prevented when the text image used in the display effect is small. If general-purpose font data corresponding to text images not limited to text images used in display effects is stored in the storage area 91AKM13, reuse of the font data becomes easy, so designing effects for displaying text images is possible. The burden can be reduced, and when a large amount of text images are used in display effects, an increase in data capacity can be prevented.

As a second component related to a text image, a specific text image whose display mode including the display style and display layout of the text image can be changed at multiple timings is not limited to a text image showing the line "Super hot". , any text image that is preset as a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group may be used. For example, among the plurality of types of text images, a text image prepared in advance for displaying lyrics of a song or a text image prepared in advance for displaying subtitles of a moving image may be used as the specific text image. In this way, for a specific text image that corresponds to an audio production or a display production whose content changes depending on the elapsed time, such as the playback output of a song or the playback display of a moving image, the second component such as the display mode can be set in multiple ways. It may be possible to change the timing. Alternatively, a text image for which a specific display mode is set, such as a text image for rainbow display where the display color of the text image is rainbow colors, or a text image for motif display where the pattern or character decoration of the text image is a cherry blossom pattern. may be used as a specific text image. Alternatively, it is not limited to a text image of display content that suggests that the display result of the variable display has a high probability of being a "jackpot", but a text image of display content that suggests that the probability of being controlled to an arbitrary advantageous state is high. may be used as a specific text image. The advantageous state is not limited to a jackpot gaming state, but may include special gaming states such as a time saving state and a variable probability state. In addition, the upper limit of the number of round games that can be executed in the jackpot game state is the first round number (for example, "15") which is greater than the second round number (for example, "7"), and that it can be performed in the time-saving state. The upper limit number of times of variable display is the first number (e.g., "100") that is higher than the second number (e.g., "50"), and the jackpot probability in the probability variable state is higher than the second probability (e.g., 1/50). 1 probability (for example, 1/20), and the number of consecutive chances, which is the number of times the jackpot gaming state is repeatedly controlled without being controlled to the normal state, is greater than the second consecutive number of chances (for example, "5"). It may also include a part or all of the number of consecutive wins (for example, "10") resulting in a more advantageous gaming situation for the player.

A glossy text image is not limited to the case where the display color of the text image is set to gold, which corresponds to "gold"; for example, it may be silver, copper, other metallic colors, or any other color different from metallic colors. This may include a case where the display color is set. The present invention is not limited to the display color of the text image, and when displaying a preset specific text image, the specific text image may be displayed in a glossy display mode. When displaying an arbitrary text image with glossiness, settings should be made using the textDecoration field in the text display setting information so that an effect image can be added and displayed around the text image. Bye.

When displaying a text image as a rainbow, a plurality of display colors may be sequentially changed and displayed within a predetermined range such as intra-character coordinates or display time when displaying the text image. For example, if the display color of a text image is set to a rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" by the color field in the text display setting information, the display color can be changed to a different display color for each character coordinate of the text image. , it would be good if rainbow display were possible. For example, for the coordinates in the character 1, depending on the elapsed time, the display color changes from red, then orange to yellow, then green, then light blue, then blue, and then from bluish-purple to reddish-purple. You can change multiple display colors one after another. At this time, the brightness corresponding to each display color in the rainbow display is adjusted and each The display color of the coordinates within the text may be changed in the following order: red, orange, yellow, green, water, blue, blue-violet, and red-violet. After red-purple, you can change the display color again by returning to red. This allows the player to smoothly and clearly recognize the change in display color. In this way, when a special element is set as a character image component, such as when the display color of a text image is set to a rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" using the color field in the text display setting information, the text display process Even if it is possible to display a text image in which multiple display colors are sequentially changed within the range of character coordinates and display time of the text image specified by the text image specification information corresponding to the text display period included in the table. good. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the text image display and improve the interest of the performance by displaying the text image. Note that by sequentially changing different display colors according to the intra-character coordinates of the text image, the entire text image may be displayed in a rainbow manner. Alternatively, by sequentially changing a common display color for all intra-character coordinates, the display of the text image may be changed to a rainbow display according to the elapsed time. In this way, a text image may be displayed in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed within a predetermined range of either the intra-character coordinates or the display time.

The first component and the second component related to the text image may be changeable to different components depending on whether or not a specific movement of the player is detected, or multiple components may be changed at different rates. It may be possible to change either one. The specific actions of the player that enable the first component and the second component related to the text image to be changed include, for example, a push operation or a pull operation on the operation stick of the stick controller 31A serving as the V controller, and other operations such as a push operation or a pull operation on the operation stick of the stick controller 31A. It may be an arbitrary action of tilting the button 31b, or it may be an action of pressing down the push button 31b. Based on the detection results of any changes or differences in the detection target, such as the state of execution of processing or control on the detection target, changes in the shape, pattern, or color of the detection target, without being limited to those that can detect the player's movements. In addition, the first component and the second component related to the text image may be changeable. Detection devices capable of detecting movements, changes, differences, etc. in a detection target, such as infrared sensors, ultrasonic sensors, CCD sensors, and CMOS sensors, can detect the state of the detection target mechanically, electrically, electromagnetically, Any configuration that can be detected may be used. Alternatively, the state of the detection target may be detected by analyzing the result of photographing the detection target using a predetermined camera (video motion capture). As an example of detecting the state of the detection target using a camera, the screen display state of the mobile terminal may be detected, and the display content and display mode of the text image may be changed based on the detection result.

A part or all of the effect by displaying a text image using text image data may be executed as a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the reach performance content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In such a case, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 35/100 (=35%) if the setting value is 1, and 30/100 (=30%) if the setting value is 2. Yes, if the setting value is 3, it is 25/100 (=25%), if the setting value is 4, it is 20/100 (=20%), and if the setting value is 5, it is 15/100 (= 15%), and if the setting value is 6, it may be set to 10/100 (=10%). Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 65/100 (=65%) if the setting value is 1, and 70/100 (=70%) if the setting value is 2. Yes, if the setting value is 3, it is 75/100 (=75%), if the setting value is 4, it is 80/100 (=80%), and if the setting value is 5, it is 85/100 (= 85%), and if the setting value is 6, it may be set to 90/100 (=90%). According to these determination ratio settings, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", the rate at which the effect by text image display according to either text display process pattern 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is executed. is made different depending on the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, when the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, it is easy to perform an effect by displaying a text image according to the text display process table 91AKT01, and as the setting value increases, the text according to the text display process table 91AKT02 is easily executed. The ratio of performance based on image display increases. Therefore, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)" and the effect by text image display according to the text display process table 91AKT02 is executed, the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is advantageous to the player. The expectation level, which is a set value, increases.

In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in the case of a specific setting value, the setting suggestion performance may be made executable at a higher rate than in the case of a setting value other than the specific setting value. In this case, a limit is set such that in a range where the setting value is other than the specific setting value, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in a range where the setting value is the specific setting value. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that can be executed at a predetermined rate when the setting value is a specific setting value, and is not executed when the setting value is other than the specific setting value. In this way, within a range where the setting value is a specific setting value, setting suggestion effects can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, in a range where the setting value is other than the specific setting value, a limit is set in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

It may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on whether or not it is a special period. For example, when it is a special period, setting suggestion effects may be executed at a higher rate than when it is a period other than the special period. In this case, a limit is set in which the execution rate of setting suggestion effects is lower in a range that is a period other than the special period than in a range that is a special period. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that can be executed at a predetermined rate during a special period, but is not executed during a period other than the special period. In this way, within the special period, setting suggestion effects can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, a limit is set in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed within a period other than the special period.

The present invention is not limited to whether or not it is a special period, and it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on whether or not an arbitrary special condition is satisfied. For example, when the special condition is met, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the special condition is not met. In this case, a limit is set in which the execution rate of the setting suggestion performance is lower in a range where the special condition is not met than in a range where the special condition is met. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that becomes executable at a predetermined rate when a special condition is met, but is not executed when the special condition is not met. In this way, within the range where the special condition is satisfied, setting suggestion effects can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, a limit is set in which the setting suggestion performance is not executed in a range where the special condition is not satisfied. The special condition may be any condition that can be established depending on the progress or history of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the result of the judgment or decision of the game, or the progress or history of the performance or the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be any condition that can be established depending on the judgment or decision. Not limited to setting suggestion effects, any effect may be one that can be executed at different rates depending on whether or not a preset condition is met, or whether such a condition is met or not. The production mode may be determined at different rates depending on whether such conditions are met, or the execution timing may be determined at different rates depending on whether such conditions are satisfied. . In addition, a restriction may be set for an arbitrary performance such that a specific performance is not executed within a range where a preset restriction condition is met, or compared to a range where the restriction condition is not satisfied. A limit may be set such that the execution rate decreases and it is difficult to execute.

(Problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 91AK)
A gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine 1, which is capable of executing a game, and is capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image to which a character image is added, such as a reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B, for example. For example, a performance execution means such as a microprocessor 91AK100 for performance control, a first storage area such as a storage area 91AKM11 that stores data related to moving images, and a second storage area such as a storage area 91AKM13 that stores data related to character images. A moving image control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 or a moving image renderer 91AK144, which controls the display of a moving image using the data stored in the first storage area, and a moving image control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 or a moving image renderer 91AK144, which controls the display of a character image using the data stored in the second storage area. It includes a character image control means such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a text image renderer 91AK146 for controlling display, and the data stored in the second storage area is a first component such as a text image specified by text image designation information. and a second component such as a display style set by text display setting information. During the display period, the first component and the second component can be changed, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-7. This makes it possible to display various character images easily and with high quality, and to appropriately control the display so as to prevent an increase in data volume and processing load.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-8, the character image control means is capable of changing the second component regarding the character image when displaying the character image corresponding to the common first component during the display period. Good too. This enables appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be performed.

The character image control means changes the second component related to the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-6, using information common to a specific image different from the character image, such as field data configuring the color field. It may be possible. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means is capable of displaying a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image indicating "super hot", for example, as shown in FIG. The second component may be changeable at multiple timings. This enables appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be performed.

The character image control means may be able to individually change and display the first component and the second component regarding the character image, as shown in FIG. 8-4, for example. This enables appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be performed.

The data stored in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used to display character images, such as outline font data. This makes it possible to display various character images easily and with high quality, and to appropriately control the display so as to prevent an increase in data volume and processing load.

When a specific element is set as a character image component, for example, when the color field is "gold", a glossy character image is displayed as shown in Figure 8-8. It may also be possible to add an effect image to the surrounding area and display it. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the performance by the character image display.

When a special element is set as a character image component, for example when the color field is "rainbow", for example red, orange, yellow, green, It may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as water, blue, bluish-purple, and red-purple in this order. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the performance by the character image display.

(Problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 92AK)
A gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine 1, which is capable of executing a game, and is capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image to which a character image is added, such as a reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B, for example. For example, a performance execution means such as a microprocessor 91AK100 for performance control, a first storage area such as a storage area 91AKM11 that stores data related to moving images, and a second storage area such as a storage area 91AKM13 that stores data related to character images. A moving image control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 or a moving image renderer 91AK144, which controls the display of a moving image using the data stored in the first storage area, and a moving image control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 or a moving image renderer 91AK144, which controls the display of a character image using the data stored in the second storage area. It includes a character image control means such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a text image renderer 91AK146 for controlling display, and the data stored in the second storage area is a first component such as a text image specified by text image designation information. and a second component such as a display style set by text display setting information. and a second moving image different from the first moving image, such as a moving image using moving image data 91AKD11, for example, a text image according to text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, etc. , it is possible to add and display character images using data related to common character images. This makes it possible to display various character images easily and with high quality, and to appropriately control the display so as to prevent an increase in data volume and processing load.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-8, the character image control means controls the character image when displaying the character image corresponding to the common first component during the display period of the character image added to one moving image. The second component may be changeable. This enables appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be performed.

The character image control means changes the second component regarding the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-6, using information common to a specific image different from the character image, such as field data configuring the color field. It may be possible. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means is capable of displaying a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image indicating "super hot", for example, as shown in FIG. The second component may be changeable at multiple timings. This enables appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be performed.

The character image control means may be able to individually change and display the first component and the second component regarding the character image, as shown in FIG. 8-4, for example. This enables appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be performed.

The data stored in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used to display character images, such as outline font data. This makes it possible to display various character images easily and with high quality, and to appropriately control display so as to prevent increases in data volume and processing load.

When a specific element is set as a character image component, for example, when the color field is "gold", a glossy character image is displayed as shown in Figure 8-8. It may also be possible to add an effect image to the surrounding area and display it. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the performance by the character image display.

When a special element is set as a character image component, for example when the color field is "rainbow", for example red, orange, yellow, green, It may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as water, blue, bluish-purple, and red-purple in this order. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the performance by the character image display.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts)
The configuration regarding the characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK may be combined with part or all of the configuration regarding the characteristic part 60AK as appropriate. For example, an operation effect to be executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed can be executed as a setting suggestion effect, which is an operation effect in a suggestion effect mode, and in a display period of a character image added to one moving image, the first component and the second component may be changeable, or a character image using data regarding a common character image may be created for the first video image and a second video image different from the first video image. It may be possible to add and display it.

(Explanation regarding characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK)
FIG. 9-1 shows a configuration example 01AKP0 of a screen display in the image display device 5 regarding the characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. In the configuration example 01AKP0, on the screen of the image display device 5, an active display area 01AKA1, a first pending display area 01AKB1, a second pending display area 01AKB2, and a small symbol display area 01AKC1 are provided.

In the active display area 01AKA1, active display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display being executed. In the first pending display area 01AKB1, a pending display is performed in accordance with the first pending storage number by displaying an effect image corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending. In the second pending display area 01AKB2, a pending display is performed in accordance with the second pending storage number by displaying an effect image corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending. In this way, in the active display area 01AKA1, the first pending display area 01AKB1, and the second pending display area 01AKB2, active display and pending display, which are specific displays, are possible based on information regarding variable display. The hold display in the first hold display area 01AKB1 is also referred to as a "first hold display," and the hold display in the second hold display area 01AKB2 is also referred to as a "second hold display."

For example, the first hold display area 01AKB1 can display holds that are associated with hold numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" in order from the right end, and the first hold display is aligned to the right. It is only necessary that the display area is configured so that it can be performed. In the second hold display area 01AKB2, for example, hold displays can be displayed that are associated with hold numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" in order from the left end, and the second hold display is aligned to the left. It is only necessary that the display area is configured so that it can be performed. In the active display area 01AKA1, an active display corresponding to the first pending display that was erased (digested) in the first pending display area 01AKB1 in response to the start of the first special figure game is started, and the second special figure game is started. In response to the start, an active display is started in accordance with the second pending display that was erased (expired) in the second pending display area 01AKB2. The active display that can be displayed in the active display area 01AKA1 may be one that has the same color and pattern as the first pending display and the second pending display.For example, the active display may be common to the first pending display and the second pending display. The effect image may be displayed larger than each pending display. The display mode of the active display may change to a display mode different from that of the first pending display or the second pending display by executing the active display change effect. Further, in the active display area 01AKA1, for example, an effect image showing a pedestal may be displayed below the active display, so that the active display can be distinguished from the first hold display and the second hold display.

A small symbol display area 01AKC1 is arranged at a predetermined position on the screen of the image display device 5. The small symbol display area 01AKC1 is smaller than the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and is provided at a predetermined position such as the right end of the screen of the image display device 5, for example. ing. In the small symbol display area 01AKC1, variable display of small symbols is performed in response to variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. The performance image showing the small design is smaller than the identification information image which is the performance image showing the decorative design, and can be displayed variably in a manner that is partially or completely common to each of the identification information images showing the decorative design. Any reduced identification information image may be used. For example, if the identification information image that shows a decorative pattern includes a part that shows a number and a part that shows a character, the production image that shows a small pattern corresponds to the same pattern number as the part that shows the number included in the decorative pattern. Since it is an image showing the numbers given and does not include a part showing a character, it is sufficient if the small pattern can be displayed in a simpler manner than the effect image showing the decorative pattern. In the small symbol display area 01AKC1, by displaying the small symbols in a simple manner, it is sufficient to prevent the player from misrecognizing the display contents and display results of the small symbols. In the small symbol display area 01AKC1 provided on the screen of the image display device 5, variable display of small symbols serving as reduced identification information is performed, and a determined small symbol serving as a display result is derived. The effect image showing the small pattern may be displayed at a position where it can be visually recognized at all times.

FIG. 9-2 shows a configuration example of an effect drawing command. In this embodiment, commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG06 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect drawing commands. Command 01AKG01 is a drawing command that commands color blending for blurring using bilinear sampling. Command 01AKG02 is a drawing command that instructs color blending to invert color information. Command 01AKG03 is a drawing command that commands color blending for blurring by changing magnification. Command 01AKG04 is a drawing command that commands color blending for monochrome conversion. Command 01AKG05 is a drawing command that commands color blending for blurring by rotation. Command 01AKG06 is a drawing command that instructs to change the offset amount of the image position.

The effect drawing command may be prepared as one drawing command or may be prepared as a display list. The display list is a group of commands for controlling drawing, and can be created by the CPU 91AK131 as a command string that is a combination of a plurality of commands for the VDP91AK132. The VDP91AK132 can execute drawing processing in the order of description in the display list. The effect drawing command may be composed of a combination of commands for setting a plurality of types of inter-pixel calculations. For example, a drawing command that commands color blending may function as a drawing command for each effect by setting parameters according to the effect to be applied. For example, the internal registers of the VDP91AK132 store control data that specifies calculation targets included in the display list, numerical data that specifies parameters, and other register values, and by storing register values according to execution commands, Drawing according to the display list starts.

When performing color blending for blurring using bilinear sampling in response to command 01AKG01, a reduced image is generated by texture mapping using bilinear interpolation on image data, for example. When generating this reduced image, a plurality of reduced images with different sampling point groups may be generated. Using the plurality of reduced images thus generated, a combined reduced image is generated by performing a color blending process such as alpha blending. Thereafter, by executing an enlargement process on the combined reduced image, it is possible to draw an image generated by changing the color information included in the image data so that the image is blurred.

When executing a color blend that inverts color information in response to command 01AKG02, for example, the maximum value (for example, 255) and the RGB value, which is the color information of each pixel (1 pixel) shown in the image data, are set. Execute the difference calculation process. For example, if the R value corresponding to "red" is "80", the color information can be inverted by obtaining 255-80=175. By executing the same difference calculation process for the G value corresponding to "green" and the B value corresponding to "blue", the color information contained in the image data is The generated image can be drawn by changing the .

When executing color blending for blurring by changing magnification in response to command 01AKG03, for example, a plurality of enlarged images or reduced images are generated by scaling processing on image data. At this time, a plurality of enlarged images or reduced images having different magnifications such as image enlargement and reduction ratios are generated. For example, for an image with a display magnification of 100%, two types of enlarged images are generated, such as an image with a display magnification of 102% and an image with a display magnification of 104%. Using the multiple enlarged or reduced images generated in this way and the image corresponding to the original image data (original image), blur processing is performed by performing color blending processing such as alpha blending. The generated image can be drawn by changing the color information included in the image data so that the image becomes the same.

When executing color blending for monochrome conversion in response to command 01AKG04, for example, execute monochrome conversion calculation processing for each pixel on RGB values, which are color information of each pixel (1 pixel) shown in image data. do. In the monochrome conversion calculation process, color information can be changed so that the image becomes monochrome by substituting RGB values into the calculation formula for color tone conversion. In this manner, by executing the monochrome conversion calculation process, it is possible to draw an image generated by changing the color information included in the image data so that the image is subjected to monochrome conversion.

When performing color blending for blurring by rotation in response to command 01AKG05, for example, a plurality of rotated images are generated by rotation calculation processing on image data. At this time, a plurality of rotated images with different image rotation angles are generated. For example, two types of rotated images are generated for an image with a rotation angle of 0 degrees, an image with a rotation angle of 2 degrees, and an image with a rotation angle of 4 degrees. Using the multiple rotated images generated in this way and an image corresponding to the original image data (original image), a color blending process such as alpha blending is performed to create a blurred image. An image generated by changing the color information included in the image data can be drawn so that

When changing the offset amount of the image position in response to command 01AKG06, the image position information is changed by, for example, coordinate value conversion processing on the image data. In the coordinate value conversion process, position information, such as UV coordinate values, when drawing an image is changed in accordance with an offset amount set as a parameter. The UV coordinate value is given as a texture coordinate attribute value when mapping a texture to an object. By executing the coordinate value conversion process, it is possible to draw an image generated by changing the position information corresponding to the image data so that the texture arrangement is different.

In this way, the effect drawing commands may include commands such as commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG05 that change the color information included in the image data and enable drawing of the generated image. Furthermore, the effect drawing commands may include a command, such as command 01AKG06, that enables drawing of an image generated by changing position information corresponding to image data. In addition, the effect drawing command may include a command that changes arbitrary attribute information regarding image data to enable drawing of the generated image.

Unlike these effect drawing commands, the CPU 91AK131 can also generate normal display drawing commands. The normal display drawing command executes a process of drawing an image corresponding to the image data without changing the color information included in the image data by not executing a composition process using color blending or the like.

FIG. 9-3 shows a configuration example of a screen display including various effect images that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. A plurality of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 are divided into a plurality of display layers and drawn. Different display priorities are set in advance for the plurality of display layers as display layers for effect images. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 9-3, layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 are provided as a plurality of display layers. Among these, the layer 01AKL1 is a display layer with the highest display priority, and displays an effect image showing a small symbol in the small symbol display area 01AKC1 in a displayable manner. Layer 01AKL2 is a display layer with the next highest display priority after layer 01AKL1, and renders an effect image corresponding to pending display or active display so as to be displayable. Further, the layer 01AKL2 may draw a presentation image showing a pedestal below the active display so that it can be displayed. Layer 01AKL3 is a display layer with the next highest display priority after layer 01AKL2, and displays an effect image used for a chance-up effect that increases the chance during reach. Layer 01AKL4 is a display layer with the next highest display priority after layer 01AKL3, and displays performance images showing decorative patterns in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Draw as possible. Layer 01AKL5 is a display layer with the lowest display priority, and draws an effect image, etc., which becomes a background image, so that it can be displayed.

The display layer in which the plurality of effect images are arranged is specified, for example, by display priority information included in the display list. In the display list, the effect image placed on layer 01AKL5 is specified as the first drawing target, and then the effect images placed on each display layer are specified as the drawing target in the order of layers 01AKL4, 01AKL3, 01AKL2, and 01AKL1. Good too. Further, for example, the image data of the effect images drawn on each of the layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 may be set with a Z value that is a depth value used when drawing the respective effect images in a superimposed manner. By setting the Z value using the Z value setting table, the Z value of the effect image drawn on each layer 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 may be a different value depending on the layer to which it is drawn. For example, a display layer to which a small Z value is assigned is placed closer (forward) in the Z-axis direction than a display layer to which a larger Z value is assigned, and has a higher image display priority. Just do it like this.

When the VDP91AK132 writes image data read from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the like to a frame buffer provided in the VRAM91AK147 or the like, the display priority can be determined by performing a Z value comparison calculation. At this time, for example, image data of a performance image with a small Z value is written to the frame buffer with priority over image data of a performance image with a large Z value. As a result, a presentation image drawn on a display layer to which a small Z value is assigned has a higher display priority than a presentation image drawn on a display layer to which a large Z value is assigned, and from the player's perspective. It can be placed on the near side (front side). On the other hand, a presentation image drawn on a display layer to which a large Z value is assigned will have a lower display priority than a presentation image drawn on a display layer to which a small Z value is assigned, and players will It can be placed on the back side (rear side). Note that the relationship between the Z value and the display priority may be an inverse relationship, and a display layer to which a larger value is assigned as the Z value has a higher Z value than a display layer to which a smaller value is assigned as the Z value. It may be arranged on the near side (front side) in the axial direction so that the display priority of the image is high.

In this way, the rendering process of the effect image according to the display layer is executed, and the display image 01AKD1 including a plurality of effect images is generated. The display image 01AKD1 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 after the images drawn on the layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 are combined in a superimposed manner as a plurality of display layers having different display priorities.

Among layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5, layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 are special layers, and layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 are specific layers. In layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 included in the specific layer, effect images can be drawn and displayed using a different drawing process from the effect images drawn in layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 included in the special layer.

FIG. 9-4 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect drawing synthesis process executed by the VDP91AK132. The effect drawing synthesis process is executed, for example, when a display list including effect drawing commands is transferred based on the result of decoding an instruction code by the instruction decoder 91AK141 of the VDP 91AK132. When the effect drawing synthesis process is started, image data to be subjected to the effect process is read out (step 01AKS01). For example, in the VDP91AK132, image data to be processed is read out from the effect data memory 91AK123, etc., and stored in the work area of the VRAM91AK147 for temporary storage. The data transfer circuit of the VDP91AK132 reads the image data to be processed from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the buffer area of the VRAM91AK147 by accessing the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, and transfers it to the work area of the VRAM91AK147. Just remember it. The image data to be subjected to the effect processing is designated by the drawing command as image data indicating an image to be drawn on one of the specific layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 among the plurality of display layers.

Thereafter, effect color blending is executed in accordance with the drawing command (step 01AKS02). For example, the VDP91AK132 uses some or all of the video renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146 to execute inter-pixel calculation processing specified by the drawing command, so that any of the commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG05, for example, All you have to do is perform color blending accordingly. In the case of command 01AKG06, coordinate value conversion processing may be executed to change the offset amount of the image position in texture mapping.

After step 01AKS02, images are combined and drawn in correspondence with the low priority display layer (step 01AKS03). At this time, the image for which effect color blending was performed in step 01AKS02 is drawn in the frame buffer for screen display of the VRAM91AK147. For example, the VDP91AK132 draws on layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 by executing inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by a drawing command using some or all of the video renderer 91AK144, character image renderer 91AK145, and text image renderer 91AK146. It is sufficient to store the images in a frame buffer for screen display while composing them according to the display priority. As a result, images drawn on any of layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, can be drawn for screen display after changing the color information of the image data by executing effect color blending. can.

After step 01AKS03, images are combined and drawn in accordance with the high priority display layer (step 01AKS04). For example, in the VDP91AK132, image data to be drawn is read out from the effect data memory 91AK123, etc., and drawn in a frame buffer for screen display in the VRAM91AK147. An image in a low-priority display layer has already been drawn in this frame buffer in step 01AKS03. The data transfer circuit of the VDP91AK132 reads the image data to be drawn from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the buffer area of the VRAM91AK147 by accessing the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, and uses it for screen display in the VRAM91AK147. All you have to do is transfer it to the frame buffer and store it. At this time, some or all of the video image renderer 91AK144, character image renderer 91AK145, and text image renderer 91AK146 execute pixel-to-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command, thereby drawing on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, respectively. Images may be stored in a frame buffer for screen display while being synthesized according to the display priority. The image data to be drawn in step 01AKS04 is designated by a drawing command as image data indicating an image to be drawn on either layer 01AKL1 or 01AKL2, which is a special layer among the plurality of display layers. As a result, images drawn on either layer 01AKL1 or 01AKL2, which are special layers, can be drawn for screen display without executing color blending for effects and without changing the color information of the image data. Can be done.

In this way, the VDP91AK132 can execute drawing processing for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5 using the image data stored in the predetermined areas of the effect data memory 91AK123 and the VRAM91AK147. Furthermore, by executing the effect drawing synthesis process, on the one hand, it is possible to change the color information included in the image data and draw the image to be drawn on any of the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. On the other hand, an image to be drawn on either layer 01AKL1 or 01AKL2, which is a special layer, can be drawn in accordance with image data.

When a display list that does not include effect drawing commands but includes normal display drawing commands is transferred, the VDP91AK132 can execute normal drawing synthesis processing that is different from effect drawing synthesis processing. In normal drawing composition processing, the data transfer circuit of the VDP91AK132 reads the image data to be drawn from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the buffer area of the VRAM91AK147 by accessing the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, and transfers it to the VRAM91AK147. The data may be transferred to a frame buffer for screen display and stored. At this time, some or all of the video image renderer 91AK144, character image renderer 91AK145, and text image renderer 91AK146 execute inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command, thereby drawing on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, respectively. Images may be stored in a frame buffer for screen display while being synthesized according to the display priority. In this case, the image drawn on any of layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, and layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, has the color information of the image data changed without executing color blending for effects. It can be drawn for screen display without having to do so.

FIG. 9-5 shows an example of execution of image processing using effect drawing and synthesis processing. In this case, in the display list including effect drawing commands, among the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 included in the specific layer, the image data 01AKD03 of the effect image placed in layer 01AKL3, the layer Image data 01AKD04 of the effect image placed in layer 01AKL4 and image data 01AKD05 of the effect image placed in layer 01AKL5 are respectively specified. When the VDP91AK132 reads out these image data in step 91AKS01 of the effect drawing and synthesis process, it stores them in the subframe buffer 01AKF01 provided in the work area of the VRAM91AK147 and temporarily stores them. As a result, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A1), the image data 01AKD03 of the effect image placed on layer 01AKL3, the image data 01AKD04 of the effect image placed on layer 01AKL4, and the image data 01AKD04 of the effect image placed on layer 01AKL5, Image data 01AKD05 of the image is stored in subframe buffer 01AKF01.

Subsequently, the VDP 91AK132 performs effect color blending on the image data stored in the subframe buffer 01AKF01 in step 91AKS02 of the effect drawing and synthesis process. For example, when a color blend for monochrome conversion is specified by command 01AKG04 as an effect drawing command, color information included in the image data is changed by executing monochrome conversion calculation processing. As a result, the color information of the image data 01AKD03 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL3 is changed so that it becomes monochrome-converted image data 01AKD13 as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2). The color information of the image data 01AKD04 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL4 is changed so that it becomes monochrome-converted image data 01AKD14 as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2). The color information of the image data 01AKD05 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL5 is changed so that it becomes monochrome-converted image data 01AKD15 as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2).

Thereafter, the VDP 91AK132 synthesizes images corresponding to the low priority display layer in step 91AKS03 of effect drawing synthesis processing. For example, image data read from the subframe buffer 01AKF01 is written and stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in order from the display layer with the lowest display priority. At this time, it is sufficient to overwrite the image data or erase hidden surfaces depending on the display priority. Among the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the subframe buffer 01AKF01 shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2), the image data 01AKD15 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL5 is read first and written to the main frame buffer 01AKF02. Let me remember it. The image data 01AKD14 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL4 is read out second, and is written superimposed on the image data 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 to be synthesized. The image data 01AKD13 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL3 is read out third, and is written in a superimposed manner on the image data 01AKD14 and 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 to be synthesized.

Then, the VDP 91AKD 132 synthesizes images corresponding to the high priority display layer in step 91AKS04 of the effect drawing synthesis process. At this time, for example, by a drawing command included in the display list, image data 01AKD02 of the effect image placed in layer 01AKL2 among layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 included in the special layer is specified first as the image data to be drawn. , image data 01AKD01 of the effect image arranged in layer 01AKL1 is specified next. Each time the VDP91AK132 reads these image data, it writes and stores them in the main frame buffer 01AKF02. That is, among the image data 01AKD01 and 01AKD02 to be drawn, the image data 01AKD02 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL2 is read out first, and is superimposed on the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02. Write and synthesize. The image data 01AKD01 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL1 is finally read out and written in a superimposed manner on the image data 01AKD02, 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 to be synthesized.

In this way, the image data 01AKD03 to 01AKD05 temporarily stored in the subframe buffer 01AKF01 is converted to image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 with color information changed by effect color blending, and the converted image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 is given priority for display. are written to the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in the order according to the time. Thereafter, the image data 01AKD01 and 01AKD02 are written to the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in the order according to the display priority without changing the color information by not performing effect color blending. Therefore, 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, are drawn using a specific drawing process such as color blending for effects, and display various effects images such as background images, effects images showing decorative patterns, effects images that increase chances during reach. It is possible. On the other hand, the special layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 are drawn using normal drawing processing that does not perform color blending for effects, and are used to create effect images that show pending display, active display, and small symbols, etc., for the progress of the game. Related predetermined images can be displayed.

FIG. 9-6 shows an example of an image displayed by executing the effect drawing synthesis process. When a display list including effect drawing commands is transferred, the VDP91AK132 can display a rendering image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data by executing effect drawing synthesis processing. .

FIG. 9-6(A) shows an image display example 01AKM01 in the case of monochrome conversion. When a display list including the command 01AKG04 is transferred as an effect drawing command, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, a production image drawn by monochrome conversion calculation processing etc. from the effect color blend is displayed. It is possible. The monochrome conversion calculation process is a process for drawing with fewer colors than the color information included in the image data. As a result, in the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers of the image display example 01AKM01, as specific drawing processing, drawing is performed using monochrome conversion calculation processing, etc., in which drawing is performed using fewer colors than the color information included in the image data. Images for presentation can be displayed. In the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers of the image display example 01AKM01, it is possible to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by performing normal drawing processing without changing the color information included in the image data.

FIG. 9-6(B) shows image display example 01AKM02 in the case of color information inversion. When a display list including command 01AKG02 is transferred as an effect drawing command, it is possible to display a production image drawn by difference calculation processing among effect color blends in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. It is. The difference calculation process is a process for converting and rendering the value of color information included in image data so as to be inverted by the difference from the maximum value. As a result, in the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers of the image display example 01AKM02, as specific drawing processing, drawing is performed by a difference calculation process that converts the value of color information included in the image data and draws the image for presentation. can be displayed. In the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers of the image display example 01AKM02, it is possible to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by performing normal drawing processing without converting the values of color information included in the image data.

In addition, when a display list including command 01AKG01 is transferred as an effect drawing command, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, use a composition process that performs color blending for blurring using bilinear sampling as a specific drawing process. It is possible to display a presentation image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, need only be able to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing without changing the color information included in the image data through normal drawing processing.

When a display list including command 01AKG03 is transferred as an effect drawing command, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, as a specific drawing process, the image data is It is possible to display a presentation image drawn by changing the color information included in the image. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, need only be able to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing without changing the color information included in the image data through normal drawing processing.

When a display list including command 01AKG05 is transferred as an effect drawing command, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, are combined with image data by a compositing process that performs color blending for blurring by rotation as a specific drawing process. It is possible to display a rendering image drawn with the included color information changed. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, need only be able to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing without changing the color information included in the image data through normal drawing processing.

When a display list including command 01AKG06 is transferred as an effect drawing command, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, the image data is converted as a specific drawing process by coordinate value conversion processing that changes the offset amount of the image position. It is possible to display a presentation image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to the image. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are the special layers, need only be able to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing without changing the position information corresponding to the image data through normal drawing processing.

By using these effect drawing commands, you can draw a presentation image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data, or a presentation image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to the image data, on a specific layer. can be displayed. This makes it possible to perform different image processing depending on the effect drawing command, even for production images that are drawn using common image data, so that color information or position information can be changed and drawn. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the amount of image data from increasing and to perform various display effects to improve the interest in the game.

FIG. 9-7(A) shows an example of setting the jackpot reliability according to the contents of the reach effect. The jackpot reliability for each reach performance is the ratio of cases in which the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the game is controlled to a jackpot game state among the cases in which each reach performance is executed. In this setting example, the jackpot reliability is set to be different depending on the reach effect that is a plurality of types of super reach, such as SP reach A1 to A3 or SP reach B. For example, in the variable display pattern determination table, the proportion of the variable display result becoming a "jackpot" is set to differ depending on multiple types of reach effects by assigning a determination value that is compared with the random value for determining the variable display pattern. All you have to do is stay there.

SP Reach A1 to A3 are super reach effects with lower jackpot reliability than SP Reach B, and are also referred to as "weak SP reach." SP Reach B is a super reach effect with higher jackpot reliability than SP Reach A1 to A3, and is also called "Strong SP Reach." For example, the jackpot reliability of SP Reach A1 is 20%, the jackpot reliability of SP Reach A2 is 25%, the jackpot reliability of SP Reach A3 is 30%, and the jackpot reliability of SP Reach B is 80%. It is. Therefore, when the SP reach A1 reach effect is executed, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" about once out of five times. On the other hand, when the reach effect of SP reach B is executed, the variable display result becomes "jackpot" only about 4 times out of 5 times. In the case of SP reach A1 to A3, the reach performance content may include a performance mode in which some commonality can be recognized. For example, a common moving image may be played back and displayed as a background image for SP reach A1 to A3. Alternatively, a common character image may be displayed as an animation for SP reach A1 to A3. The ready-to-reach performance content may include a presentation mode that makes it possible to recognize the difference between the SP reach B and the SP reach A1 to A3. For example, for SP Reach B, a moving image different from that for SP Reach A1 to A3 may be played back and displayed as a background image. Alternatively, in SP Reach B, a character image different from that in SP Reach A1 to A3 may be displayed as an animation. The ready-to-reach performance content may include a presentation mode in which one of SP reach A1 to A3 can be recognized as different from other cases. For example, different moving images may be played back and displayed as background images for SP reach A1 to A3. Alternatively, character images different from each other may be displayed as animations in SP reaches A1 to A3. Other presentation modes that can be used to recognize differences include arbitrary displays on the screen of the image display device 5, arbitrary sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and arbitrary displays using light emitting members such as game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs. Any movement using a movable member for presentation, or a combination of some or all of these may be used.

When a super reach effect such as SP reach A1 to A3 is executed, a case where a drawing effect is executed by displaying an image drawn in response to an effect drawing command is included. As the drawing effect, it may be possible to select and execute one of a plurality of types of display effects that can display images drawn by different drawing processes according to the effect drawing command. As a drawing effect, an image drawn in response to an effect drawing command is not displayed, but even if it is possible to execute a display effect that can display an image drawn in response to a drawing command different from the effect drawing command. good. When a reach effect that becomes a super reach is executed, even if it includes a case where an effect is executed by displaying an image drawn only in response to a normal display drawing command without executing a specific drawing effect. good.

FIG. 9-7(B) shows an example of setting the drawing effect contents according to the drawing effect pattern. In this setting example, drawing effect patterns 02AKA01, 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, and 02AKB12 are prepared in advance as a plurality of drawing effect patterns. Depending on the plurality of drawing effect patterns, some or all of the drawing effect contents are different. The content of the drawing effect includes the presence or absence and type of the drawing effect by effect display, and the presence or absence of the drawing effect by strobe display. A drawing effect that does not include effect display or strobe display is also referred to as a normal drawing effect. A drawing effect using an effect display or a strobe display is also referred to as a specific drawing effect.

The effect display is an effect display in which color information included in image data is changed and drawn when an effect drawing command is generated and transferred. The types of effect display include a monochrome conversion effect and a color information inversion effect. The monochrome conversion effect uses command 01AKG04 among the effect drawing commands to draw and display a monochrome-converted effect image. The color information inversion effect uses command 02 of the effect drawing commands to draw and display an effect image with color information inverted. In this way, the effect display may be performed as long as it can display an effect image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data. Note that the effect display may be capable of displaying an effect image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to the image data using, for example, command 01AKG06 among the effect drawing commands.

A strobe display is an effect display that alternately and repeatedly displays an image drawn using image data and a single-color image (for example, black or white) with settings different from the image data, every predetermined number of frames. It is. Strobe display may be performed on images drawn on layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, when a drawing command different from the effect drawing command is generated and transferred. On the other hand, strobe display may not be performed on images drawn on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers. In this way, while strobe display can be executed within the range of images drawn on a specific layer, a limit may be set such that strobe display cannot be executed within the range of images drawn on a special layer. A temporary stop display may be performed together with the strobe display. The pause display is an effect display that gives the impression that the progress of the effect by displaying the image has been temporarily stopped by continuously displaying the same image over a predetermined number of consecutive frames. Note that when strobe display is not performed, temporary stop display may be performed.

FIG. 9-8 shows an example of determining a drawing effect pattern. For example, in the effect control process processing in step S76, when the variable display start setting process is executed in step S171, multiple drawings are performed at a ratio according to the variable display result and the content of the reach effect as shown in FIG. 9-8. It is sufficient if one of the performance patterns can be determined. When a variable display pattern corresponding to the reach effect of Super Reach is specified, the CPU91AK131 extracts a random value for determining a drawing effect pattern, and based on the random value, the CPU91AK131 extracts a random value for determining a drawing effect pattern, and, based on the random value, displays a variable display pattern according to the variable display result and the content of the reach effect. The drawing effect pattern may be determined by referring to the drawing effect pattern determination table.

In the determination example shown in Figure 9-8, if the variable display result is "Lose" and the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, it will be drawn at a rate of 60% (=60/100). The rendering effect pattern 02AKA01 is determined, the rendering effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined at a rate of 10% (=10/100), the rendering effect pattern 02AKB01 is determined at a rate of 10% (=10/100), and the rendering effect pattern 02AKB01 is determined at a rate of 10% (=5/100). /100), the drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is determined, at a rate of 10% (=10/100), the drawing effect pattern 02AKB11 is determined, and at a rate of 5% (5/100), the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is determined. be done. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "Jackpot" and the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is determined at a rate of 5% (=5/100). , the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined at a rate of 10% (=10/100), the drawing effect pattern 02AKB01 is determined at a rate of 15% (=15/100), and the rate of 20% (=20/100) The drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is determined, the drawing effect pattern 02AKB11 is determined at a rate of 20% (=20/100), and the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is determined at a rate of 30% (=30/100). Due to such determination ratios, the ratio at which the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and is controlled to a jackpot game state is different between the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 and the drawing effect patterns other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01.

The drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is a pattern in which a specific drawing effect, which is a drawing effect using an effect display or a strobe display, is not executed. On the other hand, drawing effect patterns 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, and 02AKB12 are patterns for executing specific drawing effects using one or both of effect display and strobe display. When the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is more effective than when the variable display result is a "loss". The proportion of drawing performance patterns other than those determined is high. Therefore, when the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, when a specific drawing effect is executed, which is a drawing effect using an effect display or a strobe display, the content is higher than when the specific drawing effect is not executed. , the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the ratio of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state increases. In addition, the determination ratio of the drawing performance patterns other than the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 is set according to the variable display result so that the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than that of the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01.

When the ready-to-reach effect content is SP reach-B, only drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 can be determined, and a restriction is set so that drawing effect pattern other than 02AKA01 cannot be determined. When the reach effect content is SP reach B, a super reach effect is executed which is a "strong SP reach" with higher jackpot reliability than in the case of SP reach A1 to A3. In such a case, if a specific drawing effect using an effect display or a strobe display is executed, it will be difficult for the player to visually recognize the super reach effect, which has a high probability of hitting the jackpot, and this may reduce the player's enjoyment of the game. be. Therefore, within the range where the reach effect content is SP reach B, a limit is set in which a specific drawing effect by effect display or strobe display is not executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being obstructed from the player's attention to the reach performance of the super reach with high jackpot reliability, and to appropriately improve the game interest.

When the reach effect content is one of SP reach A1 to A3, it is possible to determine one of the drawing effect patterns 02AKA01, 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, and 02AKB12 at different rates depending on the variable display result. . When the reach performance content is one of SP reach A1 to A3, a super reach reach performance is executed, which is a "weak SP reach" with a lower jackpot reliability than in the case of SP reach B. In such a case, when a specific drawing performance using an effect display or a strobe display is executed, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state increases. In this way, when the reach performance content is one of SP reach A1 to A3, the specific drawing performance is executed and the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state increases, so the super reach with low jackpot reliability Even if the game is a reach effect, the execution of the specific drawing effect can increase the player's expectations and appropriately improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, even when the reach effect content is SP reach B, it may be possible to determine a drawing effect pattern other than 02AKA01 at a predetermined ratio. However, when the ready-to-reach presentation content is SP ready-to-win B, it may be possible to determine a drawing presentation pattern other than 02AKA01 at a lower rate than when the ready-to-reach presentation content is SP ready-to-reach A1 to A3. In this way, in the range where the reach effect content is SP reach B, there is a limit that specific drawing effects using effect display and strobe display can be executed at a lower rate than in the range where the reach effect content is SP reach A1 to A3. Restrictions may be set as follows.

FIG. 9-9(A) shows the performance execution period in the variable display of super reach. When the super reach variable display is executed, the period from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display can be divided into a plurality of performance execution periods such as performance execution periods D0 to D4. The effect execution period D0 is a period from the start of the variable display until execution of the ready-to-win effect is started after the ready-to-win effect is established. The performance execution period D1 is a period from the start of the ready-to-reach performance execution period in which the super reach performance is executed until the start of the chance-up performance execution period in which the chance-up performance can be executed. The performance execution period D2 is a period from the start of the chance up performance execution period to the end of the chance up performance execution period until the start of the result notification performance execution period in which the result notification performance can be executed. The result notification performance may be any performance as long as it notifies the performance result corresponding to the display result of the variable display in the reach performance that becomes super reach. The performance execution period D3 is a period from the start to the end of the result notification performance execution period. The performance execution period D4 is a period from the end of the result notification performance execution period to the end of the variable display.

FIG. 9-9(B) shows performance control example 02AKC01 in each performance execution period. Among the multiple performance execution periods D0 to D4, in the performance execution period D2 from the start of the chance-up performance execution period to the start of the result notification performance execution period, if the drawing performance pattern is other than 02AKA01, the specific drawing performance SPE is executed. become executable. In the case of the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed, so even in the effect execution period D2, the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed and the normal drawing effect NOR becomes executable.

Among the multiple performance execution periods D0 to D4, in the performance execution period D0 from the start of variable display to the start of the super reach reach performance, regardless of whether the drawing performance pattern is 02AKA01 or a drawing performance pattern other than 02AKA01. , the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed and the normal drawing effect NOR becomes executable. For example, in the production execution period D0, if it is possible to perform a light emission production using the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs in response to the BGM and sound effect output when the variable display of decorative symbols starts. good. In addition, during the performance execution period D0, decorative symbols may be stopped (temporarily stopped) displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and ” When the decorative symbols constituting the pseudo-continuous eye are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs are activated in response to the BGM and sound effect output. It may also be possible to perform a light emitting effect using. In addition, during the entire performance execution period D0, the normal drawing performance NOR is executed, and in response to the BGM and sound effect output during the execution of the variable display, the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs are used to emit light. It may be possible to perform the performance.

Among the performance execution periods D1 to D4 in which the super reach reach performance etc. are executed during the execution of the variable display, in the performance execution period D1 following the performance execution period D0, the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 or a drawing performance pattern other than 02AKA01 is selected. Regardless of whether this is the case, the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed and the normal drawing effect NOR becomes executable. In the performance execution period D2 which is after the performance execution period D1, the normal drawing performance NOR can be executed when the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 is used, and the specific drawing performance SPE can be executed when the drawing performance pattern is other than 02AKA01. be. In the normal drawing effect NOR using the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, it is possible to display an image drawn by normal drawing processing. In the specific drawing effect SPE using a drawing effect pattern other than 02AKA01, it is possible to display images drawn by specific drawing processing, for example, in specific layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5. Note that even when a specific drawing effect SPE using a drawing effect pattern other than 02AKA01 is executed, it is sufficient that the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, can display images drawn by normal drawing processing, for example.

In the performance execution period D3 and the performance execution period D4 after the performance execution period D2, the specific drawing performance SPE is not executed and the normal drawing performance NOR is performed, regardless of whether it is the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 or a drawing performance pattern other than 02AKA01. becomes executable. In addition, in the effect execution period D3, similarly to the effect execution period D2, the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed when the drawing effect pattern is 02AKA01, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed when the drawing effect pattern is other than 02AKA01. It may be. If the specific drawing effect SPE is made executable in the effect execution period D3, the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE is changed to normal drawing in the effect execution period D4 for notifying the finalized decorative pattern etc. that will be a variable display result. What is necessary is to return to the execution of the effect NOR. Further, the specific drawing effect SPE may be made executable during all of the plurality of effect execution periods D1 to D4. Prior to the variable display in which the reach effect of super reach is executed, execution of the specific drawing effect SPE can be started based on the determination result that the reach effect of super reach will be executed as a judgment result at the time of starting winning. You can do it like this. Even if the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed in a period other than the effect execution period D2, in the same way as when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in the effect execution period D2, for example, in the specific layer 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, It is sufficient if it is possible to display images drawn by specific drawing processing, and for example, in layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, images drawn by normal drawing processing can be displayed.

Among the plurality of performance execution periods D0 to D4, when the normal drawing performance NOR is executed even in a period other than the performance execution period D0, a light emitting performance using light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs is performed. It is doable. On the other hand, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in the effect execution period D2 or the like, the light emission effect is controlled not to be executed. For example, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the light emitting effect may be prevented from being executed by turning off the light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs. In this way, when the normal drawing effect NOR that can display images drawn by the normal drawing process is executed, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect using a light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9. On the other hand, when a specific drawing effect SPE capable of displaying an image drawn by specific drawing processing is executed, a light emission effect by a light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 is not executed. Therefore, within the range of the performance execution period in which the normal drawing effect NOR that can display images drawn by the normal drawing process is executed, it is possible to execute the light emission effect by emitting light from the light emitting member, while the image drawn by the specific drawing process is In the range of the performance execution period in which the specific drawing performance SPE capable of displaying is executed, a restriction is set as a limit that the light emission performance by light emission of the light emitting member is not executed. When a specific drawing effect SPE using effect display or strobe display is executed, by not executing a light emitting effect, an appropriate image that allows the player to easily recognize the image drawn by the specific drawing process is created. The display can improve the interest in the game.

In addition, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in the effect execution period D2 etc., the restriction is not limited to not executing the light emission effect by light emission of the light emitting member, for example, the normal drawing effect NOR is executed. Restrictions may be placed on the presentation mode of the light emitting effect, such as reducing the amount of light emitting effect compared to when the light emitting effect is used. When the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, a restriction is applied to reduce the amount of effect by lowering the amount of light emitted from the light emitting member (brightness) in the light emitting effect than when the normal drawing effect NOR is executed. may be provided. Alternatively, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the amount of effect is reduced by reducing the number of light-emitting members that can emit light in the light emission effect than when the normal drawing effect NOR is executed. may be provided. Alternatively, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the amount of effect is reduced by reducing the luminous color used in the light emitting effect (for example, monochrome light emission) than when the normal drawing process NOR is executed. Limits may be set as follows.

FIGS. 9-10 to 9-13 show examples of execution of reach effects and drawing effects. FIG. 9-10 shows an example of performance execution when the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 is determined among the cases where a reach performance that becomes a super reach is executed. FIG. 9-11 shows an example of performance execution in the performance execution period D2 when the drawing performance pattern 02AKA02 is determined. FIG. 9-12 shows an example of performance execution in the performance execution period D2 when the drawing performance pattern 02AKB02 is determined. FIG. 9-13 shows an example of performance execution in the performance execution period D2 when the drawing performance pattern 02AKB12 is determined.

FIG. 9-10(A) shows an example of production execution 02AKM01 in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a ready-to-win mode and a ready-to-win is achieved. At this time, a reach is established when the common decorative symbols corresponding to the number "7" are all stopped and displayed (temporary stopped display) in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. , the normal reach reach effect is executed. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM01, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emission effect can be executed as appropriate in response to the effect execution period D0. For example, it is only necessary that it is possible to perform a light-emitting effect using light-emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs in response to BGM and sound effect output from the reach establishment to the super reach development.

FIG. 9-10(B) shows a performance execution example 02AKM02 in a case where the normal reach performance becomes a reach development in which the reach performance shifts to the super reach performance in response to the start of the performance execution period D1. 9-10(C) and FIG. 9-10(D) show performance execution examples 02AKM03 and 02AKM04 when the reach performance of super reach progresses in the performance execution period D1. In the case of production execution examples 02AKM02 to 02AKM04, it is possible to perform the normal drawing production NOR with the light emission production regardless of the determination result of the drawing production pattern, and the specific drawing production Do not run SPE.

FIG. 9-10(E) shows performance execution example 02AKM05 when the chance-up performance during reach is executed in the performance execution period D2. FIG. 9-10(F) shows performance execution example 02AKM06 when a reach performance is executed after the chance up performance in the performance execution period D2. In the case of the effect execution examples 02AKM05 and 02AKM06, the normal drawing effect NOR with the light emission effect based on the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is executed in response to the effect execution period D2. At this time, since the drawing effect pattern is 02AKA01, the specific drawing effect SPE by effect display or strobe display is not executed.

FIG. 9-10 (G) shows a performance execution example 02AKM07 when the result notification performance is executed during the performance execution period D3. At this time, as a super reach effect, a reach effect with different effect contents depending on the variable display result is executed, and also in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, the finalized decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed by oscillating display or the like. In the case of production execution example 02AKM07, corresponding to the production execution period D3, the normal drawing production NOR with light emission production can be executed regardless of the determination result of the drawing production pattern, and the specific drawing production SPE can be executed. Not executed.

FIG. 9-10 (H) shows an example of performance execution 02AKM08 when the final notification of the variable display result is executed during the performance execution period D4. At this time, as the reach effect of super reach ends, the determined decorative pattern is completely stopped and displayed. In the case of production execution example 02AKM08, corresponding to the production execution period D4, it is possible to execute the normal drawing production NOR accompanied by the light emission production regardless of the determination result of the drawing production pattern, and to execute the specific drawing production SPE. Not executed.

FIG. 9-11(A) shows a performance execution example 02AKM11 when a chance-up performance during reach is executed in response to the start of the performance execution period D2. The effect display at this time may be the same as the effect display in effect execution example 02AKM05. However, the temporary stop display may be started in response to the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02. For example, images drawn in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, may be copied to a copy area provided in the VRAM91AK147 and stored in a reusable manner. Further, in response to execution of the specific drawing effect SPE using strobe display, control is performed so as not to execute the light emission effect.

FIG. 9-11(B) shows effect execution example 02AKM12 in which strobe display is executed following effect execution example 02AKM11. In the case of production execution example 02AKM12, an entirely black image is drawn and displayed as a single color image in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. At this time, it is sufficient that the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, can display images drawn by normal drawing processing.

FIG. 9-11(C) shows an effect execution example 02AKM13 in which, following effect execution example 02AKM12, an effect display that becomes a pause display during strobe display is executed. In the case of effect execution example 02AKM13, it is sufficient if the pause display can be executed during strobe display by repeating the pause display started in effect execution example 02AKM11. For example, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, by drawing an image read from the copy area of the VRAM91AK147, the same image as in the production execution example 02AKM11 may be temporarily stopped and repeatedly displayed.

FIG. 9-11(D) shows an effect execution example 02AKM14 in which, following effect execution example 02AKM13, images similar to effect execution example 02AKM12 are repeatedly displayed. FIG. 9-11(E) shows effect execution example 02AKM15 in which, following effect execution example 02AKM14, images similar to effect execution examples 02AKM11 and 02AKM13 are repeatedly displayed. FIG. 9-11(F) shows effect execution example 02AKM16 in which, following effect execution example 02AKM15, images similar to effect execution examples 02AKM12 and 02AKM14 are repeatedly displayed. FIG. 9-11 (G) shows effect execution example 02AKM17 in which, following effect execution example 02AKM16, images similar to effect execution examples 02AKM11, 02AKM13, and 02AKM15 are repeatedly displayed. FIG. 9-11 (H) shows effect execution example 02AKM18 in which, following effect execution example 02AKM17, images similar to effect execution examples 02AKM12, 02AKM14, and 02AKM16 are repeatedly displayed. In this way, by alternately and repeatedly displaying an image drawn using image data and a single-color image with settings different from the image data, it is possible to perform pause display as well as strobe display. . After the strobe display of effect execution example 02 AKM18 is completed, the execution returns to the normal drawing effect NOR, and control is performed to execute the light emission effect.

Such strobe display can be executed without using dedicated image data, using an image with settings different from the image data, in response to a drawing command transferred from the CPU 91AK131 to the VDP91AK132. As a result, even if the effect image is drawn using common image data, by making it possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE using a strobe display in response to a drawing command, the normal drawing effect NOR is different from the normal drawing effect NOR. Since different impressions can be given, it is possible to prevent the amount of image data from increasing and to perform various display effects to improve the game's interest.

FIG. 9-12 (A) shows that when the reach chance up effect is executed in response to the start of the effect execution period D2, a specific drawing effect SPE with a monochrome conversion effect according to the drawing effect pattern 02 AKB02 is executed. This shows a production execution example 02AKM21. The effect display at this time is different from the effect display in effect execution example 02AKM05 in that in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, images drawn by monochrome conversion calculation processing, etc., which are specific drawing processing, are displayed. are doing.

FIG. 9-12(B) shows effect execution example 02AKM22 in which a strobe display is executed following effect execution example 02AKM21. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM22, similarly to performance execution example 02AKM12, an entirely black image is drawn and displayed as a single color image in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. At this time, it is sufficient that the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, can display images drawn by normal drawing processing.

FIG. 9-12 (C) shows effect execution example 02AKM23 in which, following effect execution example 02AKM22, a specific drawing effect SPE with a monochrome conversion effect according to drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is executed during execution of the chance-up effect during reach. It shows. In the case of production execution example 02AKM23, it is only necessary to continue executing the chance-up production during reach that was started in production execution example 02AKM21. Note that a temporary stop display may be executed as a chance-up effect during strobe display. Alternatively, in the specific drawing effect SPE using the monochrome conversion effect, even when strobe display is executed, by displaying an image drawn using image data read out according to the elapsed time, as in the case of effect execution example 02AKM05, The temporary stop display of the chance-up effect may not be executed.

FIG. 9-12(D) shows an effect execution example 02AKM24 in which, following the effect execution example 02AKM23, images similar to the effect execution example 02AKM22 are repeatedly displayed. FIG. 9-12(E) shows performance execution example 02AKM25 in the case where, following performance execution example 02AKM24, a ready-to-win performance after a chance-up performance is executed in performance execution period D2. The effect display at this time is different from the effect display in effect execution example 02AKM06 in that in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, images drawn by monochrome conversion calculation processing, etc., which are specific drawing processing, are displayed. are doing.

FIG. 9-12(F) shows effect execution example 02AKM26 in which images similar to effect execution examples 02AKM22 and 02AKM24 are repeatedly displayed following effect execution example 02AKM25. FIG. 9-12 (G) shows a performance execution example 02AKM27 in which a ready-to-win performance after the performance execution example 02AKM25 in the performance execution period D2 is executed following the performance execution example 02AKM26. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM27, it is sufficient if the ready-to-win performance executed in performance execution example 02AKM25 can be continued. Note that a temporary stop display may be executed as a reach effect during strobe display, or a temporary stop display may not be executed as a specific drawing effect SPE using a color information conversion effect. FIG. 9-12(H) shows an effect execution example 02AKM28 in which, following effect execution example 02AKM27, images similar to effect execution examples 02AKM22, 02AKM24, and 02AKM26 are repeatedly displayed. In this way, a monochrome-converted image drawn by reducing the number of colors in the color information through monochrome conversion calculation processing using image data, and a single-color image with settings different from the image data are alternately and repeatedly switched. By displaying this, it is possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE using a monochrome conversion effect in addition to strobe display.

The effect display, which is a monochrome conversion effect, uses a dedicated image using an image drawn with fewer colors than the color information included in the image data, in response to the effect drawing command transferred from the CPU91AK131 to the VDP91AK132. It is executable regardless of data. As a result, even for effect images drawn using common image data, it is possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE using a monochrome conversion effect according to the effect drawing command, which is different from the normal drawing effect NOR. Since the impression given to the player can be made different, it is possible to prevent the amount of image data from increasing and to perform various display effects to improve the game's interest. In addition, by combining the effect display, which is a monochrome conversion effect, and the strobe display, the player can easily recognize the color change of the displayed image, and while preventing the amount of image data from increasing, the display effect It is possible to enhance the impression of the player and improve the interest in the game.

FIG. 9-13(A) shows a specific drawing effect SPE with a color information inversion effect according to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 when the reach chance up effect is executed in response to the start of the effect execution period D2. The effect execution example 02AKM31 is shown. In comparison with the effect display in effect execution example 02AKM05, the effect display at this time is an image drawn by converting the color information value by a difference calculation process, which is a specific drawing process, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. The difference is that is displayed.

FIG. 9-13(B) shows effect execution example 02AKM32 in which strobe display is executed following effect execution example 02AKM31. In the case of effect execution example 02AKM32, similarly to effect execution examples 02AKM12, 02AKM22, etc., an entirely black image is drawn and displayed as a single color image in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. At this time, it is sufficient that the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, can display images drawn by normal drawing processing.

FIG. 9-13 (C) is an example of performance execution in which, following performance execution example 02AKM32, a specific drawing effect SPE with a color information inversion effect according to drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is executed during the execution of the reach chance up effect. 02AKM33 is shown. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM33, it is only necessary to continue executing the chance up performance during reach that was started in performance execution example 02AKM31. Note that a temporary stop display may be executed as a chance-up effect during strobe display. Alternatively, in the specific drawing effect SPE using the color information inversion effect, even when a strobe display is executed, as in the case of effect execution example 02AKM05, by displaying an image drawn using image data read out according to the elapsed time. , the temporary stop display of the chance-up effect may not be executed.

FIG. 9-13(D) shows an effect execution example 02AKM34 in which, following the effect execution example 02AKM33, images similar to the effect execution example 02AKM32 are repeatedly displayed. FIG. 9-13(E) shows performance execution example 02AKM35 in which, following performance execution example 02AKM34, a ready-to-win performance after a chance-up performance is executed in performance execution period D2. Compared to the effect display in effect execution example 02AKM06, the effect display at this time is an image rendered by converting the color information value by a difference calculation process, which is a specific drawing process, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. The difference is that is displayed.

FIG. 9-13(F) shows effect execution example 02AKM36, which repeatedly displays images similar to effect execution examples 02AKM32 and 02AKM034, following effect execution example 02AKM35. FIG. 9-13 (G) shows performance execution example 02AKM37 when a ready-to-win performance after performance execution example 02AKM35 in the performance execution period D2 is executed following performance execution example 02AKM36. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM37, it is sufficient if the ready-to-win performance executed in performance execution example 02AKM35 can be continued. Note that the temporary stop display may be executed as a reach effect during strobe display, or the temporary stop display may not be executed as a specific drawing effect SPE using a color information conversion effect. FIG. 9-13 (H) shows effect execution example 02AKM38, which repeatedly displays images similar to effect execution examples 02AKM32, 02AKM34, and 02AKM36, following effect execution example 02AKM37. In this way, an image with inverted color information, which is drawn by converting color information values through differential calculation processing using image data, and a single-color image with settings different from the image data are alternately and repeatedly switched. By displaying this, it is possible to perform a strobe display and a specific drawing effect SPE using a color information inversion effect.

The effect display, which is a color information inversion effect, uses dedicated image data using an image drawn by converting the color information included in the image data in accordance with the effect drawing command transferred from the CPU91AK131 to the VDP91AK132. It is executable regardless of the situation. As a result, even for effect images drawn using common image data, by making it possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE using a color information inversion effect in response to an effect drawing command, it is possible to perform a specific drawing effect SPE with a color information inversion effect, which is different from the normal drawing effect NOR. Since the impressions given to the player can be made different, it is possible to prevent the amount of image data from increasing and to perform various display effects to improve the game's interest. In addition, by combining the effect display, which is a color information inversion effect, and the strobe display, the player can easily recognize the color changes in the displayed image. It is possible to enhance the impression of the performance and improve the interest in the game.

By executing the specific drawing effect SPE using effect display or strobe display, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort due to the display effect, which is not present in the normal drawing effect NOR. When the reach performance content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, a super reach reach performance is executed, which is a "weak SP reach" with a lower jackpot reliability than when it is SP reach B. It is possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE that gives a sense of discomfort in the display effect, which is not present in the normal drawing effect NOR. Then, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the rate of being controlled to a jackpot game state increases, so that the player's expectation can be increased and the game interest can be appropriately improved.

The invention regarding the characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 does not need to have all the technical features regarding the feature parts 01AK and 02AK, but may have the configuration shown in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the conventional technology. It may also include a part of it.

The strobe display has been described as being executed by repeatedly switching and displaying an image drawn using image data and a single-color image with settings different from the image data. In such strobe display, part or all of a single color image may be replaced with a specific image prepared in advance. For example, when inserting and displaying a performance image that becomes a character image as a specific image, the display result of the variable display becomes a "jackpot" and is controlled to a jackpot game state, rather than when a single color image is repeatedly displayed. The drawing effect content and determination ratio of the drawing effect pattern may be set so that the ratio becomes high.

The description has been made assuming that when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the light emission effect using the light emitting member is not executed. The light emitting effect using such a light emitting member may include a light emitting display effect by causing the display portion of the light guide plate to emit light. For example, a light guide plate as a transparent light guide member having light transmittance is provided on the near side (front side) of a part or all of the display screen of the image display device 5. Furthermore, a light-emitting member such as a light-guide plate LED is provided near the light-guide plate, and light from the light-emitting member is introduced through the end face of the light-guide plate and reflected by a reflection portion formed in advance inside the light-guide plate. In this case, a light emitting display effect that displays a predetermined pattern or the like may be executed. In the performance execution period in which the normal drawing performance NOR is executed in accordance with the drawing performance pattern, it is sufficient if the light emission display performance can be executed based on the determination result of the light emission display performance pattern. On the other hand, in response to a drawing effect pattern or the like, the light emitting display effect may be controlled not to be executed during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed.

Further, the light emitting effect using such a light emitting member may include a button light emitting effect by causing a button light emitting section mounted inside the push button 31B to emit light. In this case, it is only necessary that the button light emitting effect can be executed based on the determination result of the button light emitting effect pattern, etc. during the effect execution period in which the normal drawing effect NOR is executed in accordance with the drawing effect pattern. On the other hand, the button light emission effect may be controlled not to be executed during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in accordance with the drawing effect pattern or the like.

When a plurality of display layers are provided, the setting of whether each display layer is a special layer or a specific layer can be arbitrarily changed based on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. For example, the layer 01AKL2, which displays and renders an effect image corresponding to a pending display or an active display, may be included in a specific layer instead of a special layer. In the setting where layer 01AKL2 is included in the specific layer, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the effect image corresponding to the pending display or active display is drawn and displayed by the specific drawing process, so that color information etc. may be changed. When a specific drawing performance SPE using a monochrome conversion effect is executed, it is only necessary that the performance image corresponding to the pending display or active display can be changed to a monochrome image with a small number of colors and displayed. While it is possible to display such monochrome display of pending display and active display, if it is possible to execute a change effect that changes the display color of specific display related to variable display such as pending display and active display, specific drawing effect SPE If a change effect is executed during the execution of , the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE may be ended when the display color of the specific display is changed, and the execution of the normal drawing effect NOR may be started or restarted. The display color of the specific display may be different depending on the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot gaming state. If the change performance includes a success pattern that changes the display color of the specific display and a failure pattern that does not change the display color of the specific display, the change performance of the successful pattern is executed during execution of the specific drawing performance SPE, When the display color of the specific display changes to a specific color, execution of the specific drawing effect SPE may be ended, and execution of the normal drawing effect NOR may be started or restarted. The execution of the specific drawing effect SPE is started at the timing when the pending display is displayed, and after the variable display and active display corresponding to the pending display are performed, the change effect of the success pattern is executed, and the display color of the active display is changed. When the color changes to a specific color, execution of the specific drawing effect SPE may be ended, and execution of the normal drawing effect NOR may be started or resumed.

As a display layer included in the special layer, a direction display layer may be included in which an effect image or the like indicating the direction in which the game ball is launched can be displayed. For example, in the direction display layer, when a firing promotion performance is executed as an operation promotion performance for a left-handed performance or a right-handed performance, a performance image that urges the game ball to be fired towards the left side game area or the right side game area is displayed. It is sufficient if it can be drawn and displayed. In the pachinko game machine 1, games can be played by firing game balls as game media, and a first route and a second route are provided as movement routes along which the game balls can flow. The first route may be a right-handed route that becomes the right-hand game area in the gaming area, and the second route may be a left-handed area that becomes the left-hand game area in the game area. Then, when the first state is such that it is advantageous to let the game ball flow down the first path, a first promotion image that urges the game medium to be launched toward the first path can be drawn and displayed on the direction display layer. That's fine. In addition, when the second state is such that it is advantageous to let the game ball flow down the second path, a second promotion image is displayed that urges the game medium to be launched toward the second path based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. It may be possible to draw and display on the direction display layer. In this way, by including the direction display layer in the special layer, during the effect execution period when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the specific layer can display an image drawn by the specific drawing process, whereas the direction display layer can display the image drawn by the specific drawing process. The display layer only needs to be able to display images drawn by normal drawing processing. Therefore, the effect image that prompts the player to shoot the game ball toward the left side game area or the right side game area may be drawn and displayed on a special layer using normal drawing processing as a predetermined image related to the game. By being able to draw and display images that prompt the firing of game media using normal rendering processing rather than specific rendering processing, a variety of display effects can be performed while ensuring appropriate visibility of the images that prompt the firing of gaming media. Thus, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

As the operation promotion effect, it may be possible to draw and display an effect image that shows a changeable effect output amount, such as a part or all of the volume, screen brightness, and light emission amount. As a display layer included in the special layer, an operation display layer may be included in which an effect image or the like in such an operation promotion effect is drawn in a displayable manner.

The display layer included in the special layer may include a warning display layer that displays a warning image or the like to notify the occurrence of an abnormality in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in the warning display layer, detection is performed by various sensors connected to the main board 11 in the pachinko game machine 1, such as a magnetic sensor, a radio wave sensor, a vibration sensor, a door open sensor, a big winning opening door sensor, a full tank sensor, and a ball out sensor. If it is determined that various errors have occurred based on the state, the state of the payout board, the state of detection of game balls by the start port switch, count switch, etc., a warning image will be drawn and displayed according to the error that has occurred. Good if possible. The warning display layer may be set to the display layer with the highest display priority among the plurality of display layers. In this way, by including the warning display layer in the special layer, during the effect execution period when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed in the specific layer, whereas the warning display layer can display the image drawn by the specific drawing process. The display layer only needs to be able to display images drawn by normal drawing processing. Therefore, the warning image for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality may be displayed as a predetermined image related to the game, as long as it can be drawn and displayed on a special layer using normal drawing processing. By being able to draw and display a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an abnormality using normal drawing processing rather than specific drawing processing, it is possible to appropriately ensure the visibility of the image that notifies the occurrence of an abnormality while providing a variety of display effects. By doing so, you can increase your enjoyment of the game. When notifying the occurrence of an abnormality, the abnormality light emission notification may be performed by causing the light emitting member to emit light even during execution of the specific drawing effect SPE in which no light emission effect is executed. In this way, notification regarding the occurrence of an abnormality may be performed with higher priority than other effects.

As a display layer included in the special layer, a suggestion display layer that displays a presentation image in a setting suggestion presentation may be included. For example, the suggestion display layer only needs to be able to draw and display setting suggestion images determined at different rates depending on the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player, and as a suggestion regarding the setting of the setting value, it is possible to decide whether or not to execute or not to perform the performance depending on the setting value. It is sufficient if it is possible to execute setting suggestion performances with different determination ratios. For example, it may be possible to select one of a plurality of setting suggestion images at different rates depending on the setting value, and to draw and display the selected setting suggestion image on the suggestion display layer. In this way, by including the suggestion display layer in the special layer, during the effect execution period when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed in the specific layer, whereas the suggestion display layer is The display layer only needs to be able to display images drawn by normal drawing processing. By being able to draw and display images that suggest setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 on a special layer using normal drawing processing rather than specific drawing processing, it is possible to display images that suggest setting values that have different advantages for players. It is possible to perform a variety of display effects while appropriately ensuring visibility, thereby improving the interest in the game. Alternatively, the suggestion display layer may be included in a specific layer instead of a special layer. In this way, by including the suggestion display layer in the specific layer, during the performance execution period when the specific drawing performance SPE is executed, the special layer can display the image drawn by the normal drawing process, whereas the suggestion display layer can display the image drawn by the normal drawing process. The display layer only needs to be able to display images drawn by specific drawing processing. By being able to draw and display images that suggest setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 on a specific layer using specific drawing processing, it is possible to diversify the display of images that suggest setting values that have different advantages for players. , it is possible to improve the game's interest.

At least some of the features of the pachinko game machine 1 can be applied not only to the pachinko game machine 1 but also to slot machines and the like. As an example of application to this slot machine, when it is possible to control the navigation notification that notifies the player of the stop order that is advantageous to the player according to the internal lottery result to the assist time (also referred to as AT), which is the executable notification period. As the navigation notification, an effect image that informs the stopping order in a recognizable manner may be displayed on the screen of the image display device. In this case, the display layer included in the special layer may include a notification display layer that displays an effect image used for navigation notification. For example, in the notification display layer, if you want to notify the order in which to stop the variable display by each reel on the left center right, if it is possible to draw and display a stop order image showing the order of stop operations using the stop switch on the notification display layer. good. In this way, by including the notification display layer in the special layer, during the performance execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the specific layer can display images drawn by specific drawing processing, whereas the notification display layer can display images drawn by specific drawing processing. The display layer only needs to be able to display images drawn by normal drawing processing. The visibility of the image that informs the operation mode when stopping the variable display in a slot machine can be drawn and displayed on a special layer using normal drawing processing instead of specific drawing processing. It is possible to improve the game's interest by performing various display performances while appropriately ensuring the following.

(Problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 01AK)
This embodiment includes the following inventions. In other words, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine that can execute a game, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-171129, an effect image can be displayed based on instructions from a display list. Techniques for making it possible to display images by tilting them, and techniques for gaming machines that draw processed images in which a plurality of deformed images generated using inverted images are arranged, such as those described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 2012-29947, etc. was also proposed. In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, there was a risk that the visibility of important images would be reduced because the entire image was changed. Therefore, our aim is to provide a gaming machine that improves gaming enjoyment while ensuring appropriate image visibility.
The gaming machine related to the feature section 01AK is a gaming machine such as the pachinko gaming machine 1 that can execute games, and uses a storage means for storing image data, such as a performance data memory 91AK123 or a VRAM91AK147, and the image data. An image processing means, such as VDP91AK132, capable of executing drawing processing, and the image processing means performs normal drawing processing such as drawing processing in response to a normal display drawing command, which draws in accordance with image data, and At least, it is possible to perform specific drawing processing such as drawing by changing the color information included in image data, for example, drawing processing according to an effect drawing command, and it is possible to execute a specific drawing process such as drawing by changing the color information included in image data, and it is possible to execute a specific drawing process such as drawing processing that changes color information included in image data, for example, drawing processing according to an effect drawing command. Images in each layer can be displayed, and the plurality of layers include specific layers such as layers AKL03 to AKL05, and special layers such as layers AKL01 and AKL02 that have a higher priority than the specific layers, for example. With steps 01AKS01 to 01AKS03, it is possible to display an image for effect by drawing with a specific drawing process in a specific layer, and for example, with step 01AKS04, with a special layer, it is possible to draw with a normal drawing process and display images related to the progress of the game. A predetermined image can be displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in data capacity, appropriately ensure the visibility of images, and make it possible to perform performances using a variety of displays, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The specific drawing process may include drawing using fewer colors than the color information included in the image data (for example, monochrome conversion). Thereby, while preventing an increase in data capacity, it is possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The specific drawing process may include drawing by converting the value of color information included in the image data (for example, color information inversion). Thereby, while preventing an increase in data capacity, it is possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

For example, as in production control example 02AKC01, there is a first period (for example, production execution period D1, etc.) in which specific drawing processing is not executed, such as production execution period D1, and a second period in which specific drawing processing is executed, such as production execution period D2. Among a plurality of periods including a period (for example, the performance execution period D2, etc.), the light emitting means may be allowed to emit light during the first period, and the light emitting means may not be emitted during the second period. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

Alternatively, a first period (such as a performance execution period D1) in which a specific drawing process is not executed, such as a performance execution period D1, and a second period (for example, a performance execution period D2) during which a specific drawing process is executed, such as a performance execution period D2. etc.), in the first period it is possible to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a normal manner, and in the second period, the light emission of the light emitting means may be restricted more than in the normal manner. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

For example, the setting value changing process S6A can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, values from 1 to 6) that have different advantages for the player. It is equipped with a setting means such as a CPU 103 that executes (for example, a CPU 103 that executes a setting value change process S6A), and provides a suggestion regarding the setting of the setting means by displaying a specific mode, for example, settings such as effects according to effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12. It is possible to perform a suggestive effect (for example, the effect according to the effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12), and an image drawn by specific drawing processing may not be displayed as an image displayed by the setting suggestive effect. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

For example, the setting value changing process S6A can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, values from 1 to 6) that have different advantages for the player. The system is equipped with a setting means such as a CPU 103 (for example, a CPU 103 that executes a setting value change process S6A), and provides a suggestion regarding the setting of the setting means by displaying a specific mode, for example, a setting suggestion such as an effect using effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12. It is possible to execute a performance (for example, a performance using the performance execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12), and it may be possible to display an image drawn by a specific drawing process as an image displayed by the setting suggestion performance. As a result, it is possible to appropriately ensure the visibility of images, and to make it possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby improving the interest in the game.

For example, it may be possible to execute a specific rendering effect that temporarily stops and displays an image, such as a specific rendering effect using the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 (for example, a specific drawing effect using the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02). Thereby, while preventing an increase in data capacity, it is possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

For example, as in the effect execution examples 02AKM21 to 02AKM28, it may be possible to alternately display an image drawn using image data and a monochromatic image in a specific layer (for example, see effect execution examples 02AKM21 to 02AKM28). Thereby, while preventing an increase in data capacity, it is possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

For example, the variable display of decorative patterns in the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R (for example, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, Variable display of the identification information image, such as the variable display of decorative patterns in 5R), and reduction in a mode that is smaller than the identification information image, such as the variable display of the small pattern in the small pattern display area 01AKC1. It is possible to perform variable display of the identification information image (for example, variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display area 01AKC1), and for example, as shown in FIG. 9-5, the identification information image is drawn and displayed using a specific drawing process. Yes, the reduced identification information image may be drawn and displayed using normal drawing processing. As a result, it is possible to appropriately ensure the visibility of images, and to make it possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby improving the interest in the game.

(Problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 02AK)
The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 02AK is a gaming machine such as the pachinko gaming machine 1 that can execute games, and uses a storage means for storing image data, such as a performance data memory 91AK123 and a VRAM91AK147, and the image data. It is equipped with an image processing means, such as VDP91AK132, capable of executing drawing processing, and is equipped with a specific performance such as a super reach performance that suggests control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, such as a jackpot game state. can be executed during variable display, and the performance patterns of the specific performance are a first pattern such as a drawing performance pattern 02AKA01, for example, and a second pattern such as a drawing performance pattern 02AKA02, which have different rates of being controlled to an advantageous state. Among the performance periods in which the specific performance is executed, at least during the first period, such as the performance execution period D1, regardless of whether it is the first pattern or the second pattern, for example, during the normal drawing performance. It is possible to display an image drawn by normal drawing processing such as drawing processing according to the drawing command of In the second period, it is possible to display an image drawn by normal drawing processing in the case of the first pattern, and to display a specific drawing process such as drawing processing according to a drawing command during a specific drawing performance, for example, in the case of the second pattern. It is possible to display images drawn by . As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in data capacity, make it possible to perform performances using a variety of displays, appropriately raise the player's expectations, and improve his/her interest in the game.

The specific drawing process may include drawing using fewer colors than the color information included in the image data, such as monochrome conversion. Thereby, while preventing an increase in data capacity, it is possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The specific drawing process may be performed by converting the value of color information included in the image data, such as color information inversion, for example. Thereby, while preventing an increase in data capacity, it is possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

For example, as in the effect control example 02 AKC01, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect using a light emitting means in response to displaying an image drawn by normal drawing processing in a specific effect, and in response to displaying an image drawn by a specific drawing process in a specific effect. Correspondingly, the light emitting effect may not be executed. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

Alternatively, in response to displaying an image drawn by normal drawing processing in a specific production, it is possible to execute a light emission production by the light emitting means in a normal mode, and in response to displaying an image drawn by specific drawing processing in a specific production, The light emitting effect may be more limited than in the normal mode. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

A setting means such as a CPU 103 that executes a setting value change process S6A that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values, such as values from 1 to 6, which have different advantages for the player, is provided, It is possible to perform a setting suggestion performance such as a presentation using production execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12, in which a suggestion regarding the setting of the setting means is displayed in a specific manner, and the image displayed by the setting suggestion performance is drawn by a specific drawing process. You may also choose not to display the image. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

A setting means such as a CPU 103 that executes a setting value change process S6A, which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values, such as values from 1 to 6, which have different advantages for the player, is provided, and the setting means is provided. It is possible to perform a setting suggestion performance such as a presentation using production execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12, in which a suggestion regarding the setting of the means is displayed in a specific manner, and the image displayed by the setting suggestion performance is drawn by a specific drawing process. It may also be possible to display images. As a result, it is possible to appropriately ensure the visibility of images, and to make it possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In the second period, it may be possible to execute an effect in which the image is temporarily stopped and displayed in the case of the second pattern, such as a specific drawing effect using the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02. Thereby, while preventing an increase in data capacity, it is possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In the second period, it may be possible to alternately display an image drawn using image data and a monochrome image in the case of the second pattern, as in the production execution examples 02AKM21 to 02AKM28. Thereby, while preventing an increase in data capacity, it is possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

For example, the variable display of the identification information image, such as the variable display of decorative patterns in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the small pattern in the small pattern display area 01AKC1, for example. It is possible to variably display a reduced identification information image in a form that is smaller than the identification information image, such as variable display of the identification information image.For example, as shown in Figure 9-5, the identification information image is The reduced identification information image may be drawn and displayed using normal drawing processing. As a result, it is possible to appropriately ensure the visibility of images, and to make it possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The configuration regarding the characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK may be combined with some or all of the configurations regarding the characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK, the configuration regarding the characteristic portion 60AK, etc., as appropriate. For example, in a configuration in which an operation performance to be executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed can be executed as a setting suggestion performance that is an operation performance in a suggestion performance mode, in a display period of a character image added to one moving image, the first component and the second component can be changed, or a character image using data regarding a common character image is added to the first video image and a second video image different from the first video image. In a configuration in which images can be displayed using a specific layer, a special layer can be drawn using a specific drawing process to display an effect image, and a special layer with a higher priority than the specific layer may be drawn using a normal drawing process. It may be possible to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game, and in a second period after the first period, it is possible to display an image drawn by normal drawing processing in the case of the first pattern, It may be possible to display an image drawn by specific drawing processing when the second pattern has a different ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state than the first pattern.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 75SG)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001 having the feature section 75SG in this embodiment will be described based on FIGS. 10-1 to 10-26. FIG. 10-1 is a front view showing the pachinko game machine as the feature part 75SG. FIG. 10-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine as the feature section 75SG. FIG. 10-3 is a front view showing the game board of the pachinko game machine as the feature section 75SG. FIG. 10-4 is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 10-3. In the following description, the direction in which the player is located is assumed to be the front of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001, and the opposite direction is assumed to be the rear. Further, the explanation will be made based on the up, down, right and left directions as seen from the player located in front of the pachinko game machine 75SG001. Furthermore, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts as in the embodiment described above, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the pachinko game machine 75SG001 includes a game board 2 (also referred to as a gauge board 2) that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame 3 (also referred to as a gauge board 2) that supports and fixes the game board 2. (also referred to as underframe 3). A game area Y is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired and hit into this game area Y from a predetermined ball launcher. In addition, a glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a is rotatably provided on the gaming machine frame 3 around the left side, and the gaming area Y can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 50. When the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area Y can be seen through the glass window 50a.

The game board 2 is made of a transparent (transparent) synthetic resin material such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, or methacrylic resin, and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has obstacle nails (not shown) on the front surface of the game board. , a guide rail 211, an outer rail decoration 212, etc. are provided, and a spacer member 201 is integrally attached to the back side of the board 200. The game board 2 is made of a non-transparent material such as a plywood board and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. It may be configured as follows.

An opening 2c is formed in the board 200 and spacer member 201 of the game board 2, and the display area of the image display device 5 provided at a position away from the game board 2 on the back side can be viewed from the player's side through the opening 2c. It can be viewed from the front side. Further, an area in the display area of the image display device 5 that overlaps with the board 200 is made visible through the board 200.

In addition, a center decorative frame 51 is attached to the opening 2c of the board 200, and the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, the guide rail 211, and the outer rail decoration 212 is the downstream area of the game ball in the game area Y. has been done. Further, a light guide plate device 500, which will be described later, is provided at a position corresponding to the opening 2c surrounded by the center decorative frame 51.

A first presentation unit 300 is provided at a lower position on the back side of the board 200, that is, at a position below the image display device 5. A second presentation unit 400 is provided on the right side of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, that is, at a position corresponding to the right side of the display area of the image display device 5. A third presentation unit 600 is provided above the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, that is, at a position corresponding to the top of the display area of the image display device 5. A fourth presentation unit 800 is provided at the upper left position on the back side of the board 200, that is, at the upper left position of the image display device 5. Further, at the lower right side position of the board 200, a variable winning ball unit 700 is provided in which game balls flowing down the gaming area Y can win prizes.

The first production unit 300 and the fourth production unit 800 are provided on the back side of the board 200, so that they can be seen through the board 200 from the player side (the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001). ing. On the other hand, the second presentation unit 400 and the third presentation unit 600 are located at least in front of the game board surface, which is the front surface of the board board 200, and are arranged in the opening 2c, so that the light guide plate device It is visible from the player side through the light guide plate 501 of 500.

(Light guide plate device 500)
Next, the light guide plate device 500 will be explained based on FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6. FIG. 10-5 is a front view showing the light guide plate device. 10-6, (A) is an enlarged front view showing the main parts of the light guide plate device, (B) is a BB sectional view of (A), and (C) is an enlarged view showing the main parts of (B) It is. Note that here, to aid understanding, the light-emitting region 506 is shown in dots (halftone dots), and the non-light-emitting region 507 without dots (halftone dots) is shown in white.

As shown in FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6, the light guide plate device 500 includes a light guide plate 501 that is provided so as to be closed except for the right side and lower area of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51; An LED board 503 on which a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 502 are mounted for inputting light into the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501, and a condenser for condensing the light from the light guide plate LEDs 502 toward the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501. It mainly has an optical lens 504. Note that the light guide plate device 500 is supported by a base member (not shown) fixed to the back surface of the game board 2 and the center decorative frame 51.

The light guide plate 501 is a plate member made of a material such as transparent synthetic resin such as acrylic or polycarbonate and has a predetermined front-to-back width dimension (plate thickness = approximately 5 mm), as shown in FIG. 10-4. It is arranged in front of the third presentation unit 600 and close to the glass window 50a.

The light guide plate 501 also includes a light emitting region 506 as a first region that forms a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects the light from the light guide plate LED 502 that is incident inside from the right end surface 501a forward and emits it from the front surface. , a light-emitting region that emits light by light that is incident inside from the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501 (see the halftone dot area in FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6 (A)), and A non-light emitting region 507 as a second region that does not form a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects the light from the light guide plate LED 502 forward and emits it from the front surface, that is, it does not emit light due to the light incident inside the light guide plate 501. and a non-emissive region (see the white region in FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6(A)).

The light emitting region 506 is formed so that a figure with a radial edge appears at approximately the center of the light guide plate 501. When light enters the inside of the light guide plate 501, the light emitting region 506 reflects the light and directs it forward. By emitting light, a predetermined image is displayed on the light guide plate 501 by emitting light.

As shown in FIGS. 10-6(B) and (C), the light emitting region 506 has a fine unevenness state so that the incident light from the light guide plate LED 502 that is incident inside from the right end surface 501a is guided and emitted from the front surface. It is formed on the back side (rough surface). Specifically, the light emitting region 506 is formed into an uneven state (rough surface) having a substantially semicircular shape with a constant pitch in a cross-sectional view when viewed from the side in the direction in which light travels. In FIG. 10-6(C), the uneven state (rough surface) is enlarged to help understanding, but the actual light-emitting region 506 is so small that it is difficult to see it with the naked eye. The surface is uneven.

When light enters the inside from the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501, a predetermined image (still image) is displayed on the light guide plate 501 by a dot pattern consisting of a plurality of recesses 510 formed in the light emitting area 506 (see FIG. (See halftone area in 10-5). In other words, the light emitting region 506 as a first region that forms a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects the light from the light guide plate LED 502 that enters the inside from the right end surface 501a forward and emits it from the front surface is formed from the plurality of recesses 510. This is a region where a dot pattern is formed, and is a non-second region where a predetermined light guide pattern is not formed, in which the light from the light guide plate LED 502 that enters inside from the right end surface 501a is reflected forward and emitted from the front surface. The light emitting area 507 is an area where a dot pattern consisting of a plurality of recesses 510 is not formed. Further, in the characteristic portion 75SG, a predetermined image (figure) is exemplified as display information that can be displayed by the light guide plate 501, but in addition to these, decorations such as pictures, characters, symbols, designs, or patterns are also used. It may also be possible to display other display information.

Note that when the light guide plate 501 is in a state where no light is incident from the right end surface 501a, the entire light guide plate 501 including the light emitting area 506 is in a colorless and transparent state, and the display image of the rear image display device 5 and the The second effect unit 400 and the third effect unit 600 can be visually recognized (see through) from the front of the light guide plate 501. Further, when light is incident from the right end surface 501a, a portion of the light emitting region 506 emits light, but a portion other than the light emitting region 506 remains colorless and transparent.

Note that in the characteristic portion 75SG, the light emitting region 506 is formed in an uneven state having a substantially semicircular shape, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the light emitting region 506 is formed on a light guide plate by a stamper or injection. 501 may be constructed using a molding method in which an uneven portion is formed on the back surface (rear surface). In addition, the reflective section can be constructed using a silk printing method in which reflective dots are printed with white ink on an acrylic plate, an adhesive dot method in which an acrylic plate and a reflective plate are attached with dot-shaped adhesive material, or a groove processing method. It's okay.

Note that in the characteristic portion 75SG, the shape of each unevenness of the light emitting region 506 on the back surface (rear surface) of the light guide plate 501 is approximately semicircular in cross-sectional view, but the present invention is not limited to this. The cross-sectional shape of each unevenness of the light emitting region 506 can be modified in various ways, such as a substantially triangular shape, as long as it constitutes a reflective surface that can reflect light toward the front (front surface).

The condensing lens 504 is formed of a light-transmitting member such as acrylic or polycarbonate into a long plate shape extending in the vertical direction. On the surface of the light guide plate 501 side of the condenser lens 504, a plurality of semicircular convex portions 504A that bulge toward the light guide plate 501 side when viewed from the front are formed continuously in the vertical direction. The condensing lens 504 is composed of a single member integrally provided with a plurality of convex portions 504A. One convex portion 504A is formed corresponding to each light guide plate LED 502.

Note that the convex portions 504A are not limited to one-to-one correspondence to the light guide plate LEDs 502, and for example, one convex portion 504A may correspond to two or more light guide plate LEDs 502. Furthermore, the condenser lens 504 is not limited to being composed of a single member in which a plurality of convex portions 504A are integrally provided. May be used.

As shown in FIG. 10-6(C), the longitudinal width of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate 501 side is smaller than the longitudinal width of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate LED 502 side. Furthermore, the front-rear width of the light guide plate 501 side of the condenser lens 504 is approximately the same as the front-rear width of the light-receiving surface of the light guide plate 501, so that the light emitted from the condenser lens 504 is diffused in the front-rear direction. The light is incident on the light guide plate 501 without any light leakage.

The front surface of the condensing lens 504 is a flat inclined surface that gradually inclines rearward from the light guide plate LED 502 side toward the light guide plate 501 side, and the rear surface of the condensing lens 504 is formed from the light guide plate LED 502 side to the light guide plate 501 side. It is a flat slope that gradually slopes forward toward the 501 side. That is, the condensing lens 504 is formed in a tapered shape whose thickness gradually decreases from the light guide plate LED 502 side toward the light guide plate 501 side.

Further, a slight gap is provided between the condenser lens 504 and the light guide plate 501. For example, the distance between the gaps is large enough to prevent the condensing lens 504 and the light guide plate 501 from coming into contact even if vibration occurs during transportation or use of the pachinko game machine 75SG001. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the condenser lens 504 and the light guide plate 501 from being damaged by vibrations that occur during transportation or use of the pachinko game machine 75SG001.

Next, the light guide state of the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 will be explained. The light emitted from each light guide plate LED 502 is incident on a condenser lens 504 . Here, since the incident surface of the condenser lens 504 is formed in a curved shape to form a lens surface, even if the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 has high directivity, it is incident on the condenser lens 504. The light is radially diffused in the left-right direction within the condenser lens 504. Then, when the light incident on the condenser lens 504 passes through the inner curved lens surface, it is refracted toward the right and exits.

Thereby, even if the directivity of the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 is high, the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 can be radially diffused to some extent by the condenser lens 504, and the light emitting area in the light guide plate 501 is It becomes possible to expand. Further, since the light emitted from the condenser lens 504 is guided in the horizontal direction (because it is suppressed from spreading radially), only the portion corresponding to each light guide plate LED 502 can be caused to emit light. In addition, the light incident on the condenser lens 504 from the light guide plate LED 502 is repeatedly totally reflected in the front and rear direction, and is condensed toward the approximately central position in the front and rear direction, and finally the light guide plate of the condenser lens 504 The light is emitted from the end face on the 501 side (the part with the smallest front-to-back width).

With such a configuration, the light from the light guide plate LED 502 can be focused and guided to the light guide plate 501 without being diffused in the front-back direction. In particular, even if the front-to-back width of the light-emitting surface of the light guide plate LED 502 is larger than the front-to-back width of the light guide plate LED 502 side of the condenser lens 504, the light guide plate does not diffuse the light from the light guide plate LED 502 in the front-to-back direction. 501, it is possible to prevent the light from the light guide plate LED 502 from being diffused to the surroundings.

When the light from the condenser lens 504 is guided into the light guide plate 501 and reaches the light emitting region 506, the light is reflected toward the front side (the player's side) at the light emitting region 506. As a result, when viewed from the player, the light emitting region 506 of the light guide plate 501 emits light due to the reflected light, so that the area represented by halftone dots in FIG. 10-5 on the front surface of the light guide plate 501 emits surface light. The shape will now be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 10-4, when viewed from the player (in the front-back direction), the image display device 5 is placed at the back, and the light guide plate device 500 is placed at the front. When viewed from the player, the image display device 5 has a horizontally long rectangular shape. For example, the image display device 5 uses a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal panel. Note that the image display device 5 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be an EL display device such as an organic EL display device or an inorganic EL display device.

(First production unit 300)
Next, the first effect unit 300 will be explained based on FIGS. 10-7 to 10-12. In FIGS. 10-7, (A) is a front view showing the first production unit, and (B) is a rear view. FIG. 10-8 is an exploded perspective view showing the configuration of the first production unit viewed diagonally from the front. In Figure 10-9, (A) is a CC cross-sectional view of Figure 10-7 (A), (B) is a DD cross-sectional view of Figure 10-7 (A), and (C) is a cross-sectional view of Figure 10-7. FIG. 5 is a sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 10-10, (A) is a front view showing the base member, (B) is a front view showing the LED board, and (C) is a front view showing the cover member. 10-11, (A) is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member removed, and (B) is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member attached. FIG. 10-12 is an enlarged view showing the main part of FIG. 10-11(B).

As shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9, the first production unit 300 is arranged to cover the base member 301 and the front side of the base member 301, and is attached to the base member 301 with a plurality of screws N1. It is mainly composed of a cover member 302, which is attached to the base member 302, and an LED board 303, which is attached to the front surface of the base member 301 with a plurality of screws N2. It is provided so that it can be visually recognized through the glass window 50a and the board 200.

The base member 301 is made of a non-transparent synthetic resin material and has a horizontally elongated shape when viewed from the front, and its surfaces (front and rear surfaces and peripheral surfaces) are black. The front surface of the base member 301 includes a flat part 311 made of a flat surface, a recessed part 312 formed at the lower part of the flat part 311 and having a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a rear wall part 313A located slightly behind the flat part 311. 313D.

On the upper part of the flat part 311, a plurality of trapezoidal convex parts 314A to 314E, which form part of a decorative pattern 331 to be described later, are formed in the longitudinal direction. The parts 313A to 313D can be visually recognized. Note that the rear wall portions 313A to 313D are formed so as to be inclined upward and rearward (see FIG. 10-9(B)). Furthermore, a predetermined decorative pattern 341 is engraved on the front surface of the rear wall portions 313A to 313D.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the recess 312 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, has a depth capable of accommodating the LED board 303, and is surrounded by the flat portion 311 when viewed from the front. ing. When the LED board 303 is attached, the front surface of the LED board 303 and the flat part 311 are substantially flush with each other, and only the first performance LED 304 (to be described later) is located in front of the flat part 311. There is. Further, the recess 312 is formed with a plurality of vertically elongated heat radiation holes 315 and an opening 316 for routing a cable (not shown) connected to the LED board 303 to the back side.

As shown in FIGS. 10-8 and 10-9, the front surface of the LED board 303 is equipped with a plurality of first performance LEDs 304 that can emit light forward and a plurality of other electronic components (not shown). At the same time, a plurality of printed wirings 320 are formed (see the enlarged view of FIG. 10-10(B)). On the other hand, on the back side of the LED board 303, a board-side connector CN for connecting a cable (not shown) to the LED board 303 and electronic components (not shown) are mounted. Further, the surface of the LED board 303 (the insulating portion excluding the printed wiring 320 on the front and back surfaces) is black.

The cover member 302 is formed of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material and has a horizontally elongated shape when viewed from the front, and includes a first translucent portion 321 corresponding to a part of the flat portion 311 and the recessed portion 312 of the base member 301; It mainly has second light-transmitting parts 322A and 322B corresponding to the first performance LED 304. Furthermore, a plurality of trapezoidal protrusions 324A to 324E are formed in the longitudinal direction at positions corresponding to the protrusions 314A to 314E of the base member 301.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the front surfaces of the second transparent parts 322A and 322B protrude forward from the front surface of the first transparent part 321, and a recessed part 322D is formed on the back surface. It is possible to accommodate the first performance LED 304. In addition, a light diffusing part 322C consisting of a fine uneven part is formed on the back surface of the second light-transmitting part 322A, 322B, and can diffuse the light from the first LED 304 for effect at the rear and emit it forward. ing. Note that the uneven portion may be formed by, for example, sandblasting or diamond cutting, and the forming method, shape, etc. can be changed in various ways.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-10(C), the first light-transmitting portion 321 is provided with a plurality of decorative patterns 331 each having a hexagonal shape when viewed from the front. Specifically, one decorative pattern 331 has a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, with a decorative portion 331A consisting of a plurality of horizontal lines extending in the left-right direction, and decorative portions 331B and 331C consisting of inclined lines extending diagonally to the left and diagonally to the right. It has a decorative part 331D and a decorative part 331E having a triangular shape when viewed from the front, and by sharing the decorative parts 331A to 331C with adjacent decorative patterns 331, a plurality of decorative patterns 331 are continuously provided. .

In addition, each of these decorative parts 331A to 331E can be formed by, for example, performing sandblasting on the back (or front) of the cover member 302 to form fine irregularities, or pasting a translucent sticker or the like. As a result, each of the decorative parts 331A to 331E appears milky white or translucent when viewed from the player's side.

As shown in FIG. 10-11(A), an LED board 303 as an electronic component having a first presentation LED 304 is arranged on the front side of the base member 301, and the front side is covered with a cover member 302. ing. However, since the cover member 302 is made of a transparent synthetic resin material, it is not possible for the player to see the front surface of the base member 301 and the LED board 303 through the cover member 302. be.

Here, by disposing the same black base member 301 around (around) the black LED board 303, the LED board 303 is assimilated with the surrounding base member 301, and the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 are It is difficult to see the boundary between BD and BD. In other words, it becomes difficult to see that the LED board 303 is provided on a part of the front surface of the base member 301, so that the LED board 303, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-11(B), when the cover member 302 is attached to the front side of the base member 301 with the LED board 303 placed in the recess 312 of the base member 301, the base member 301 and the LED board The cover member 302 is placed in a high position so as to cover the front surface of the base member 301 and the LED board 303, and the front surface of the base member 301 and the LED board 303 can be easily seen from the player side through the first transparent section 321. It is difficult for the first performance LED 304 to be visually recognized from the player side through the second light-transmitting portions 322A, 322B. In addition, by placing the milky white or translucent decorative parts 331A to 331E on the cover member 302 on the front side of the base member 301 and the LED board 303, the milky white or semitransparent decorative parts 331A to 331E applied to the cover member 302 are arranged on the front side of the base member 301 and the LED board 303, so that the milky white or semitransparent decorative parts 331A to 331E applied to the cover member 302 are arranged on the front side of the base member 301 and the LED board 303. The decorative pattern 331 can be visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 10-12, when the cover member 302 is placed on the front side of the base member 301, a predetermined decorative pattern 331 (for example, decorative patterns 331J to 331M in FIG. 10-12) is selected from among the plurality of decorative patterns 331. ) is formed (provided) so as to straddle the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 when viewed from the player side. Specifically, the decorative parts 331B and 331C made of inclined lines are arranged so as to intersect with the boundary BD between the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 facing in the left-right direction, and one decorative pattern 331 is arranged between two members (LED By being provided across the board 303 and cover member 302), one decorative pattern 331 looks as if it is provided on one member, so that the LED board 303 and cover member 302 on the back side It becomes difficult to recognize that they are separate members.

In addition, a portion of the boundary BD between the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 becomes difficult to see from the player side due to the overlapping decorative parts 331B and 331C on the front side, so the LED board 303 becomes less noticeable. Note that since the decorative parts 331B and 331C are linear, even if they are arranged so as to overlap on the front side of the boundary part BD, the overlapping area with the boundary part BD is small, but the decorative pattern 331 overlaps the LED board 303 and the cover. By being formed over almost the entire front surface of the member 302, it becomes difficult to recognize that the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 are separate members.

In addition, the decorative part 331A of each decorative pattern 331 is arranged substantially parallel to the boundary part BD, so that it is difficult to distinguish because the aspect is similar to the boundary part BD. If the LED board 303 is milky white and has a brightness higher than black, it will be noticeable, and the LED board 303 will be less noticeable. Note that by arranging the decorative portions 331A so as to overlap along the boundary portion BD, a part of the boundary portion BD may be made difficult to be visually recognized from the player side by the decorative portions 331A.

In addition, these decorative parts 331A to 331C are formed in a linear shape in the same way as the printed wiring 320 provided on the LED board 303, and are arranged substantially parallel to a part of the printed wiring 320, so that the printed wiring Since the wiring pattern 320 and the wiring pattern 320 are similar (or common), it becomes difficult to tell them apart, so that the LED board 303 becomes difficult to stand out.

Furthermore, although the decorative parts 331D and 331E are different in appearance from the printed wiring 320 and the boundary part BD, they are thicker and larger in area than the printed wiring 320 and the boundary part BD, so they are more noticeable than the printed wiring 320 and the boundary part BD. In addition, a portion of the printed wiring 320 is overlapped with the front side of the printed wiring 320, making it difficult to visually recognize the printed wiring 320, thereby making the LED board 303 less noticeable.

Further, on the front surface of each of the rear wall portions 313A to 313D of the base member 301, a decorative pattern 341 consisting of vertically flat hexagonal linear convex portions is provided so as to be visible from the player side. The decorative pattern 341 is similar (or common) in aspect to the wiring pattern of the printed wiring 320, so that the aspect is similar to the wiring pattern of the printed wiring 320 even in the area of the base member 301 that is not covered with the cover member 302. Since the decorative pattern 341 can be formed, the LED board 303 becomes less noticeable.

Further, the base member 301 has rear wall portions 313A to 313D as predetermined areas that can be viewed from the player side without seeing through the cover member 302. By providing the decorative pattern 341 as a predetermined decorative pattern that is the same or similar in aspect to the decorative pattern 331, it becomes difficult to tell that the base member 301 and the cover member 302 are different members. 303 becomes less noticeable.

Further, since the LED board 303 is disposed in the recess 312 formed at the lower part of the base member 301, the LED board 303 is positioned below the upper region of the recess 312 in the base member 301, that is, at a position spaced apart from the image display device 5. By providing this, it is located away from the image display device 5, which is the focus of the player's attention, so that it is less noticeable.

In this way, a predetermined decorative pattern 331 (for example, decorative patterns 331J to 331M in FIG. 10-12) among the plurality of decorative patterns 331 is connected to the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 when viewed from the player side. By straddling the LED board 303, which is an electronic component, it becomes less noticeable. Therefore, even electronic components such as the LED board 303, which would normally not be visible to the player from the viewpoint of appearance and design, can be placed on the front side, where they can be seen by the player, increasing the degree of design freedom. can be increased.

(Variable winning ball unit 700)
Next, the variable winning ball unit 700 will be briefly explained based on FIGS. 10-13. 10-13, (A) is a front view showing the variable winning ball unit, and (B) is a FF sectional view of (A).

As shown in FIG. 10-13, the variable winning ball unit 700 has a base member 701 attached to the board 200 from the front side, and a cover member 702 provided on the front side of the base member 701. The device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are configured as an integrated unit.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided at the upper right of the variable winning ball unit 700, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided at the lower left. In between, there is a game ball path 705A that allows a game ball (game ball P) to enter the big winning hole of the special variable winning ball device 7, and a game ball (game ball P) that can enter the second starting winning hole of the variable winning ball device 6B. A game ball path 705B through which players P) can enter is provided. Further, below the special variable winning ball device 7, an LED board 703 is provided with a plurality of performance LEDs 704 that can emit light forward.

The base member 701 and the cover member 702 are made of a synthetic resin material having translucency. Therefore, the game balls passing through the game ball paths 705A, 705B can be visually recognized from the player side through the cover plate 702A.

(First production unit 300 and variable winning ball unit 700)
Next, the first production unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 will be explained based on FIGS. 10-14 to 10-16. 10-14, (A) and (B) are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the first production unit, and (C) and (D) are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the variable winning ball unit. FIG. 10-15 is a diagram for comparing the first production unit and the variable winning ball unit. FIGS. 10-16 are diagrams for explaining similar colors.

First, as shown in FIG. 10-3, the first production unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 are arranged side by side below the image display device 5, and when viewed from the player's side, The right end of the one performance unit 300 is provided so as to overlap or be close to the left end of the variable winning ball unit 700. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-4 and 10-13(B), the front part of the variable winning ball unit 700 is placed on the front side of the board 200, while the first production unit 300 is located on the front side of the board 200. It is located on the back side of the.

As shown in FIGS. 10-14(A) and (B), the front-rear dimension L1A, which is the plate thickness dimension of the cover member 302 in the first transparent part 321 of the first presentation unit 300, is the second transparent part 322A, 322B. It is longer than the front-rear dimension L1B, which is the plate thickness dimension of the cover member 302 (L1A>L1B).

In the first light transmitting portion 321 of the cover member 302, among the light that enters from the front in a direction (T direction) perpendicular to the front surface of the first light transmitting portion 321, the transmittance of light transmitted in the T direction is XA %. In addition, in the second light transmitting portions 322A and 322B of the cover member 302, among the light that enters from the front in a direction (T direction) orthogonal to the front surface of the second light transmitting portions 322A and 322B, light that is transmitted in the T direction is transmitted. The light transmittance is XB%. In other words, not all (100%) of the light that enters the first transparent section 321 and the second transparent sections 322A, 322B from the front is transmitted in the T direction, and some light may be reflected at the front surface. , is emitted at the rear in a direction different from the T direction (so that it spreads out to the surroundings). In particular, the second light transmitting parts 322A and 322B have a light diffusing part 322C made of uneven parts formed on the back surface, so that light can more easily transmit in a direction different from the T direction than the first light transmitting part 321. , the transmittance of light in the T direction is lower than the transmittance of the first light transmitting portion 321 (low transmittance; XA%>XB%).

As shown in FIGS. 10-14(C) and (D), in the cover plate 702A, among the light that enters from the front in the direction perpendicular to the front surface (T direction), the transmittance of the light transmitted in the T direction is Y %. Here, the front-to-back dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A is shorter than the front-to-back dimensions L1A, L1B of the first light-transmitting part 321 and the second light-transmitting parts 322A, 322B of the cover member 302 (L2<L1A, L2<L1B), the light incident from the front is guided in the T direction inside and difficult to be diffused to the surroundings before being emitted from the back, and there is no light diffusing part like the second light transmitting part 322A, 322B. Since it is a flat plate, the light transmittance of the cover plate 702A in the T direction is higher than the light transmittance of the cover member 302 in the T direction (Y%>XA%, Y%>XB%).

In other words, since the light transmittance of the cover member 302 is lower than that of the cover plate 702A, a predetermined portion on the back side of the cover plate 702A (for example, When viewing a predetermined portion (for example, the first performance LED 304 or LED board 303) on the back side of the cover member 302 from the player side through the cover member 302, than when viewing the ball P). Since the visibility is low, the LED board 303 including the first presentation LED 304, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

As shown in FIG. 10-15, the first effect unit 300 has the same color (black) as the LED board 303 including the first effect LED 304, which is an electronic component, and the base member 301 arranged around it. , the LED board 303 is less noticeable. Further, the front and rear dimensions L1A and L1B of the cover member 302 of the first production unit 300 are longer than the front and rear dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A of the variable winning ball unit 700 (L1A, L1B>L2), and the first production unit The light transmittance (XA%, XA%) of the cover member 302 of 300 in the T direction is lower than the light transmittance (Y%) of the cover member 702 of the variable winning ball unit 700 in the T direction. (Y%>XA%, Y%>XB%), the LED board 303 is less noticeable.

Therefore, when the first production unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 provided at a different position (on the right side) from the first production unit 300 are viewed from the player side, the player can see through the cover member 702. Since the visibility when viewing the LED board 303 through the cover member 302 is lower than the visibility when viewing the game ball P, the variable winning ball unit 700 located near the first production unit 300 Compared to this, the LED board 303 placed on the back side of the cover member 302, which is a light-transmitting member, appears to be more difficult to see. Further, since the cover member 302 is placed closer to the back side than the cover plate 702A, and the base member 301 and the LED board 303 are dark black, the LED board 303 becomes more inconspicuous.

Further, in the characteristic part 75SG of the present embodiment, the LED board 303, which is an electronic component, and the base member 301, which is a specific member disposed around it, are of the same color (black), but the present invention The electronic component and the specific member do not have to be of the same color; for example, the electronic component and the specific member may have the same color or similar color.

Colors have three attributes: hue (color), lightness (brightness), and saturation (vividness). A combination of colors that have the same tone (hue group with the same brightness and saturation) and are adjacent in hue (adjacent colors); 2. A combination of different tones but the same hue; 3. Includes combinations of colors that differ only in brightness or saturation.

Here, an example of "1. Combination of colors (adjacent colors) that have the same tone (hue group with the same brightness (brightness) and saturation (vividness)) and are adjacent in terms of hue" is shown in Figure 10-16. To explain based on this, when the three primary colors of colorants, cyan (C), magenta (M), and yellow (Y), are arranged at angular intervals of 120 degrees on a hue wheel of a predetermined number (here, 24 colors), Each of the three colors is a non-similar color to each other. Colors that have a hue difference within the angle range of 30 to 60 degrees on the hue wheel are "similar colors," and are not limited to combinations of adjacent colors on the hue wheel.

For example, if cyan (C) is used as the standard color, colors that belong to the range of 30 degrees to the magenta (M) side and 30 degrees to the yellow (Y) side (60 degrees in total) are similar to cyan (C), When magenta (M) is used as the reference color, colors that belong to the range of 30 degrees to the cyan (C) side and 30 degrees to the yellow (Y) side (60 degrees in total) are similar colors to magenta (M), and yellow ( When Y) is used as a reference color, colors belonging to a range of 30 degrees to the cyan (C) side and 30 degrees to the magenta (M) side (60 degrees in total) are similar colors to yellow (Y). Therefore, even if the number of colors on the hue wheel is less than 24 or more than 24, a combination of colors that have a hue difference within the angle range of 30 to 60 degrees on the hue wheel may be regarded as "similar colors."

Similar colors are combinations of warm colors such as red and yellow, which are chromatic colors that make you feel warm, and cool colors, which are chromatic colors that make you feel cold, such as blue and purple, as well as colors such as green and purple. It is preferable to include a combination of colors included in neutral colors, which are chromatic colors located between warm colors and cool colors.

(Second production unit 400)
Next, the second effect unit 400 will be explained based on FIGS. 10-17 to 10-19. 10-17, (A) is a front view showing the second presentation unit, and (B) is a front view showing the second presentation unit with the cover member removed. 10-18, (A) is a GG sectional view of FIG. 10-17(A), and (B) is a HH sectional view of FIG. 10-17(A). 10-19, (A) is a diagram explaining the boundary between the base member and the LED board, and (B) is a diagram showing the configuration of the second effect unit.

As shown in FIGS. 10-17 and 10-18, the second effect unit 400 includes a base member 401, a cover member 402 arranged to cover the front side of the base member 401, and a front surface of the base member 401. It mainly consists of an LED board 403 attached to the LED board 403 and an inner lens 405 arranged on the front side of the LED board 403.As shown in FIG. It is provided so that it can be seen through the glass window 50a and the light guide plate 501 from the front of the pachinko game machine 75SG001, that is, from the player's side facing the pachinko game machine 75SG001.

The base member 401 is made of a non-transparent synthetic resin material and has a substantially half-moon shape when viewed from the front, and its surfaces (front and rear surfaces and circumferential surface) are white.

The LED board 403 has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front end of a boss protruding from the front surface of the base member 401. A plurality of second performance LEDs 404A, 404B and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted on the front surface of the LED board 403. Further, on the back side of the LED board 403, there are a plurality of second effect LEDs 404C that can emit light upward, a plurality of second effect LEDs 404D that can emit light downward, and other electronic components (not shown). ) are installed. The second presentation LEDs 404A to 404D are angle-type LEDs that can emit light parallel or substantially parallel to the mounting surface of the LED board 403. Further, the surface of the LED board 403 (the insulating portion excluding the printed wiring on the front and back surfaces) is white.

The inner lens 405 is made of a synthetic resin material having translucency, is formed in substantially the same shape as the LED board 403, and includes a plurality of second performance LEDs 404A arranged along the upper side of the front surface of the LED board 403; It is arranged between a plurality of second performance LEDs 404B arranged along the lower side of the front surface of the LED board 403, and the light from the second performance LEDs 404A is incident on the front end surface, and the light from the second performance LEDs 404B is The light is made incident on the rear end surface.

As shown in FIG. 10-18(A), on the back side of the inner lens 405, the light incident from the second performance LEDs 404A and 404B is reflected forward by a reflecting portion 406. The light is emitted substantially uniformly forward from the entire front surface of the inner lens 405. Since the front surface of the inner lens 405 is a flat surface, it emits light from the surface like a light guide plate.

The reflecting portion 406 is formed into an uneven state (rough surface) in which a cross-sectional view in the traveling direction of the light guided inside the inner lens 405 has a substantially triangular wave shape with a constant pitch. Specifically, the inner lens 405 is constructed using a molding method in which uneven parts are created on the back surface of the inner lens 405 using a stamper or injection. The reflective portion may be constructed by an adhesive dot method in which a dot-shaped adhesive material is attached to the plate, a groove processing method, or the like.

The cover member 402 is made of a light-transmitting (transparent) synthetic resin material and has a box shape with an open back, and is formed to be able to cover the front sides of the base member 401 and the LED board 403. At a position corresponding to the LED board 403 on the front surface of the cover member 402, a convex portion 410 having a shape that is a slightly enlarged version of the LED board 403 when viewed from the front is provided to protrude forward.

On the front surface of the convex portion 410, a decorative portion 420 consisting of the letter “V” (logotype) is printed with a colored paint having a translucent property, or a translucent sheet on which letters are printed is pasted. Due to this, etc., it is provided to be able to transmit light. Furthermore, a light diffusing section 402A consisting of a concave and convex section is formed on the back surface of the convex section 410, so that the light from the inner lens 405 can be diffused and emitted forward.

In an area above the convex portion 410 on the back surface of the cover member 402, a plurality of convex stripes 421A protruding toward the back side are provided to extend in the vertical direction at positions corresponding to the respective second performance LEDs 404C. Further, in the lower region of the convex portion 410 on the back surface of the cover member 402, a plurality of convex stripes 421B protruding toward the back side are provided to extend in the vertical direction at positions corresponding to the respective second performance LEDs 404D. Note that a light diffusing portion made of an uneven portion may also be formed in a portion of the back surface of the cover member 402 where the protruding stripes 421A and 421B are not formed. Further, the cover member 402 is formed so as to be inclined rearward upwardly and downwardly from the convex portion 410.

The plurality of protrusions 421A, 421B have uneven parts continuously formed on the rear end surface, and a stepped part 421C is formed at a midway position in the longitudinal direction, and extends upward and downward from the protrusion 410. By extending so as to be inclined to the rear side, the light emitted upward and downward from the second presentation LEDs 404C and 404D can enter from these uneven parts and the stepped part 421C, and also The emitted light is diffused by the uneven portion and emitted forward.

In this way, in the second effect unit 400, when the second effect LEDs 404A and 404B emit light, the light emitted from the second effect LEDs 404A and 404B is emitted forward by the inner lens 405, and the light is emitted from the convex portion of the cover member 402. By being incident on the region corresponding to the portion 410, the entire front surface of the convex portion 410 including the decorative portion 420 emits surface light.

As shown in FIG. 10-19(A), an LED board 403 as an electronic component having second presentation LEDs 404A to 404D is arranged on the front side of the base member 401, and the front side is covered with a cover member 402. Covered. However, since the cover member 402 is made of a synthetic resin material having translucency, it is assumed from the player's side that a light diffusing portion is formed in the cover member 402 at a portion other than the protruding stripes 421A and 421B. However, it is possible to visually recognize the front surface of the base member 401 and the LED board 403 through the parts other than the protrusions 421A and 421B.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-19(B), by disposing the same white base member 401 around (periphery) the white LED board 403, the LED board 403 is connected to the surrounding base member 401. As a result, the boundary BD between the LED board 403 and the cover member 402 becomes difficult to see. In other words, it becomes difficult to see that the LED board 403 is provided on a part of the front surface of the base member 401, so that the LED board 403, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-19(A), the decorative portion 420 provided on the front surface of the convex portion 410 forms the boundary between the LED board 403, which is an electronic component, and the base member 401 when viewed from the player side. It is provided at a position corresponding to a part of the upper side and lower side of the portion BD. In other words, a part of the decorative part 420 is arranged so as to overlap (overlap) a part of the boundary part BD on the front side of the boundary part BD, so that a part of the boundary part BD is covered by the decorative part 420. By becoming less visible, the LED board 403 becomes less noticeable. Therefore, even electronic components such as the LED board 403 that you would not normally want to show to the player from the perspective of appearance and design, can be placed on the front side where the player can see them, which increases the degree of design freedom. can be increased.

Further, the decoration part 420 is provided so that the area covering (overlapping) the front side of the boundary part BD is larger than that of the decoration pattern 331 described above, and by making the boundary part BD difficult to see, the LED board 403 It makes it less noticeable.

In addition, in this embodiment, the decoration part 420 partially hangs (overlaps) at a position corresponding to a part of the upper side and a part of the lower side of the boundary part BD when viewed from the player side. The present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative portions 420 may be arranged at positions corresponding to all portions of the boundary portion BD. In addition, it is preferable to provide so that it may overlap about 1/3 or more of the boundary part BD.

Furthermore, since the letter “V” is displayed as a logotype on the decorative portion 420, it becomes difficult for the player to pay attention to the logotype and become aware of the boundary portion BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401. Therefore, the LED board 403 becomes less noticeable.

In addition, in this embodiment, a form in which the letter "V" indicating a jackpot is applied as a logo type is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. ”, characters indicating a variable display result, characters indicating a jackpot such as “heat”, “fierce heat”, and “!!”, characters such as the model name of a game machine, a title, the name of a character appearing, etc. may also be used. Furthermore, in addition to characters, decorations such as characters, symbols, designs, pictures, patterns, etc. may be displayed as the decoration portion.

In addition, the LED board 403 has a second effect LED 404A as a light emitting means that can cause the decoration part 420 to emit light, so that the decoration part 420 stands out due to the light emission, so that the player can see the LED board 403 and the base member 401. Since it becomes difficult to be aware of the boundary portion BD with the LED board 403, the LED board 403 becomes less noticeable.

In addition, the second performance LED 404A is provided so that the decorative portion 420 can emit surface light through the inner lens 405, so that the player can see the LED board 403 because the decorative portion 420 stands out due to the surface emitted light. Since it becomes difficult to notice the boundary portion BD between the base member 401 and the LED board 403, the LED board 403 becomes less noticeable.

Further, in the present embodiment, the decorative portion 420 is a single decorative portion consisting of the letter “V”, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the convex portion 410 of the cover member 402 In the case where a plurality of decorative parts 420 are provided in a region of the cover member 402 and a plurality of predetermined decorative parts (for example, a pattern, etc.) different in form from the decorative part 420 are provided in a region other than the convex part 410 of the cover member 402, the plurality of decorative parts It is preferable that the number of decorative parts is larger than the plurality of predetermined decorative parts. By doing so, the boundary portion BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401 is made difficult to see due to the plurality of decorative portions, and is more conspicuous than the plurality of predetermined decorative portions provided in other areas. Therefore, the LED board 403 becomes less noticeable.

In this case, it is sufficient that the plurality of decorative parts and the plurality of predetermined decorative parts are different in form; for example, the predetermined decorative part may be an enlarged form or a reduced form of the decorative part, or the external shape, shape, Any one of the colors, sizes, etc. may be different.

The cover member 402 also includes a convex portion 410 that is a boundary corresponding region corresponding to the boundary portion BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401, and a convex portion 410 that does not correspond to the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the base member 401. The light transmittance of the convex portion 410 may be lower than the light transmittance of the region other than the convex portion 410. By doing so, the boundary BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401 becomes difficult to see through the convex part 410 from the player, so that the LED board 403 becomes less noticeable.

(Third production unit 600 and fourth production unit 800)
Next, the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 will be explained based on FIGS. 10-20 to 10-26. 10-20, (A) is a front view showing the third presentation unit and the fourth presentation unit. 10-21, (A) is a sectional view taken along line II in FIG. 10-20, and (B) is a sectional view taken along line JJ in FIG. 10-20. FIG. 10-22 is a sectional view taken along line KK in FIG. 10-20. FIG. 10-23 is an explanatory diagram showing the visibility status of the third presentation unit and the fourth presentation unit. FIG. 10-24 is a diagram showing the configuration of the third performance unit and the fourth performance unit. FIG. 10-25 is a diagram showing a presentation mode when the third presentation unit and the fourth presentation unit emit light. FIGS. 10-26 are schematic front views showing (A) a state in which the third performance unit is located at the origin position, and (B) a state in which the third performance unit is located at the performance position.

(Third production unit 600)
As shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21(A), and 10-26, the third presentation unit 600 includes a base member 601 and a cover member disposed to cover the front side of the base member 601. 602, an LED board 603 attached to the front surface of the base member 601, and an inner lens 605 arranged on the front side of the LED board 603. ) and the performance motor 631 (see FIG. 10-2), which is a drive source that allows movement in the vertical direction between the origin position shown in FIG. 10-26(B) and the performance position shown in FIG. It has a power transmission member 632 for transmitting power to the light emitting production section 630, and as shown in FIG. 10-20, in the upper part of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, In other words, it is provided so as to be visible through the glass window 50a and the light guide plate 501 from the player's side facing the pachinko game machine 75SG001.

The base member 601 is made of a non-transparent synthetic resin material and has a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and its surfaces (front and rear surfaces and peripheral surfaces) are white.

The LED board 603 has a generally trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front end of a vertical wall that projects from the front periphery of the base member 601 . On the front surface of the LED board 603, a plurality of third performance LEDs 604A, 604B and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted. The third performance LEDs 604A and 604B are capable of emitting light forward. Further, the surface of the LED board 603 (insulating portion excluding printed wiring on the front and back surfaces) is white. Note that the cable C connecting the LED board 603 and the production control board 12 is wired along the power transmission member 632 (see FIG. 10-26).

The inner lens 605 is made of a synthetic resin material having translucency, and is formed to have almost the same shape as the LED board 603, and allows the plurality of third effect LEDs 604A and 604B arranged on the front surface of the LED board 603 to be viewed from the front side. It is arranged to cover.

As shown in FIG. 10-21(A), the front and back surfaces of the inner lens 605 are provided with lights for diffusing and emitting the light from the third performance LEDs 604A and 604B arranged on the back side toward the front. The provision of a light diffusing section 605A consisting of a concavo-convex portion allows surface light to be emitted.

The cover member 602 is made of a light-transmitting (transparent) synthetic resin material and has a box shape with an open back, and is formed to be able to cover the front sides of the base member 601 and the LED board 603.

On the front surface of the cover member 602, a decorative portion 620 consisting of the letters "XXX" (logotype) is printed with a colored paint that is translucent, or a translucent sheet on which letters are printed is pasted. Due to this, etc., it is provided to be able to transmit light. Further, a light diffusing section 602A consisting of a concave and convex portion is formed on the back surface of the cover member 602, so that the light from the inner lens 605 can be diffused and emitted forward.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example is shown in which the characters "XXX" indicating a jackpot are applied as a logo type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and It may be characters such as the name of a character, characters indicating a variable display result such as "Jackpot", "BONUS", or "RUSH", or characters suggesting a jackpot such as "Heat", "Very Hot", or "!!". Furthermore, in addition to characters, decorations such as characters, symbols, designs, pictures, patterns, etc. may be displayed as the decoration portion.

In this way, in the third effect unit 600, when the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B emit light, the light emitted from the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B to the front through the inner lens 605 is further transmitted to the cover member 602. The entire front surface of the cover member 602 including the decorative portion 620 emits light by being diffused and emitted forward.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-20, the plurality of third effect LEDs 604A are arranged along the periphery of the letters "XXX" forming the decoration part 620, and the plurality of third effect LEDs 604B are It is arranged at a position that does not correspond to section 620. By arranging the plurality of third effect LEDs 604A along the periphery of the letters "XXX" forming the decoration part 620 in this way, when the third effect LEDs 604A emit light, the letters "XXX" Since the periphery of the characters is illuminated, the shape of the decorative portion 620 can be easily recognized.

In addition, the power transmission member 632, which constitutes a part of the power transmission member that transmits power to the light emission production section 630, is rotatably supported on a rotation axis with one end facing in the front-rear direction, and the other end emits light. The power transmission member of the arm member provided with the production section 630 can be changed in various ways, and may be a rack gear, a pinion gear, etc. as long as it can transmit power so that the light emission production section 630 can be moved in the vertical direction. There may be.

(4th production unit 800)
As shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21(B), the fourth presentation unit 800 includes a base member 801, a cover member 802 disposed to cover the front side of the base member 801, and a base member 802. It mainly consists of an LED board 803 attached to the front side of the LED board 801 and an inner lens 805 arranged on the front side of the LED board 803, and as shown in FIG. At the upper left corner, it is provided so that it can be viewed through the glass window 50a and the board 200 from the front of the pachinko game machine 75SG001, that is, from the side of the player facing the pachinko game machine 75SG001.

The base member 801 is formed of a non-transparent synthetic resin material into a box shape with an open front, and a portion of the periphery is formed into an arc shape along the guide rail 211 . Furthermore, the surfaces (front and rear surfaces and peripheral surfaces) are white.

The LED board 803 is formed to be smaller in front view than the base member 801, and is attached to the front end of a boss (not shown) erected on the front surface of the base member 801. On the front surface of the LED board 803, a plurality of fourth performance LEDs 804 and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted. The fourth presentation LEDs 804 are angle-type LEDs that can emit light parallel or substantially parallel to the mounting surface of the LED board 803, and are arranged in plural along the peripheral edge of the front surface of the LED board 803. Further, the surface of the LED board 803 (insulating portion excluding printed wiring on the front and back surfaces) is white.

The inner lens 805 is made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and is placed in an area surrounded by the plurality of fourth performance LEDs 804 on the front surface of the LED board 803.

As shown in FIG. 10-21(B), on the back side of the inner lens 805, the light incident from the fourth performance LED 804 is reflected forward by a reflecting portion 806 for reflecting the light forward. The light is emitted forward almost equally from the entire front surface of the inner lens 805. Since the front surface of the inner lens 805 is a flat surface, it emits light from a surface like a light guide plate.

The cover member 802 is made of a light-transmitting (transparent) synthetic resin material, and is formed to be able to cover the front side of the base member 801 and the LED board 803. Specifically, the cover member 802 does not cover the front end of the standing wall 801A along the guide rail 211 among the standing walls erected on the front periphery of the base member 801, and covers the front end of the standing wall 801B other than the part along the guide rail 211. Covers the front end. Further, a light diffusing section 802A consisting of an uneven portion is formed on the back surface of the cover member 802, so that the light from the inner lens 805 can be diffused and emitted forward.

In this way, in the fourth production unit 800, when the fourth production LED 804 emits light, the light emitted from the fourth production LED 804 forward through the inner lens 805 further passes through the cover member 802. By being diffused and emitted forward, the entire front surface of the cover member 802 emits surface light.

Next, the third presentation unit 600 and the fourth presentation unit 800 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 10-24, the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 have the surfaces of their respective base members 601, 801 and LED boards 603, 803 of the same color, which is white, and these base members 601, 801 and the front sides of the LED boards 603, 803 are covered with translucent cover members 602, 802, and the front side emits light when the third performance LEDs 604A, 604B and the fourth performance LED 804 are lit. has been done.

As shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21 (A), an LED board 603 as an electronic component having third presentation LEDs 604A and 604B is arranged on the front side of the base member 601, and the front side is covered with a cover. It is covered with member 602. However, since the cover member 602 is made of a synthetic resin material having light-transmitting properties, even if the cover member 602 is formed with the light diffusing section 602A, the cover member 602 cannot be seen from the player's side. Although it is possible to visually check the back side, an inner lens 605 with a light diffusion section 605A formed on the front and rear surfaces is provided on the back side so as to cover the LED board 603 from the front side. Although it is possible to visually recognize the front surface of the LED board 603, it is extremely difficult to visually recognize the front surface of the LED board 603.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-21(A), a standing wall of the same white base member 601 is arranged around (around) the white LED board 603, so that the LED board 603 is connected to the surrounding base member. 601, the boundary BD between the LED board 603 and the cover member 602 is difficult to see. In other words, it becomes difficult to see that the LED board 603 is provided on the base member 601, so that the LED board 603, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21 (B), an LED board 803 as an electronic component having a fourth presentation LED 804 is arranged on the front side of the base member 801, and is covered with a cover member 802. However, since the cover member 802 is made of a synthetic resin material having light-transmitting properties, even if the cover member 802 is formed with the light diffusing section 802A, the cover member 802 cannot be seen from the player's side. It is possible to visually recognize the front surface of the base member 801 and the LED board 803.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-21(B), by disposing the same white base member 801 around (periphery) the white LED board 803, the LED board 803 is connected to the surrounding base member 801. As a result, the boundary BD between the LED board 803 and the cover member 802 becomes difficult to see. In other words, it becomes difficult to see that the LED board 803 is provided on a part of the front surface of the base member 801, so that the LED board 803, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

However, the fourth performance LED 804 is an angle-type LED that enters light from the side end surface of the inner lens 805, and is arranged along the periphery of the LED board 803, so that the LED including the fourth performance LED 804 The front side of the front peripheral edge of the substrate 803 is not covered by the inner lens 805, and the inner lens 805 has a smaller area in which a reflecting portion and a light diffusing portion are formed than the inner lens 605, so that the player The visibility when viewing the LED board 803 including the fourth performance LED 804 through the inner lens 805 from the player side is the same as the visibility of the LED board 803 including the third performance LEDs 604A and 604B through the inner lens 605 from the player side. The visibility is higher than that of 603. In other words, the LED board 803 is more noticeable than the LED board 603.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-24, the light emitting effect part 630 of the third effect unit 600 is larger than the LED board 803 of the fourth effect unit 800 when viewed from the player side (see FIG. 10-20). ), furthermore, the arrangement position in the front-rear direction of the front surface is further forward (on the player side) than the arrangement position of the front surface of the fourth production unit 800 (see FIGS. 10-22 and 10-23), and The light emitting mode by the fourth effect LED 804 of the effect unit 800 is surface emission, whereas the light emission mode by the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B of the third effect unit 600 is point light (see FIG. 10-25). In addition, in FIG. 10-25, the backgrounds of the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 are shown in black for the convenience of explaining the light emission mode.

In this way, the light emitting production unit 630 of the third production unit 600 is larger than the LED board 803 of the fourth production unit 800 when viewed from the player side, is located closer to the player, and emits strong light. Therefore, the performance means has higher visibility than the fourth performance unit 800 when viewed from the player side. That is, the third production unit 600, which is a production means with higher visibility when viewed from the player side than the fourth production unit 800, is provided in the vicinity of the fourth production unit 800. Since the third presentation unit 600 is more conspicuous than the fourth presentation unit 800 and attracts more attention from players, the LED board 803, which is an electronic component of the fourth presentation unit 800, becomes less noticeable.

In addition, in this embodiment, the light emitting production section 630 of the third production unit 600 is larger than the LED board 803 of the fourth production unit 800 when viewed from the player side, and is located closer to the player. , the form is illustrated in which it is configured as a presentation means with higher visibility than the LED board 803 and the base member 801 by emitting strong light, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the third presentation The light emitting production section 630 of the unit 600 has improved visibility because it differs from the LED board 803 of the fourth production unit 800 in at least one of the size, position relative to the player, and light emission mode when viewed from the player side. It is good if the value is high.

Furthermore, the front surface of the light emitting production section 630 of the third production unit 600 as a production means may be colored with a color that is more visible than the surface color of the LED board 803, or a decorative section with a color that is highly visible may be provided. The cover member 602 may be molded in a highly visible color to easily increase the visibility of the light emitting production section 630. Furthermore, the visibility of the light emitting effect part 630 may be easily enhanced by the light emitting mode (for example, lighting color, lighting mode, brightness, etc.) of the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B.

In addition, although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the light emitting production section 630 of the third production unit 600 which can emit light by a light emitting means and can be operated by a production motor 631 is applied as a production means, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be a light-emitting means (such as a lamp part) provided around the fourth effect unit 800 in the gaming machine frame 3, or a effect means that does not emit light by a light-emitting means, or a light-emitting means provided around the fourth effect unit 800 in the gaming machine frame 3. It may be a production section that does not operate and is fixed at a predetermined position.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-23, a protruding portion 3A (eaves portion) is formed at the upper front surface of the gaming machine frame 3, which protrudes further forward than the gaming board 2 and the glass window 50a. The protruding part 3A is formed above the gaming area Y so as not to obstruct the visibility of the game ball passing through the upper part of the gaming area Y, but by protruding largely forward, it can be used for pachinko, for example. When the game machine 75SG001 is installed on the game island of the game hall, the area E1 below the protrusion 3A (the area indicated by halftone dots in the figure) is shaded by the outside light of the game hall being blocked by the protrusion 3A. It gets dark.

Therefore, by providing the third presentation unit 600 and the fourth presentation unit 800 at a position corresponding to the area E1 in the upper part of the game area Y, the LED boards 603 and 803 are easily lost in the shadow of the protrusion 3A. So it becomes less noticeable.

Further, above the LED boards 603, 803, there is provided a protrusion 3A that protrudes toward the player side than the LED boards 603, 803, and the protrusion 3A is larger than the LED boards 603, 803 ( (See FIG. 10-23), the LED boards 603, 803 are in the shadow of the protrusion 3A and become less noticeable.

Further, although the LED boards 603, 803 and the base members 601, 801 are white in color, the present invention is not limited to this, and they may be dark colored (for example, black). By doing so, the LED boards 603, 803 and the base members 601, 801 can easily disappear into the shadow of the protrusion 3A, making them less noticeable.

Note that in this embodiment, a protrusion 3A that protrudes toward the player above the LED boards 603, 803 is applied as the protrusion that protrudes toward the player above the electronic components and specific members. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the protrusion is not limited to a protrusion provided protrudingly from a part of the frame 3 for the game machine. It may be configured by other gaming devices (for example, winning ball device, etc.) or presentation devices provided in the area Y. In addition, the protruding part 3A is not only fixedly installed on the front surface of the gaming machine frame 3, but also moves from the origin position to the protruding position at a predetermined timing, so that the protruding part 3A can be positioned above the electronic components and specific members. It may be a protrusion that protrudes to the side.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-26, the light emitting area 506 of the light guide plate 501 is a light emitting area 506 when the light emitting part 630 and the power transmission member 632 of the third effect unit 600 operating on the back side of the light guide plate 501 move. It is formed so as to overlap in front and behind most of the moving region E2 (the region surrounded by the dashed line in FIG. 10-26).

More specifically, the movement area E2 of the light emitting effect part 630 and the power transmission member 632 is an area where the light emitting effect part 630 moves from the origin position to the effect position, and is an area including the origin position and the effect position. When light enters the light guide plate 501 from the right end surface 501a, the light emitting region 506 becomes in a state of emitting light, and the display image of the rear image display device 5, the light emitting production section 630, and the power transmission member 632 are visible from the player's side to the light guide plate. 501 and becomes difficult or impossible to see. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the light guide plate LED 502 to control the light emitting area during a movement period in which the light emission performance section 630 and the power transmission member 632 are moved from the origin position to the performance position or during a performance period in which they are located at the performance position. 506, the light emitting effect part 630 and the power transmission member 632 become difficult or impossible to see through the light guide plate 501 from the player's side. It is possible to prevent the cable C (electronic component) etc. provided along the member 632 from becoming conspicuous.

Furthermore, after the light emitting production section 630 moves to the production position, when the light guide plate LED 502 goes out and the light emitting production of the light emitting area 506 ends, the power transmission member 632, cable C, etc. become visible, but the light emitting production section By lighting up the third presentation LEDs 604A and 604B of 630 to make the light emission presentation section 630 stand out, the power transmission member 632 and the cable C can be made less noticeable.

Additionally, the electronic components (for example, the LED board 603 and cable C) that are operable in this way are visible to the player during the waiting period and movement period when they are waiting at the origin position. However, it is preferable to make it difficult or impossible to see from the player's side at least during the performance period when the player is located at the performance position. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the electronic components from becoming conspicuous during the production period that attracts the attention of the players.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 75SG001 of the feature section 75SG of this embodiment has the following features:
Electronic components (for example, LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) provided so as to be visible to the player;
a specific member (for example, base member 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a similar color to the electronic component;
a translucent member (e.g., cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) that is a translucent member and is provided so that a player can see the electronic component and the specific member through the member;
It is characterized by having the following.
In this way, even if the electronic components are arranged so that they can be seen by the player, the electronic components are less noticeable due to the specific members having similar colors, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased.
Note that the electronic component and the specific member can be changed to any color as long as they are similar in color. Further, as in the above embodiment, the electronic component and the specific member may have the same color (for example, black on black, white on white, etc.).

(Explanation regarding transformation and application of characteristic part 75SG)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001 described above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

For example, in the feature section 75SG of the embodiment, light emitting diodes such as the first performance LED 304, second performance LEDs 404A to 404D, third performance LEDs 604A and 604B, and fourth performance LED 804 are provided as electronic components. Although the embodiment in which the LED boards 303, 403, 603, and 803 are applied is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. (including the control board 12, relay board, etc.), electronic parts such as sensors, solenoids, motors, connectors, cables (wiring), and boards and members for fixing these.

Further, in the characteristic part 75SG of the embodiment, a form is illustrated in which a base member 301, 401, 601, 801 for arranging an LED board 303, 403, 603, 803 as an electronic component is applied as a specific member. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if it is not a member that constitutes a part of a unit (device) that arranges or houses an electronic component as described above, it may be a member that is provided around the electronic component. If there is, a different member provided separately from the unit (device) in which the electronic component is arranged or housed (for example, a member forming part of another unit, or a part of the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3). (a member constituting a part, etc.).

Further, in the characteristic portion 75SG of the embodiment, a mode is illustrated in which cover members 302, 402, 602, and 802 forming part of a unit (device) in which electronic components are arranged or housed are applied as the light-transmitting member. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the member does not constitute a part of a unit (device) for arranging or accommodating electronic components as described above, it may be a member having translucency. If a member is provided so that a player can see through the electronic component and the specific member, it may be a different member provided separately from the unit (device) that arranges or houses the electronic component (for example, It may be a member that constitutes a part of another unit, a member that constitutes a part of the game board 2 or the frame 3 for a game machine, etc.).

Further, in the characteristic part 75SG of the embodiment, an example is given in which the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component are the same color (same color), but the present invention is not limited to this. However, as long as the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component have the same color as described above, the electronic component and the specific member are not limited to the same color.

Further, in the characteristic part 75SG of the embodiment, the base members 301, 401, 601, 801 as specific members partially overlap on the back side of the LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components, and , the non-overlapping portions are arranged around the LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803, but the present invention is not limited to this, and electronic components and specific members are arranged from the player's side. When viewed visually, they may be arranged side by side on at least one of the upper side, the lower side, the left side, and the right side without overlapping. Additionally, if the specific component is visible and placed around the electronic component when viewed from the player's side, the electronic component and the specific component are placed apart in the vertical, horizontal, front-back, etc. directions. may have been done.

Note that the specific member provided around the electronic component includes a specific member provided at a position that is visible from the player's side together with the electronic component, for example, a specific member located within a range of about 5 cm from the electronic component. It may also include specific members.

Further, in the characteristic part 75SG of the embodiment, the cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 made of a synthetic resin material having translucency are applied as the translucent members, but the present invention applies thereto. The material is not limited to any particular material as long as it is a translucent member, and may be a glass material or the like. Further, as long as the electronic component and the specific member can be seen through the member by the player, the member may be transparent or translucent, or may be colored in a predetermined color. Furthermore, the light transmittance does not have to be 100% or a value close to 100%.

In addition, in the feature section 75SG of the embodiment, the cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 as light-transmitting members allow the player to pass through the cover members 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components. Although a form in which a part or the entire area of the base member 301, 401, 601, 801 as a specific member is visible is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least a part of the electronic component If the electronic component and the specific component are provided so as to be visible through the electronic component, the electronic component and the specific component can be visually recognized together even if at least a part of the specific component is not visible through the component. All you have to do is stay there.

Moreover, in the characteristic part 75SG of the embodiment, the cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 as light-transmitting members, the LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components and the base member 301 as a specific member, 401, 601, 801 are arranged along the electronic components and the specific member, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not necessarily arranged along the electronic components and the specific member. It doesn't have to be done. That is, the electronic component or the specific member may be arranged obliquely with respect to the light-transmitting member.

Further, in the characteristic part 75SG of the embodiment, the entire surface of the LED board 303, 403, 603, 803 or the base member 301, 401, 601, 801 is colored in a predetermined color (black or white). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the colors of parts of the electronic component and the specific member that are visible through the transparent member (for example, the front color of the electronic component and the specific member) are similar colors. If it is, the entire surface does not necessarily have to be of similar color. Furthermore, the colors of these electronic components and specific components may be colored during the molding of the components, by painting or printing after molding, or by pasting stickers, etc. You can leave it there.

Further, in the characteristic part 75SG of the embodiment, an example is given in which the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component are the same color (same color), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a predetermined electronic device that is difficult or invisible to the player and is installed separately from the LED board 303, 403, 603, 803 as an electronic component or the base member 301, 401, 601, 801 as a specific component. parts (for example, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) and predetermined members (for example, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, etc.) provided around the predetermined electronic components. (a member for fixing the starting port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.), the predetermined electronic components (for example, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, the solenoids 81, 82, etc.) , it is preferable that the color is not similar to that of a predetermined member (for example, a member that fixes the first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.).

In this way, with respect to predetermined electronic components such as the first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, and solenoids 81 and 82 that are difficult or invisible to the player, the balance with the predetermined member that fixes them is determined. Since general-purpose products can be used without considering the above, manufacturing costs can be reduced.

In addition, by setting the color of the specific component to a color that has the same hue as the electronic component and has either higher brightness or saturation, the visibility of the specific component will be higher than that of the electronic component. Electronic components can be made relatively less noticeable.

Furthermore, by coloring the light-transmitting member in a similar color to the electronic component and the specific member, the light-transmitting member blends in with the electronic component and the specific member, thereby making the electronic component less noticeable.

Further, for example, in a case where electronic components such as a black LED board are arranged on the right side of the game board 2, an electronic component such as a black LED board may be installed on the left side of the game board 2 on the opposite side with the image display device 5 in between. By providing an outer rail decoration 212 of the same color or similar color as the electronic component separately from the specific component so as to be visible to the player, the black component can be arranged on the left and right sides of the image display device 5 in a well-balanced manner. This makes it less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable, and the electronic components can be made less noticeable. In this way, by symmetrically arranging a member of the same color or similar color as the electronic component at a separate position from the specific member, the electronic component can be made less noticeable.

Further, the configuration regarding the characteristic portion 75SG may be combined with some or all of the configurations regarding the characteristic portions 91AK, 92AK, 01AK, 02AK, etc., as appropriate. For example, when the effects described in the characteristic parts 91AK, 92AK, 01AK, and 02AK can be executed on the image display device 5, the first effect unit 300 described in the characteristic part 75SG provided around the image display device 5 , the electronic components of the second presentation unit 400, the third presentation unit 600, and the fourth presentation unit 800 become less noticeable, so that the above-mentioned presentation can be presented suitably.

Specifically, for example, as explained in FIGS. 9-9 to 9-11, the normal drawing effect NOR is executed even during periods other than the effect execution period D0 among the plurality of effect execution periods D0 to D4. In this case, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect using the first light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs, and the light emitting effect is executed when executing the specific drawing effect SPE in the effect execution period D2 etc. In the case of controlling the electronic parts (for example, LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) and specific members (for example, base members 301, 401, 601, 801) (for example, the game effect lamp 9 It may also be possible to control the light emitting effect using the second light emitting member provided at a position closer than the game effect lamp 9 (or to make the light amount lower than that of the game effect lamp 9, etc.). By doing this, when the light emitting effect using the first light emitting member is restricted, the light emitting effect using the second light emitting member is executed, thereby preventing electronic components and specific components from becoming more noticeable. can.

Also, among the second light-emitting members provided around the electronic components and the specific member, the second effect is capable of surface-emitting the decorative portion 420 of the transparent member disposed on the front side of the electronic component and the specific member. For light-emitting members such as the LED 404A that are not noticeable even if they continue to emit light, the light amount may be maintained (not restricted in execution) even when controlling not to perform a light-emitting effect using the first light-emitting member. . By doing so, it is possible to make the electronic components and specific members less noticeable without reducing the presentation effect too much.

Further, in the embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1,75SG001 is illustrated as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a predetermined number of game balls is Rental balls that are circulated inside the gaming machine and are lent out in response to a player's lending request and the number of prize balls awarded in response to winnings are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is counted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine in which the numbers are subtracted and stored. In these enclosed gaming machines, scores and points are awarded to the player instead of game balls, so these awarded scores and points correspond to the gaming value.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium, and for example, non-spherical game balls such as medals, It may be a medium.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a pachinko game machine is applied as an example of a game machine, but a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using, for example, a game value. At the same time, one game ends when a variable display result is derived to a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, each of which can be identified. It is also applicable to slot machines that allow winnings to occur.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Furthermore, the gaming machine that allows games may be any machine that allows at least playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, but may be general gaming machines.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the present invention, in addition to the above-mentioned embodiments and other embodiments described below.

Further, all or some of the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modification example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment example and each modification example described below may be combined arbitrarily.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiments and the later-described embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and should not be considered restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description and the following description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1, 75SG001) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state) that is advantageous for the player, An electronic component (for example, LED board 303, 403, 603, 803) provided so as to be visible to the player, and a specific member (for example, base member 301, 401, 601, 801), and a translucent member (for example, cover member 302, 402, 602, 802), and the light-transmitting member (e.g., cover member 302) has the electronic component (e.g., LED board 303) and the specific member (e.g., base member 301). (for example, the decorative pattern 331) (see FIG. 10-12), and further includes a reservation storage means (for example, reservation information for performance control storage area), and a notification effect (e.g., continuous notification of hold) that notifies that, when controlled to be in the advantageous state, hold information corresponding to being controlled to be in the advantageous state is stored in the hold storage means. (for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the processing of steps 010AKS004 and 010AKS007), and a specific display means that can display a specific display (for example, step 010AKS007) when the notification performance is executed. The CPU 120 for effect control executes the process of 120), and at a predetermined timing (for example, timing TA, TB, or TC) of a variable display corresponding to a specific display, a specific display erasing effect (for example, erasing effect) that erases the specific display is executed. It is equipped with an executable erasing effect execution means (for example, a effect control CPU 120 that executes the processing of steps 010AKS024 and 010AKS025), and when a specific display is displayed, a predetermined event (for example, a variable pattern command is missed or erased). If the specific display is not erased at the predetermined timing due to an error (error in production setting processing) occurring, special control is executed to erase the specific display at a specific timing (for example, timing TD) after the predetermined timing. For example, a gaming machine that is capable of executing the process of step 010AKS045 can be mentioned.

According to such a configuration, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the decorative pattern makes the electronic components less noticeable, so it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in design. Further, it is possible to prevent the specific display from continuing to be displayed and giving the player a sense of distrust, and it is possible to suitably execute the notification effect.

In other words, it is possible to create a gaming machine with a good appearance while increasing the degree of freedom in design. Since the specific display is erased at a specific timing, it is possible to prevent the specific display from continuing to be displayed and giving the player a sense of distrust. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that looks good when installed in a gaming parlor and easily gains the trust of players.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that can increase the degree of freedom in design and suitably execute notification effects, it is possible to control advantageous states (for example, jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state) that are advantageous to the player. A gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature section 010AK), which includes a suspension storage means (for example, a suspension information storage area for performance control) capable of storing information regarding variable display as suspension information, and a suspension information storage area for controlling the performance, and a control system that controls the advantageous state. When the suspension storage means is controlled to be in the advantageous state, a notification performance execution means (for example, a notification performance execution means (e.g. A production control CPU 120 that executes the processing of steps 010AKS004 and 010AKS007), and a specific display means that can display a specific display upon execution of the notification production (for example, a production control CPU 120 that executes the processing of step 010AKS007). Then, at a predetermined timing (for example, timing TA, TB, or TC) of the variable display corresponding to the specific display, erasure effect execution means (for example, step 010AKS024 and a production control CPU 120 that executes the processing of steps 010AKS025), and when a specific display is displayed, a predetermined event (for example, a variable pattern command is missed or an error in the deletion production setting process) occurs. If the specific display is not erased at the predetermined timing, it is possible to perform special control to erase the specific display at a specific timing (for example, timing TD) after the predetermined timing (for example, by performing the process of step 010AKS045). An example is a gaming machine (which is executable). Below, one example of the form of these gaming machines will be explained as another example of the form.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 152F)
Next, the characteristic portion 152F of this embodiment will be explained. Regarding the feature section 152F, a technique aimed at a pachinko gaming machine in which setting means can set setting values having different advantages for players, such as the probability of winning a jackpot, will be described below. The game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103) also has a function as a setting means that can set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player as the setting value of the probability of winning a jackpot. .

First, the setting values will be explained. In the pachinko game machine 1 described in this example, the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the setting value by a setting change operation performed by a person on the gaming parlor side (such as a clerk at the gaming parlor) using an operating means such as a predetermined switch. It is said to be composed of

For example, the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103) executes a setting change process that allows changing the jackpot winning probability set in the pachinko game machine 1 in response to a setting change operation. As a result, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process, a setting change process is executed that allows the jackpot winning probability to be changed by using a display result determination table according to the set value. The setting values are, for example, comprised of six levels (multiple levels) from 1 to 6, and the probability of winning the jackpot increases in the order of setting value 1 < setting value 2 < setting value 3 < setting value 4 < setting value 5 < setting value 6. That is, when setting value 1 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the lowest, and the advantage is in the order of setting value 2 < setting value 3 < setting value 4 < setting value 5 < setting value 6. It increases in stages. It should be noted that the set value may be set in multiple stages, and is not limited to six stages. In this way, as the probability of winning the jackpot can be changed, the ball release rate (number of balls played per unit time (number of prize balls)) will change, so changing the setting value will change the ball release rate. It can also be said that it is something to do.

For example, in the pachinko game machine of this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot changes depending on the setting value selected by the setting change operation when the power is turned on. Among the six levels of setting values, for example, setting values 4 to 6 are called high settings, which have a high probability of winning a jackpot, and setting values 1 to 3, for example, may be called low settings, which have a low probability of winning a jackpot.

Further, the selection probability of the type of jackpot may also be changeable by setting the setting value 1 to setting value 6, similarly to the winning probability of the jackpot. The selection probability of the variation pattern type may also be changeable by setting values 1 to 6, similar to the jackpot winning probability. The selection probability of the variable pattern may also be changeable by setting values 1 to 6, similarly to the probability of winning a jackpot.

Regarding the characteristic part 152F, in a pachinko game machine in which any one of a plurality of setting values can be set, when the machine is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, when the RAM 122 as a pending storage buffer is In some cases, a hold series in which hold information determined to be controlled (win) is executed is stored. Specifically, the pending connection means that among the pending information that existed when the jackpot occurred, there is pending information that will become a hit in the future, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, the pending information that existed when the jackpot occurred Refers to consecutive wins within the range of pending information in which the next winning occurs consecutively within the range of . In addition, in the case of a small win, it becomes a jackpot via a small win based on the occurrence of a V winning, so it can be said that the pending information of a small win is the pending storage information of a win that will become a jackpot in the future. When such a pending series is executed, a notification effect that notifies that the series is on hold may be executed.

FIG. 11-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 152F. In the pachinko game machine 1 in the feature section 152F, the reference numerals and descriptions of the same components as in the front view of the pachinko game machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 will be omitted, and the different parts will be described.

In the game area where the game ball that has been hit can flow down, the first path of the flow paths along which the game ball flows down is mainly provided in the area on the left side of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front, and the game ball is flown down. A second path different from the first path among the downstream paths along which the balls flow down is mainly provided in an area on the right side of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front.

Hitting the game ball into the left side area (left side game area) of the image display device 5 in order to cause the game ball to flow down the first path is called left-handed hitting. Hitting the game ball into the right side area (right side game area) of the image display device 5 in order to cause the game ball to flow down the second path is called right-handed hitting. The first route is a route in which the game ball can flow down by hitting the game ball to the left side of the game area, so it may be called a left-handed route. Further, the second route is a route in which the game ball can flow down by hitting the game ball to the right side of the game area, so it may be called a right-handed route.

Note that the first route and the second route may be configured as different routes, or may be partially shared routes. The left gaming area and the right gaming area may be separated by, for example, the end face of the image display device 5 or the arrangement of the gaming nails within the gaming area.

When the game ball that is fired from the ball launcher and hit into the game area in response to the operation of the ball operation handle 30 is guided to the left game area, it is guided, for example, along the array of game nails. Therefore, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide the player to the right gaming area. Further, when the game ball is guided to the right game area, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide it to the left game area because it is guided along the arrangement of the game nails, for example.

A winning ball device 6A in which a first starting winning opening is formed is provided as a structure into which the game balls that have been distributed can enter the left gaming area of the gaming area. The winning ball device 6A is arranged below the image display device 5. The winning ball device 6A is provided with a first starting hole switch 22A for detecting a game ball that has entered the first starting winning hole.

A passage gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a V judgment winning device 87 are provided as structures into which the game balls that are divided into the right game area of the gaming area can enter. The variable prize winning ball device 6B has a second starting prize opening into which game balls can be won. In addition, as a switch for detecting a game ball that has entered each, a gate switch 21 is installed inside the passage gate 41, a second starting opening switch 22B is installed inside the second starting winning opening, and a V judgment winning device 87 is installed. Inside, a V winning switch 87a, a V judgment winning switch 15a, and a V judgment discharge switch 15b are provided, respectively.

In the left gaming area, game nails are planted so that game balls are guided to the first starting winning opening of the winning opening structure. Therefore, when aiming to cause the game ball to enter the first starting prize opening, the player only has to hit the game ball to the left. Further, in the right gaming area, game nails are planted so that game balls are guided to the second starting winning opening and the passage gate 41 of the winning opening structure. Therefore, when aiming to enter the game ball into the second starting prize opening and the passage gate 41, the player only has to hit the game ball to the right.

The passage gate 41 is a gate structure through which game balls can enter (pass through). When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The normal design will be described later. In the left gaming area, game nails are planted so that game balls are guided to the first starting winning opening of the winning opening structure. Therefore, when aiming to cause the game ball to enter the first starting prize opening, the player only has to hit the game ball to the left. Further, in the right gaming area, game nails are planted so that game balls are guided to the second starting winning opening and the passage gate 41 of the winning opening structure. Therefore, when aiming to enter the game ball into the second starting prize opening and the passage gate 41, the player only has to hit the game ball to the right.

The V judgment winning device 87 is a device for determining the V winning of the game ball, which is a condition for generating a jackpot when a small hit occurs.

The V judgment prize winning device 87 is formed of a transparent member, and it is possible to visually check the game ball passing through the inside. The V judgment winning device 87 has a width at the top that allows the game ball to pass in the front and back direction, and walls on both sides (the front side and the back side) of the passage that slopes from right to left and extends in the left and right direction. A guide path along which the game ball is guided is formed. In the center of the guide path, when a small hit occurs, a signal is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds x 10 open periods + 1 second closing period (interval period) x 9 times + end period 1 second). By repeating opening and closing, an operating opening is formed as an opening through which a total of about 10 or more game balls can be won within a predetermined period of time when the opening is open. The path of the game ball in the V judgment winning device 87 is provided with a plurality of protrusions as deceleration means for decelerating the guided game ball so as to protrude alternately on both sides of the wall, so that when hitting right-handed, , A structure (hereinafter referred to as a deceleration structure) in which the game ball flows slowly is formed in the passage above the operation opening on the upper part of the V judgment winning device 87.

In the small winning game state, the V judgment winning device 87 is operated for a relatively long period of time until the entry of 10 game balls into the V judgment winning device 87 is detected or until a predetermined period of time has elapsed. Opening control is executed. In the V judgment winning device 87, the portion of the guideway where the operating port is not formed forms a fixed passage called a fixed portion 873. A movable portion 872 that can move forward and backward on the operating port is provided at a position where the operating port can be opened and closed.

The movable part 872 is driven by the solenoid 22 and can move forward and backward to open and close the operating port. When the operating port is closed due to the state of the movable part 872, the game ball can pass through the upper surfaces of the movable part 872 and the fixed part 873 as a guideway, and is guided from the right end to the left end on the guideway and falls from the left end. do. When the operating port is opened due to the operating state of the movable part 872, the operating port opens in the guideway, so the game ball guided to the guideway can fall from the operating port into the V judgment winning device 87. Become.

Inside the V-judgment winning device 87 (operating port), a V-winning region 870 as a specific region is located at the center in the left-right direction at the bottom of the V-judgment winning device 87 as a winning region where the game ball that enters from the operating port can win. Further, a ramp is provided for guiding all of the game balls entering from the operating port onto the V winning area 870 via an inclined path. The V winning area 870 has a V winning opening into which a game ball can enter, and can guide the gaming ball that has entered from the V winning opening downward.

A plate-shaped opening/closing member (not shown) that can switch the V winning area 870 between an open state and a closed state is provided at the top end of the winning hole (V winning hole) of the V winning area 870. There is. The opening/closing member is driven by the solenoid 24 and can move forward and backward to open and close the V winning opening. In the state where the V winning hole is opened depending on the state of the opening/closing member, the game ball guided onto the V winning area 870 is in a state where it can fall into the V winning area 870. On the other hand, when the V winning opening is closed due to the state of the opening/closing member, the game ball guided onto the V winning area 870 passes over the opening/closing member and opens near the downstream side of the V winning area 870. The ball is placed in a state where it can fall into a winning ball area (not shown) that can guide the game downward.

Specifically, the V winning area 870 of the V judgment winning device 87 is basically in an open state, and in a small winning game state in which the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened, one game ball is When entering the V winning area 870 and winning a prize, the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 87a provided in the V winning area 870. In the small winning game state, when one game ball is detected by the V winning switch 87a, the opening/closing member is controlled to the closed state, and the game ball guided onto the V winning area 870 from then on will be inside the winning ball area. will enter. The game ball that has entered the winning ball area is detected by the V judgment winning switch 15a provided in the winning ball area. As a result, one game ball entering the V judgment winning device 87 is detected by the V winning switch 87a, and the subsequent game balls are detected by the V judgment winning switch 15a.

When the total number of balls detected by the V judgment winning switch 87a and the V judgment winning switch 15a reaches 10, the V judgment winning device 87, which is opened in the small winning game state, closes its operating port and the game ball enters. considered to be an impossible situation. The V winning area 870 and the winning ball area are configured to merge at the bottom, and the gaming balls that have passed through the merged discharge passage and entered the V judgment winning device 87 are placed in a predetermined position inside the game board 2. It is discharged into the discharge channel. The discharge path is provided with a V judgment discharge switch 15b that can detect the game balls to be discharged, and all the game balls to be discharged are detected by the switch.

When a small hit occurs and the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened, a game ball enters the V winning area 870 and is detected by the V winning switch 87a during a predetermined valid period. , the conditions for generating a jackpot are satisfied, and the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The winning of a game ball in such a V winning area 870 is called a V winning. In the pachinko game machine 1, as mentioned above, during the period when a small hit occurs and the operation port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened, a total of about 10 game balls can be collected on average without requiring any special operation. The structure and control design are such that the game ball can enter the V judgment winning device 87, and furthermore, when the game ball can enter the V judgment winning device 87, the game ball is always (100%) in the V winning area. The structure is designed to enter 870. In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1, when a small hit occurs, a right-hitting promotion notification that instructs the player to hit the right-hand ball is executed so that the player can easily hit the game ball into the V judgment winning device 87. Ru.

Therefore, when a small hit occurs, unless the player does not shoot the game ball during the opening period of the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87, and unless the player hits the ball left-handed, the player must hit right-handed. In this case, the game ball will definitely (100%) enter the V winning area 870 and a jackpot will occur.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example was shown in which the V judgment winning device 87 was provided with a structure for decelerating the game ball. However, such a deceleration structure is not provided, and an operating port that allows the game ball to fall is provided in a part of the guide path for the game ball in the V judgment winning device 87, and during the period of the small hit game state. In order to allow about 10 game balls to enter the V winning area 870, a configuration may be used in which the operating port is opened 10 times.

In the right game area, game nails are planted so that game balls are guided to the variable winning ball device 6B and the V judgment winning device 87. Therefore, when aiming to cause a game ball to enter the variable winning ball device 6B and the V judgment winning device 87, the player only has to hit the game ball to the right.

It should be noted that it may be arranged so that there is a possibility that the game balls hit into the left gaming area may enter either the variable winning ball device 6B or the V judgment winning device 87, but from the viewpoint of playability, It is desirable that the possibility is extremely low compared to the possibility that the game balls that are distributed into the right game area will enter them.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the gaming area. In the special variable winning ball device 7, a game ball hit to the right is guided by a game nail planted in the right game area. Further, the special variable prize winning ball device 7 is configured so that the game ball does not enter from the left game area depending on the state of the game nails.

The special variable winning ball device 7 has a big winning opening covered by a rectangular door on the front, and when a jackpot occurs, the door is tilted forward about the bottom by a solenoid, and the big winning opening appears ( open). A count switch 23 is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 to detect the game ball that has entered. A winning route is set to the special variable winning ball device 7 using a game nail or other structure so that the game ball can enter the grand prize opening only when the game ball is hit into the right game area. Limited. It should be noted that it may be arranged so that a prize can be won in the big winning hole regardless of whether the game ball is hit in either the left game area or the right game area.

A jackpot occurs when a jackpot symbol (jackpot display result) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, and when a jackpot symbol (jackpot display result) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Occurs in When a jackpot is determined by lottery based on the game ball winning in the first starting winning hole, the jackpot symbol is drawn and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A. When a jackpot is determined by lottery based on the game ball winning in the second starting winning hole, the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B.

A jackpot also occurs when a game ball enters the V winning area 870 while the operation port of the V judgment winning device 87 is open due to the small winning gaming state. Hereinafter, the game ball entering the V winning area 870 and being detected by the V winning switch 87a will be referred to as a V winning. A small win is a win in which the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened as a predetermined value imparting, and a jackpot can occur on the condition of a V winning. In the V judgment winning device 87, a gaming state in which the operating port is opened is called a "small winning gaming state." Then, in the small hit game state, a jackpot that occurs based on the game ball winning a V prize is called a "jackpot via a small win." On the other hand, a jackpot gaming state based on the display result of the variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is referred to as "jackpot by special symbol".

The jackpot game state is a specific game state (advantageous state) that is advantageous for the player as a predetermined value imparting, and a repeated continuous control is performed in which the special variable winning ball device 7 repeats the open state and the closed state a predetermined number of times. In the repeated continuous control, the state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is open (the big winning hole is open) is called a round. Repeated continuation control is also called round control.

In the jackpot game state, after the special variable prize winning ball device 7 is set to the open state, a predetermined end condition of the open state (a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed in the open state, or a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 The closed state is established in response to the fulfillment of the opening termination condition (that is, the occurrence of winning balls). Then, when the release end condition is satisfied, a continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of openings in the jackpot game state reaches a predetermined upper limit of 15 rounds (final round).

The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed when the first starting condition (first execution condition) or the second starting condition (second execution condition), which is the execution condition of the variable display, is satisfied (for example, when the game ball After passing (including winning) the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole as the starting winning area, the start condition for the variable display (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol It is started based on the establishment of a state in which a jackpot game is not being executed and a jackpot game is not being executed, and when a variable display time (variable time) has elapsed, a display result (stopped pattern) is derived and displayed. Note that the game ball passing through means that the game ball has passed through an area that has been predetermined as a winning area, such as a winning opening or gate, and is a concept that includes the game ball entering the winning opening (winning a prize). It is. Further, deriving and displaying the display result means to finally stop and display the symbol (an example of identification information) (determined display).

In addition, regarding the variable display in which the starting conditions have not yet been met even though the game ball has entered the starting area such as the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole, if the game ball has not yet started within the predetermined upper limit number. Storing information regarding variable displays for which conditions are not met is called pending storage. The term "suspended storage" is also used to indicate (specify) information that has been stored. Pending memory is also called starting memory or starting winnings memory.

Regarding the first special symbol, a variable display is executed based on the first pending memory as a pending memory based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole. Regarding the second special symbol, a variable display is executed based on the second pending memory as a pending memory based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning hole. If a jackpot occurs in a state where such first pending memory or second pending memory exists, the pending memory that existed before the jackpot occurrence will be maintained as it is, and the variable display will be displayed after the jackpot gaming state ends. used for.

When a second starting prize enters the second starting winning hole, even if there is a pending memory of the first starting winning, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the second starting winning will be executed with priority. Ru. In this way, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol.

Above the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, there is a second reserve consisting of four displays that display the number of valid winning balls that entered the second starting winning hole, that is, the number of second reserve memories. A display 25B is provided. The second hold indicator 25B increases the number of indicators lit by one each time there is a valid starting prize. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display device 4B is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

Further above the second reservation display 25B, a first reservation display 25A is provided which is made up of four indicators that display the effective number of winning balls that have entered the first starting prize opening, that is, the number of first reservation memories. . The first hold indicator 25A increases the number of indicators lit by one each time there is a valid starting prize. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display device 4A is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

In the pachinko game machine 1, depending on the game situation, the player shoots the game ball in two ways: ``left-handed'' aiming at the left playing area, and ``right-handed hitting'' aiming at the right playing area. The game state and performance state are controlled so that a rich variety of games can be enjoyed. Below, the flow of the game after the player starts playing the game on the pachinko game machine 1 will be explained.

When a player takes a seat at the pachinko game machine 1 and starts playing the game for the first time, the player first plays the game so that the game ball enters the first starting prize opening by hitting the ball to the left. Then, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, and if the display result is a jackpot (a jackpot due to the special symbol), the user switches from left-handed batting to right-handed batting and plays the game aiming at the special variable winning ball device 7 that is released. . After the jackpot game state ends, right-handed promotion notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to urge the player to play the game by hitting right. Specifically, a message such as "Aim to the right" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

During the jackpot game state, a game is performed in which the player aims at the opened special variable winning ball device 7 by hitting the ball with the right hand. During the jackpot game state, right-handed hitting promotion notification is performed. After the jackpot game state ends, if the time saving state described later is reached, the player continues playing the game by hitting right. After the jackpot game is over, if the time saving state has been reached, a time saving notification is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the time saving state will start. Further, during the time saving state, a right-handed hitting promotion notification is also performed. If the time-saving state does not occur after the end of the jackpot game state, the right-hand hitting promotion notification executed during the jackpot game state ends, and the game ball switches from right-hand hitting to left-hand hitting and enters the first starting prize opening. Play the game as follows. In addition, if the time saving state does not occur, a left-handed playing promotion notification (also called left-handed playing notification) is made to be performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to urge the player to switch back to left-handed playing and play the game. It's okay.

During the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game, the player plays the game by hitting the right hand to aim at the variable winning ball device 6B having the second starting winning hole. When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole and the display result becomes a jackpot (jackpot due to a special symbol), the player plays the game by aiming at the special variable winning ball device 7 while hitting the right hand. In addition, if the game ball enters the second starting prize opening and the display result becomes a small hit display result, the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 will be opened in the small winning gaming state, so the V judgment will be made while hitting the right hand. Aim for the winning device 87 and play the game. At the start of the small winning game state, a small winning start notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the small winning gaming state is started. In addition, when controlled to a small winning gaming state, a specific timing (depending on the gaming situation, the start timing of the small winning display that is executed before the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened according to the small winning) , or at a predetermined timing before the small win display is executed.), a right-handed hitting promotion notification is also performed.

When the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is in an open state due to the small winning gaming state, the game ball falls from the operating port into the inside of the V judgment winning device 87, enters the V winning region 870, and is detected. When a V-win occurs, a jackpot via a small hit occurs. When a V winning prize occurs, a V winning notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that a V winning prize has occurred. Further, when the small winning gaming state ends, a small winning ending notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the small winning gaming state has ended. Then, after the small hit ends, the special variable winning ball device 7 is released in the jackpot game state, so the player plays the game by aiming at the special variable winning ball device 7 while hitting right.

In addition, when playing a game aiming at the V judgment winning device 87 in the small winning gaming state, if the game ball does not enter the V winning area 870 but enters a non-specific area other than the V winning area 870, the jackpot will occur. does not occur. In this way, when a V winning does not occur during the small winning game state, a V winning failure notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the V winning has failed. Furthermore, at the end of the small winning gaming state, a small winning ending notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the small winning gaming state has ended. Then, after the small winning game state ends, while the time saving state continues, the player continues to play the game aiming at the variable prize winning ball device 6B while hitting right. When the time saving state ends, the player switches from right-handed to left-handed and plays the game so that the game ball enters the first starting prize opening. At the end of the time saving state, time saving end notification to notify that the time saving has ended is performed on the screen of the image display device 5, and left-handed playing promotion notification to urge the player to return to left-handed playing and play the game.

FIG. 11-2 is a diagram showing a hit type table. The winning type table shows, for each type of winning, the conditions for generating a jackpot, the control state (gaming state) after the jackpot, the number of openings in the jackpot (number of rounds), and the opening time of each round in the jackpot. In this embodiment, the jackpot types are symbol 15R time-saving jackpot, symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, 16 (15) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, 9 (8) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, and 5 (4 )R Time-saving jackpot is provided. The number in parentheses of the jackpot via the small hit indicates the number of times the special variable winning ball device 7 is released.

A small hit occurs when a game ball wins a prize in the second starting winning hole provided in the variable winning ball device 6B and the display result of the second special symbol becomes a small winning symbol. A determination as to whether or not the display result of the special symbol should be made into a small hit symbol is made in advance by random number lottery (small win determination of special symbol). When a small win occurs, a small win game state is entered, and the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened in an opening pattern in which the number of openings is 10 times and the opening time is 0.1 seconds. The game control state (jackpot probability, small win probability, base, which will be described later) after the end of the small win game state is the same as before the small win. In a small win, a prize ball is paid out to a game ball that has won a prize in the V winning area 870 in the V judgment winning device 87 during the small winning game state. During the small winning game state, it is set that about 10 winning balls can be generated, and it is set that about 30 winning balls can be paid out according to the winning balls.

If a game ball is entered into the operating port while the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is open and the game ball enters the V winning area 870 inside the V judgment winning device 87 (V winning), a jackpot occurs. do. A jackpot via such a small hit is called a jackpot via a small hit. Jackpots via small hits include 16 (15) R time-saving jackpots via small hits, 9 (8) R time-saving jackpots via small hits, and 5 (4) R time-saving jackpots via small hits, which have different numbers of rounds in the jackpot. It will be done. 16(15)R A small win that is linked so that it can become a time-saving jackpot is called a first small win. 9(8)R A small win that is linked so that it can become a time-saving jackpot is called a second small win. 5(4)R A small win that is linked so that it can become a time-saving jackpot is called a third small win.

On the other hand, a jackpot that occurs directly due to the variable display of special symbols without going through a small hit is called a symbol jackpot. The symbol jackpots include a symbol 15R time-saving jackpot and a symbol 4R time-saving jackpot that occur directly based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

In this way, a jackpot occurs due to a symbol jackpot that occurs directly based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and a V prize via a small hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol. This includes small wins and jackpots. Each of the symbol jackpot and the jackpot via small hit is a jackpot that is controlled to a time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game state, and is named a time-saving jackpot. The advantageous state advantageous for the player in this embodiment includes opening of the special variable winning ball device 7.

The symbol 15R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the jackpot is opened 15 times (15R). The symbol 4R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the big prize opening is opened four times (4R). For the 16 (15) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big winning opening is opened 15 times (15R) with the condition of winning a V prize. This is a jackpot, and the winning device opens for 16 rounds, but the actual number of openings of the jackpot is 15 times, and the player can win the same jackpot as the symbol 15R time-saving jackpot when opening the jackpot. I feel like it's a type. Via small hit 9 (8) R Time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big winning opening is opened 8 times (8R) with the condition of V winning. It is. Via small hit 5 (4) R Time-saving jackpot: After the V judgment winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big winning opening is opened 4 times (4R) with the condition of winning a V prize. This is a jackpot, and the winning device opens for 5 rounds, but the actual number of openings of the jackpot is 4 times, and the player can win the same jackpot as the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot when opening the jackpot. I feel like it's a type.

Symbol 4R Time Saving The time saving state after the jackpot has two conditions: the second special symbol is displayed 1 time, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed 5 times. Two end states are set: The number of times of the time-saving ending condition that the second special symbol is displayed fluctuating once is determined by taking into account that the game balls that enter the V judgment winning device 87 enter the V winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. is set. In the variable display of the second special symbol, small hits occur at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the ending condition that the number of times the second special symbol is displayed fluctuating once is that when the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is executed, there is a probability of generating a jackpot via a small hit at a rate of about 1/7. It is assumed that there is a certain number of times.

The number of times of the time-saving ending condition that the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol is one time is set for the following reason. In the case of symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, basically the time-saving state (including electric support state) continues until the variable display of the second special symbol is completed once, but in order to display the second special symbol in a variable manner, It is necessary to hit the game ball to the right and enter the passage gate 41 to open the variable winning ball device 6B, and in that state, to make the game ball enter the variable winning ball device 6B, such a variable winning ball device It takes time to place the game ball in 6B, and the first special symbol that has been stored on hold may be displayed in a variable manner first.

Therefore, the end condition that the total number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed fluctuating is 5 times is that the jackpot can be achieved immediately after the start of the time saving state and before the condition for starting the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is satisfied. 1 of the 2nd special symbols that are likely to be determined as a jackpot advantageous to the player even if the variable display of the 1st special symbol is started due to the reserved memory based on the 1st starting winning that can be memorized at most 4 before the game state This is a condition for making it possible to reliably display batch fluctuations. By doing this, the fluctuating display of the first special symbol based on the reserved memory based on the first starting winning starts immediately after the start of the time saving state, which makes it easier to determine a jackpot that is advantageous for the player in the time saving state. It is possible to prevent the variable display of the second special symbol from not being performed.

After a jackpot other than the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, the end condition is that the second special symbol is displayed 7 times, and the total number of times that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed is 11. Two end states are set: The number of times of seven times as the end condition of the time saving state is set considering that the game balls entering the V judgment winning device 87 enter the V winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. In the variable display of the second special symbol, small hits occur at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition that the number of variable displays of the second special symbol is 7 times is that when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, there is a possibility that a jackpot via a small hit will occur compared to the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot. This is the number of times that the number of cases becomes significantly higher. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the occurrence of a jackpot via a small win, and it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the occurrence of a jackpot via a small win.

In addition, the end condition that the total number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 11 is such that the jackpot occurs immediately after the start of the time saving state and before the variable display start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied. Even if the variable display of the first special symbol starts due to the reserved memory based on the first starting winning that can be memorized at most 4 before the game state, the second special symbol 7 is likely to be determined as a jackpot that is advantageous to the player. This is to ensure that the display of changes in the number of times of changes can be executed reliably. By doing this, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the reserved memory based on the first starting winning starts immediately after the start of the time saving state, which makes it easier to determine a jackpot that is advantageous for the player in the time saving state. It is possible to prevent the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol from decreasing.

In this embodiment, in the low base state which is the normal state, the first starting prize opening is provided so that winnings can be won from the first route, so if the game ball flows down the first route, it will be easier to win from the second route. This is more advantageous for the player in terms of starting winnings than when the game ball flows down the path. On the other hand, in an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state, the special variable winning ball device 7 that is opened is provided so that a prize can be won from the second route, so the game ball flowing down the second route is better than the first route. This is more advantageous for the player in terms of winning a jackpot than if the game ball were to fall. In addition, in a specific state such as a small winning game state, the V judgment winning device 87 that is opened is provided so that a prize can be won from the second route, so that the game ball flowing down the second route is better than the first route. This is more advantageous for the player in terms of the occurrence of a jackpot than when the game ball flows down.

In addition, the comparison is not limited to such advantages, and for example, other winning openings (for example, another variable winning opening (which may be for starting winnings or non-starting winnings)) are compared to the first route. and the second route, and in the low base state which is the normal state, the first route is easier to win the variable winning hole than the second route, and in the high base state, jackpot game state, and small In other states such as a winning game state, it is easier to win the variable winning slot on the second route than on the first route. A configuration may be adopted in which it is advantageous for the player if the game medium flows down, and in other gaming states, it is advantageous for the player if the game medium flows down the second path.

FIG. 11-3 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. In FIG. 11-3, the type of random number, update range, purpose, and addition condition are shown. Each random number is used as follows.

(1) Random R: This is a random counter for determining whether or not to win a jackpot and whether or not to win a small hit. Random 1 is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, added and updated from 0 to 65535 which is the upper limit, and then added and updated again from 0. (2) Random 1: Jackpot type (type, symbol 15R time-saving jackpot, symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, via small hit 16 (15) R time-saving jackpot, via small hit 9 (8) R time-saving jackpot, and via small hit 5 (4) Determine (any type of R time-saving jackpot) and jackpot symbol (for jackpot type determination, jackpot symbol determination). (3) Random 2: Determine the type (type) of the fluctuation pattern (for determining the type of fluctuation pattern). (4) Random 3: Determine a variation pattern (variation time) (for variation pattern determination). (5) Random 4: Determine whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination). (6) Random 5: Determine the initial value of Random 5 (for determining the initial value of Random 5).

In this embodiment, the jackpots in the specific gaming state include symbol 15R time-saving jackpot, symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, 16 (15) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, 9 (8) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, and small hit. It includes multiple types of via 5(4)R time-saving jackpots. Therefore, when a jackpot is determined based on the value of the random number for determining a hit (random R), or when a determination is made as a small hit, based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (random 1). Then, the type of jackpot is determined to be one of these jackpot types. However, in the case of a jackpot via a small hit, if a V-win does not occur, the determined jackpot will be invalidated. Furthermore, when the jackpot type is determined, the jackpot symbol is also determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 1). Therefore, Random 1 is also a random number for determining the jackpot symbol. Furthermore, when the type of small win is determined, the small win symbol is determined at the same time. Therefore, Random 1 is also a random number for determining small winning symbols.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern is determined by first determining the fluctuation pattern type using a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type (Random 2), and using the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (Random 3), This fluctuation pattern is determined. In this manner, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process. The variation pattern type is a grouping of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of their variation modes. One or more variation patterns belong to the variation pattern type.

In this embodiment, the variation patterns are classified into a normal variation pattern type that is a variation pattern type that does not involve a reach, and a reach variation pattern type that is a variation pattern type that involves a reach.

FIG. 11-4 is an explanatory diagram showing the first special figure hit determination table, the second special figure hit determination table, and various jackpot type determination tables. These tables are stored in the ROM 101.

FIG. 11-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing the first special symbol hit determination table. The first special symbol hit determination table is a data table for determining a jackpot for the first special symbol, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The "probability" shown in FIG. 11-4(A) indicates the probability (proportion) of hitting the jackpot.

The jackpot probability of the first special symbol differs depending on the set value. Setting 1 is 1/199, setting 2 is 1/190, setting 3 is 1/180, setting 4 is 1/170, setting 5 is 1/160, and setting 6 is 1/150. Therefore, the jackpot probability is high in the order of setting 1 < setting 2 < setting 3 < setting 4 < setting 5 < setting 6.

FIG. 11-4(B) is an explanatory diagram showing the second special figure hit determination table. The second special symbol hit determination table is a data table for determining a jackpot and a small hit for the second special symbol, and a jackpot determination value and a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R are set. This is the table where The upper part in FIG. 11-4(B) is the jackpot determination table part, and the lower part in FIG. 11-4(B) is the small hit determination table part. The "probability" shown in the upper part of Figure 11-4 (B) indicates the probability (proportion) of hitting a jackpot.The "probability" shown in the lower part of Figure 11-4 (B) indicates the probability (proportion) of winning a small hit. .

The jackpot probability of the second special symbol differs depending on the set value. Setting 1 is 1/199, setting 2 is 1/190, setting 3 is 1/180, setting 4 is 1/170, setting 5 is 1/160, and setting 6 is 1/150. Therefore, the jackpot probability is high in the order of setting 1 < setting 2 < setting 3 < setting 4 < setting 5 < setting 6. On the other hand, the small hit probability of the second special symbol is set to 1/7.35 regardless of the setting value. Note that a small win may be provided in the first special symbol. In such a case, it is desirable that the probability of winning a small hit is lower for the first special symbol than for the second special symbol. For example, the small hit probability due to the first special symbol may be set to 1/100.

When the CPU 103 detects a starting prize in the first starting winning hole (first starting winning) or a starting winning in the second starting winning hole (second starting winning), the CPU 103 activates the random number circuit 124 at a predetermined timing. Extract the count value (random R). For the first starting prize, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot determination value set in the first special symbol hit determination table, and if the extracted value matches any of the jackpot determination values, a jackpot is awarded for the first special symbol. decided on. Regarding the second starting prize, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot determination value set in the second special symbol hit determination table, and if the extracted value matches any of the jackpot determination values, a jackpot is awarded for the second special symbol. decided on. Then, when the extracted value does not match any of the jackpot judgment values, the extracted value is compared with the small hit judgment value set in the second special figure hit judgment table, and the extracted value is matched with any of the small hit judgment values. If they match, it is determined that the second special symbol will be a small hit. Deciding to make a small win also means making a tentative decision to make a jackpot via a small win (described as a tentative decision because it will not be controlled by a jackpot unless a V win occurs during a small win). .

In addition, deciding whether to make a jackpot means deciding whether to shift to a jackpot gaming state, but if the stop symbol by the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changed to a jackpot symbol. It also means deciding whether or not to do so. Also, deciding whether to make a small hit means deciding whether to shift to a small winning gaming state or not, but whether to make the stop symbol by the fluctuating display of the second special symbol a small winning symbol or not. It also means deciding whether or not to do so.

FIGS. 11-4 (C), (D), and (E) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. 11-4(C) is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type of a symbol jackpot when a jackpot is determined based on the first special symbol. FIG. 11-4(D) is a second special symbol jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type of a symbol jackpot when a jackpot is determined by the second special symbol.

The first special figure jackpot type determination table in FIG. 11-4(C) contains numerical values to be compared with the value of Random 2 for jackpot type determination, including "Symbol 15R time-saving jackpot" and "Symbol 4R time-saving jackpot". A jackpot judgment value corresponding to each of these is set. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 11-4(D), a jackpot determination value corresponding to "symbol 15R time-saving jackpot", which is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1, is set.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-4 (C) and (D), the jackpot type judgment value is also used as a judgment value (jackpot pattern judgment value) for determining the jackpot symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It will be done. For example, the determination value corresponding to "8R time-saving jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot symbol "3". The determination value corresponding to the "15R time-saving jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot symbol "7".

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines, as the jackpot type, the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of Random 1 matches, and determines, as the jackpot symbol, the type that corresponds to the jackpot type judgment value with which the value of Random 1 matches. Determine the jackpot symbol. Thereby, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

The jackpot type determination table via small hit in Figure 11-4(E) contains numerical values to be compared with the value of Random 2 for jackpot type determination, including "16 (15) R time-saving jackpot via small hit" and " Jackpot determination values corresponding to each of "9(8)R time-saving jackpot via small hit" and "5(4)R time-saving jackpot via small hit" are set. However, the jackpot types determined by the jackpot type determination table via small hit are the 1st small hit (16 (15) R time-saving jackpot), the 2nd small hit (9 (8) R time-saving jackpot) This is a provisional jackpot type linked to each of the 3rd small win (5(4)R time-saving jackpot), and is invalidated if a V win does not occur in the small win gaming state.

FIGS. 11-5 and 11-6 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the production control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100. In FIGS. 11-5 and 11-6, the relationship between specific command data for the production control command, the name of the command, and the specified contents of the command is shown. In the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-6, various performance control commands are transmitted to the performance control CPU 120 depending on the game control state.

The main commands in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-6 will be explained. Command 80XX(H) is a production control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variation display of the special symbol (each corresponds to variation pattern XX). When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of variation patterns, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number. Moreover, the production control command that specifies the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, upon receiving the command 80XX(H), the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance display device to start a performance corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol.

Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H) are display result designation commands that indicate display results including loss display results, jackpot display results for each jackpot type, small win type, and small win display results.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating to start varying display of the first special symbol. Command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the second special symbol. Command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation designation command that designates ending the variation of the first and second special symbols.

Commands A001 to A005 (H) are win start designation commands that designate the start of a jackpot gaming state for each type of jackpot.

The command A1XX(H) is a command for specifying the opening of the big winning hole, which indicates that the big winning hole is being opened for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX(H) is a designation command after the opening of the big winning hole which indicates the opening (closure) of the big winning hole of the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

Commands A301 to A305 (H) are win end designation commands that designate the end of the jackpot gaming state for each type of jackpot.

Command A401 (H) is a first starting winning designation command that specifies that there is a first starting winning. Command A402 (H) is a second starting winning designation command that specifies that there is a second starting winning.

Command B000 (H) is a normal state designation command that designates that the gaming state is the normal state (low base state). Command B001 (H) is a first time saving state designation command that specifies that the gaming state is the first time saving state (high base state). Command B002 (H) is a second time saving state designation command that specifies that the gaming state is the second time saving state (high base state).

Command C0XX(H) is a first pending storage number designation command that specifies the first pending storage number. "XX" in command C0XX(H) indicates the first pending storage number. Command C1XX(H) is a second pending storage number designation command that specifies the second pending storage number. "XX" in command C0XX(H) indicates the second pending storage number.

In addition, in this embodiment, when subtracting the number of pending memories, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a pending memory number designation command that specifies the number of pending memories after subtraction; however, the present invention is not limited to this. For each of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories, a pending storage number subtraction designation command may be used to specify that the number of pending memories is to be subtracted by one.

Command C2XX (H) and command C3XX (H) display the contents of the winning determination results such as jackpot determination, jackpot type determination, fluctuation pattern type determination, etc. at the time of starting winning into the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole. This is the production control command shown. Among these, the command C2XX(H) is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not it will be a jackpot, whether or not it will be a small hit, and the type of jackpot among the winning determination results. In addition, the command C3XX (H) is a variation type command that indicates the judgment result (variation pattern type judgment result) in which judgment value range the value of the random number for variation pattern type judgment falls within among the winning judgment results. It is.

Command C401 (H) is a command that specifies to start the first small winning. Command C402 (H) is a command that specifies to start the second small win. Command C403 (H) is a command that specifies to start the third small win. Command C501 (H) is a command that specifies to start the first small winning. Command C502 (H) is a command that specifies to start the second small win. Command C503 (H) is a command that specifies to start the third small win. Command C601 (H) is a V winning designation command that designates that there is a V winning. Command C602 (H) is a V winning ball detection designation command that specifies that a winning ball (including both a V winning ball and a winning ball other than the V winning ball) has been detected entering the V judgment winning device 87.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the RAM 102 is provided with a first reservation storage buffer for storing reservation storage information of the first special symbol. A storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the first pending storage number is secured in the first pending storage buffer. The first pending storage buffer contains a random number for determining a jackpot (Random R) which is a hardware random number, a random number for determining a jackpot type (Random 1) which is a software random number, a random number for determining a variation pattern type (Random 2), and a random number for determining a jackpot type (Random 1) which is a software random number. , a random number for determining a variation pattern (random 3) is stored.

Regarding the second special symbol, the RAM 102 is provided with a second pending storage buffer for storing pending storage information of the second special symbol. A storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the second pending storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second pending storage buffer. The second pending storage buffer contains a random number for determining a jackpot (Random R) which is a hardware random number, a random number for determining a jackpot type (Random 1) which is a software random number, a random number for determining a variation pattern type (Random 2), and a random number for determining a jackpot type (Random 1) which is a software random number. , a random number for determining a variation pattern (random 3) is stored.

Based on the winning in the first starting winning opening, the CPU 103 extracts random numbers from each of the random number circuit 124 and the random counter for generating software random numbers, and saves them in a storage area in the first holding storage buffer. Execute the process to (storage). Specifically, these random numerical values are extracted and saved (stored) in the first holding storage buffer based on the winning in the first starting winning opening. In addition, based on the winning in the second starting winning opening, the CPU 103 extracts random numbers from each of the random number circuit 124 and the random counter for generating software random numbers, and stores them in the storage area in the second holding storage buffer. Execute the process to save (storage) to. Specifically, these random numbers are extracted and saved (stored) in the second holding storage buffer based on the winning in the second starting winning opening.

Storing information regarding the starting winnings in the pending storage buffer in this manner may be referred to as "being stored pending storage." In addition, the random number for determining the type of fluctuation pattern (Random 2) and the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (Random 3) are not extracted at the time of starting winning and stored in the reservation memory buffer in advance, but are extracted at the time when the fluctuation of the special symbol starts. It may be extracted.

FIG. 11-7 is a flowchart showing the starting port switch passing process executed as part of the process in S101. In the starting port switch passage process, the CPU 103 first checks whether the first starting port switch 22A is in the on state (S1211). If the first starting port switch 22A is not in the on state, the process moves to S1221. If the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether the number of first pending memories has reached the upper limit (specifically, the first pending memory for counting the number of first pending memories). It is confirmed whether the value of the number counter is 4 (S1212). If the first pending storage number has reached the upper limit, the process moves to S1221.

If the first pending memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 103 increases the value of the first pending memory counter by 1 (S1213). Next, the CPU 103 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 124 or a counter for generating software random numbers, and storing them in a storage area in the first reservation storage buffer (S1214). In the process of S1214, a random number for determining a jackpot (Random R), a random number for determining a jackpot type (Random 1), a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern type (Random 2), and a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (Random 3) are extracted, Stored in the storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a winning performance process that determines in advance the variation display result and variation pattern type when the variation based on the detected first special symbol's starting winning is subsequently executed at the starting winning (S1215).

In this embodiment, after a starting prize is generated in the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole, and various data obtained at the time of the starting winning is stored as pending storage information, the start conditions for the variable display are set. If established, at the timing of starting the variable display, in the special symbol normal processing (S110), the variable display result is determined for the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) for which the variable display is to be started based on the relevant pending storage information. The determination as to whether or not to be displayed as a jackpot display result and the jackpot type are determined based on the jackpot determination value and the jackpot type determination value set corresponding to the various random numbers described above. Then, in the fluctuation pattern setting process (S111), the fluctuation pattern (including the determination of the fluctuation pattern type) is determined based on the fluctuation pattern type determination value and the fluctuation pattern determination value set corresponding to the various random values described above. Based on.

On the other hand, apart from such a determination, the timing before the variable display starts based on the starting winnings in the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole, specifically, the timing when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole. Or, at the timing when a starting prize is won in the second starting prize opening (the timing at which the pending memory information is stored), the pending memory information that stores various data obtained at the time of the starting prize is pre-read, and based on the pre-read pending memory information. In this way, the determination of whether or not it will be a jackpot, the determination of whether or not it will be a small hit, the type of jackpot, and the type of fluctuation pattern are performed in advance by a jackpot set corresponding to the various random numbers described above. A winning presentation process is executed to pre-read and determine based on the determination value, the jackpot type determination value, and the fluctuation pattern type determination value. By doing so, the performance control CPU 120 predicts the fluctuating display result in advance before the fluctuating display of the performance symbols is executed, and based on the various determination results at the start winning time, the fluctuating display of the performance symbols It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect such as a look-ahead notice that foretells that there will be a jackpot (possibility of a jackpot).

Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the determination result of the winning performance process (S1216), and performs control to transmit a variation type command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1216). S1217). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first starting prize designation command to the production control CPU 120 (S1218), and sets the value of the first pending memory number counter to EXT data to send the first pending memory number designation command. Control is performed to transmit to the performance control CPU 120 (S1219).

By executing the processes of S1216 and S1217, in this embodiment, the first Every time a starting prize is entered in the starting winning hole, both the symbol designation command and the variation type command are surely transmitted to the performance control CPU 120.

In addition, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of S1216 to S1219, when a starting prize is generated in the first starting winning hole, the symbol designation command, the variation type command, the first starting winning designation command, and the A set of four commands, including the first pending storage number designation command, is transmitted all at once within one timer interrupt.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the second starting port switch 22B is in the on state (S1221). If the second starting port switch 22B is not in the on state, the process ends. If the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the number of second pending memories has reached the upper limit (specifically, the second pending memory for counting the number of second pending memories). It is checked whether the value of the number counter is 4 (S1222). If the second pending storage number has reached the upper limit, the process is immediately terminated.

If the second pending memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 103 increases the value of the second pending memory counter by 1 (S1223). Next, the CPU 103 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 124 or a counter for generating software random numbers, and storing them in a storage area in the second reservation storage buffer (S1224). In the process of S1224, a random number for determining a jackpot (Random R), a random number for determining a jackpot type (Random 1), a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern type (Random 2), and a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (Random 3) are extracted, Stored in the storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a winning performance process similar to the winning performance process described in S1215 regarding the starting winning of the detected second special symbol (S1225). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the determination result of the winning performance process (S1226), and performs control to transmit a variation type command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1227). ). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the second starting prize designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1228), and sets the value of the second pending memory number counter to EXT data to send the second pending memory number designation command. Control is performed to transmit to the performance control CPU 120 (S1229).

By executing the processes of S1226 and S1227, in this embodiment, the second Every time a starting prize is entered in the starting winning hole, both a symbol designation command and a variation type command are always transmitted to the performance control CPU 120.

In addition, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of S1226 to S1229, when a starting prize to the second starting winning hole occurs, a symbol designation command, a variation type command, a second starting winning designation command, A set of four commands, including the second pending storage number designation command, is transmitted all at once within one timer interrupt.

FIG. 11-8 is a flowchart showing the special symbol normal processing (S110) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 checks whether there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer (S51). If there is no pending storage data in either the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer, the process ends.

If there is no pending storage data in the pending storage buffer in S51, processing for transmitting a customer waiting demonstration designation command (S80) is performed, and then the processing ends. On the other hand, when there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer in S51, the CPU 103 checks whether there is pending storage data in the second pending storage buffer (S52). If there is pending memory data in the second pending memory buffer, the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol) Data indicating "second" is set (S54). On the other hand, if there is no pending storage data in the second pending storage buffer, data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer (S53).

In this embodiment, the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A will be displayed depending on whether data indicating "first" or "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. The variable display of the second special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B are executed using a common processing routine. When the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display device 4A based on the pending memory data stored in the first pending memory buffer. be exposed. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the second special symbol display device 4B based on the pending memory data stored in the second pending memory buffer. will be held.

Through the control of S52 to S54, if even one data of the second pending memory exists in the second pending memory buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol display device 4B based on the data of the second pending memory is This is executed in priority to the variable display of the first special symbol display device 4A based on the data in the first pending memory.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the pending storage number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102, and stores it in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102 (S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = 1 in the first pending storage buffer. is read out and stored in the random number buffer of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = 1 in the second pending storage buffer. Store it in the random number buffer of RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the pending storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first pending storage number counter, and adds the value of each storage area in the first pending storage buffer. Shift content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second pending storage number counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of the storage area in the second pending storage buffer are erased.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores data in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first pending storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each first pending memory number are extracted always matches the order of the first pending memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It looks like this. Additionally, the order in which the random values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each second reserved memory number are extracted always matches the order of the second reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It looks like this.

Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command for specifying the number of reserved memories indicated by the special symbol pointer to the performance control CPU 120 based on the value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after subtraction (S59 ). In this case, if a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first pending storage number designation command. Further, when the value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second pending storage number designation command.

In the special symbol normal processing, first, data indicating "1st" indicating that the processing is to be executed targeting the first starting winning hole, that is, "1st" indicating that the processing is to be executed targeting the first special symbol. , or data indicating "second" indicating that the process is executed targeting the second starting prize opening, that is, data indicating "second" indicating executing the process targeting the second special symbol. , is set to the special symbol pointer. Then, in the subsequent processing in the special symbol process processing, processing according to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the same can be used for both the case where the first special symbol is targeted and the case where the second special symbol is targeted.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random R (random number for jackpot determination) from the random number buffer and executes the jackpot determination module (S61). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the jackpot determination random number extracted in S1214 of the starting port switch passing process or S1224 of the starting port switch passing process and stored in the pending storage buffer or the random number buffer, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value or small hit determination value with a random number for jackpot determination, and if they match, executes a process of determining a jackpot or small hit. In other words, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process and a small hit determination process.

In the jackpot determination process, if the first special symbol matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in Figure 11-4 (A), then the second special symbol will match any of the jackpot determination values shown in Figure 11-4 (B). If it matches the judgment value, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it is determined to be a jackpot (Y in S61), the process moves to S71. Determining whether or not to make it a jackpot means deciding whether to move to a jackpot gaming state, but also deciding whether to make the stopped symbol on the special symbol display a jackpot symbol. .

If it is determined in S61 that it is a jackpot (Y in S61), a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot is set (S71).

Next, it is determined whether the special symbol pointer indicates "first" (S72). When the special symbol pointer is "first", the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 11-4(C) is selected (S73) and the process proceeds to S75. On the other hand, if the special symbol pointer does not indicate "first" (indicates "second"), select the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in Figure 11-4 (D) (S74). , proceed to S75.

In S75, using the jackpot type determination table selected in S73 or S74, the jackpot type corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number (random 1) for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area is set as the jackpot type. It is determined (S75), and the process proceeds to S81.

In addition, if the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R) does not match any jackpot determination value in S61 (N in S61), the data set in the special symbol pointer is the data indicating "second". By checking whether or not there is, it is checked whether the jackpot determination target is the variable display of the second special symbol (S76). When the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is not data indicating "second" (it is a variable display of the first special symbol), the process advances to S82, which will be described later. On the other hand, when the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is data indicating "second" (fluctuating display of the second special symbol), the second special symbol in FIG. 11-4 (B) Using the determination table, a small hit determination process is performed by determining whether or not the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R) matches any of the small hit determination values (S77). That is, when the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R) matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIG. 11-4 (B) (Y in S77), it is decided that the second special symbol will be a small hit. do. If it is determined to be a small win (S77Y), a small win flag indicating that it is a small win is set (S78).

After setting the small hit flag, select the small hit via jackpot type determination table in Figure 11-4 (E) (S79), and select the random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type stored in the random number buffer area. The jackpot type corresponding to the value matching is determined as the jackpot type via small hit (S80). Then, the process moves to S81. On the other hand, if the value of the small hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the small hit determination values in S77 (N in S77), the process moves to S82, which will be described later.

In S81, data indicating the type of jackpot determined in S75 or S80 is stored in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (S81), and the process proceeds to S82. For example, when the jackpot type is "symbol 15R time-saving jackpot", "01" is set in the jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is "symbol 4R time-saving jackpot", data indicating the jackpot type "02" is set in the jackpot type buffer. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "16 (15) R time-saving jackpot via small hit", "03" is set in a temporary jackpot type buffer different from the jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. If the jackpot type is a small hit via 9(8)R time-saving jackpot, "04" is set in the temporary jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. If the jackpot type is a small hit via 5(4)R time-saving jackpot, "05" is set in the temporary jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. Among these, the data indicating 16 (15) R time saving jackpot via small hit, 9 (8) R time saving jackpot via small hit, and 5 (4) R time saving jackpot via small hit are V winnings in the small winning gaming state. If this does not occur, the jackpot will not occur and there will be invalid data, which will be provisionally set.

In S82, a stop symbol of the special symbol is set (S78). Specifically, when neither the jackpot flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-", which is a losing symbol, is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. If the small hit flag is set, one of "1", "5", and "9", which is a small winning symbol according to the small winning type selected and determined in S80, is determined as the special symbol stopping symbol. do. If the jackpot flag is set, either "3" or "7", which is a jackpot symbol according to the jackpot type selected and determined in S75, is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S111) (S79).

FIG. 11-9 is a flowchart showing the small win release preprocessing (S118). In the small winning opening preprocessing, the CPU 103 operates the movable part 872 to the open state by controlling the solenoid 22 based on the opening mode of the small winning, and starts the opening operation of the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 ( S411). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a small winning start designation command indicating that a small winning game state is started to the performance control CPU 120 (S412). Next, the CPU 103 sets a V judgment winning number counter as a counting means in order to use the number of winnings in the V winning area 870 in the small winning open state as the condition for ending the open state (S413). Specifically, in S413, the counter value of the V judgment prize winning number counter is set to "10", and settings are made to count down the number of V winning prizes. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit opening process (S119) (S414).

FIG. 11-10 is a flowchart showing the small winning opening process (S119) in the special symbol process process. In the small hit release process, the CPU 103 updates the small hit release control timer by -1 (S430). Next, in S435, which will be described later, it is checked whether the count value of the V judgment winnings counter that counts the number of V winnings is "0" (S431). The V judgment winning balls counter is set to "10" in S413 of FIG. 11-9, and when 10 V winning balls are counted, the counted value becomes "0". When the count value of the V judgment winning prize counter is "0" in S430, the process advances to S441. On the other hand, when the count value of the V judgment prize winning number counter is not "0" in S430, it is checked whether the small hit release control timer has timed out (timer value = 0) (S432).

When the small hit release control timer has timed out in S432, the process advances to S441. On the other hand, when the small hit release control timer has not timed out in S432, the movable part 872 is brought into the open state by controlling the solenoid 22 in accordance with the timed value of the small win release control timer based on the opening mode of the small win. A process for opening and closing the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is performed (S433).

Next, in order to determine whether or not a V winning that occurs when a game ball enters the V winning area 870 which is in an open state inside the V judgment winning device 87 from the V winning opening is detected, It is determined whether the switch 87a is in the on state (S434). When it is in the ON state in S434, it means that a V winning prize is detected, and a V winning flag that is set when a V winning prize is detected is set (S435). Then, processing for transmitting a V winning ball detection designation command is performed (S436). Thereby, the production control CPU 120 can recognize that the V winning balls have been detected, and can recognize the number of V winning balls. Next, the opening/closing member is operated by driving the solenoid to change the V winning hole in the V winning area 870 from the open state to the closed state (S437), and the process proceeds to S439. As a result, when the first game ball that enters the V-judgment winning device 87 wins a V-win, the V-winning opening in the V-winning area 870 is closed, and after that, the game ball that enters the V-judgment winning device 87 All the balls are guided to the winning ball area and detected by the V judgment winning switch 15a.

On the other hand, when it is not in the on state in S434, it is the time when the V winning prize is not detected, and it is determined whether or not the V judgment winning switch 15a is in the on state (S438). If it is in the on state in S438, the process advances to S439, and if it is not in the on state in S438, the process ends.

In S439, the count value of the V judgment winning ball counter, which was set to ``10'' in S413 of FIG. The following processing is performed (S440). Thereby, the performance control CPU 120 can recognize that the V winning ball that has entered the judgment winning device 87 has been detected after the V winning ball has been detected, and the game that has entered the judgment winning device 87 It becomes possible to recognize the number of balls.

When the count value of the V judgment prize winning number counter is "0" in S431, it is the time when the small winning opening end condition is satisfied because the small winning V winning number reaches the upper limit value, and, When the small win release control timer times out in S432, the small win release control is completed and the small win release end condition is satisfied. At these times, the CPU 103 operates the movable part 872 to the closed state by controlling the solenoid 22, and closes the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 (S441). When the count value of the V judgment prize winning number counter becomes "0", even if the V judgment prize winning device 87 is in the middle of opening according to the opening mode of the small winning, the count value of the V judgment winning prize number counter becomes "0". The V judgment winning device 87 is forcibly closed. When the small win release control timer times out, the V judgment winning device 87 is closed in accordance with the end of the small win release control in the small win release mode.

Next, data corresponding to a specific period that is the V winning valid period after the V judgment winning device 87 is closed is set in the V winning valid period timer (S442), and the value of the special symbol process flag is set to the small hit end process (S442). The value is updated to the value corresponding to step S120) (S443), and the process ends. As a result, time measurement for a specific period, which is the V winning valid period after the V judgment winning device 87 is closed, is started. In addition, by setting the specific period that is the V winning prize validity period in this way, even if the game ball passes through the V winning prize area later than the normal time for some reason, the game ball can be detected. Further, since a specific period is set, even if someone attempts to enter the V winning area illegally, only that period will be detected, so fraud can be prevented.

FIG. 11-11 is a flowchart showing the small hit end process (S120) in the special symbol process process. In the small winning post-end processing, the CPU 103 updates the V winning prize validity period timer by -1 (S441), and checks whether the V winning prize validity period timer has timed out (timer value=0) (S442).

If the V winning valid period timer has not timed out in S442, it is determined whether the V winning flag set in S434 or S445 when a V winning is already detected has been set (S443). If the V winning flag is set, the process ends. On the other hand, if the V winning flag is not set, the V winning switch 87a It is determined whether or not it is in the on state (S444). If it is not in the on state in S444, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is in the ON state in S444, it means that a V winning is detected during the V winning valid period, and a V winning flag indicating that a V winning is detected is set (S445). Then, processing for transmitting the V winning prize designation command is performed (S446), and the processing ends. Thereby, the performance control CPU 120 can recognize that a V winning prize has occurred.

When the V prize validity period timer has timed out in S442, a process for transmitting a small winning end designation command is performed (S447). Thereby, the performance control CPU 120 can recognize that the small hit has ended. Next, by changing the state of the solenoid 22, control is performed to open the opening/closing member and return the V winning area 870 (V winning opening) to the open state (S447A). Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the V winning flag is set (S448). If the V winning flag is set in S448, it is determined that it is a jackpot, and the jackpot flag is set (S449).

As mentioned above, in the small winning game state, if you play right-handed in accordance with the right-handed hitting promotion notification described later, you can make the game ball enter the V judgment winning device 87 with approximately 100% probability, and you will receive a V judgment winning prize. Based on the fact that the game ball that enters the device 87 always makes a V win in the V win area 870, the V win flag is set with approximately 100% probability (S435 in FIG. 11-10). A jackpot flag is set and the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

Next, the CPU 103 stores the data indicating the jackpot type via small win stored in the temporary jackpot type buffer in S81 in response to the fact that it is determined that the jackpot is officially won due to the occurrence of the V winning. is formally stored (S450). Then, the time saving flag that was set at that point is once reset (S451).

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start 3 designation command, jackpot start 4 designation command, or jackpot start 5 designation command according to the jackpot type corresponding to the data stored in S450 (S452). Thereby, the performance control CPU 120 can recognize that the jackpot game state has started. Next, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (for example, the time for notifying the occurrence of a jackpot on the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot control timer (S453).

Also, referring to the jackpot opening pattern data stored in the ROM 101, depending on the type of jackpot, the number of openings (for example, 15 times, 8 times, or 4 times), opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and the interval. Open pattern data indicating the opening mode such as time (big winning opening closing time between rounds) is set in a predetermined storage area formed in the RAM 102 (S454). Among such data, data on the number of openings is set in an opening number counter for counting the number of openings. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot release pre-processing (S114) (S455), and the process ends. As a result, when a V winning occurs in the small winning gaming state, the state shifts to the jackpot gaming state.

If the V winning flag is not set in S448, the jackpot game state will not occur, so the data indicating the jackpot type via small win stored in the temporary jackpot type buffer in S81 is erased (S456), and the special symbol process flag is The value is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) (S457), and the process ends. As a result, when a V win does not occur in the small winning gaming state, the state does not shift to the jackpot gaming state.

FIGS. 11-12 are display screen diagrams showing examples of notification effects. As shown in FIG. 11-12(a), during the ending period during a jackpot game, a notification effect is executed to notify that pending information regarding a win (big win or small win) is stored in the pending storage buffer. A suggestion image 152F001 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as a suggestion effect suggesting. The suggestion image 152F001 displayed as a suggestion effect is a V-shaped effect image that suggests that a notification effect of a pending series by displaying a "V" will be executed thereafter.

The notification performance executed after the suggestion performance includes a notification performance according to the first mode and a notification performance according to the second mode. The notification effect according to the first aspect is a effect in which a small white "V" is displayed. Furthermore, the notification effect according to the second aspect is an effect in which a large red "V" is displayed. Also, the number of hits in the pending storage buffer is indicated by the number after "V". For example, "V x 1" indicates that there is one or more hits in the pending storage buffer, "V x 2" indicates that there are two or more hits in the pending storage buffer, and "V x 3" indicates that there are two or more hits in the pending storage buffer. This indicates that there are three or more hits in the pending storage buffer, and "Vx4" indicates that there are four hits in the pending storage buffer. The number after the "V" may indicate that there are more wins in the pending storage buffer than are displayed. For example, in the case of "V×1", there is a possibility that the number of hits may be displayed even if there are 2 to 3 hits instead of 1.

If the notification effect is not executed from the state shown in FIG. 11-12(a), an ending video is played as shown in FIG. 11-12(b). On the other hand, FIG. 11-12(c) shows a case where the notification effect according to the first aspect is executed from the state of FIG. 11-12(a). As shown in FIG. 11-12(c), a first mode image 152F002 with a small white "V" is displayed as the notification effect according to the first mode. In FIG. 11-12(c), "V×1" indicates that there is one or more hits in the pending storage buffer.

FIG. 11-12(d) shows a case where the notification effect according to the second aspect is executed from the state of FIG. 11-12(a). As shown in FIG. 11-12(d), a second mode image 152F003 with a large red "V" is displayed as a notification effect according to the second mode. In FIG. 11-12(d), "V×3" indicates that there are three or more hits in the pending storage buffer.

FIGS. 11-13 are explanatory diagrams showing a notification performance execution/non-execution determination table, a notification performance content determination table, a V mode determination table, a hit suggestion performance execution determination table, and a no hit suggestion performance execution determination table. FIG. 11-13(A) is a notification effect execution/non-execution determination table for determining whether or not to execute the notification effect. As shown in FIG. 11-13(A), whether or not to execute the notification effect is determined at different rates depending on the set value. Specifically, in setting 1, execution of notification effect is determined to be 35%, and execution of notification effect is determined to be 65%, and in setting 2, execution of notification effect is determined to be 40%, execution of notification effect is determined to be 60%, and setting In setting 3, execution of notification effect is determined to be 45% and execution of notification effect is not determined to be 55%, in setting 4, execution of notification effect is determined to be 50%, and execution of notification effect is not determined to be 50%, and in setting 5, execution of notification effect is determined to be 50%. is determined to be 55%, and 45% is determined to not execute the notification effect, and in setting 6, the presence of the notification effect is determined to be 60%, and the value not executed to the notification effect is determined to be 40%. In other words, the percentage of execution determination increases in the order of setting 1 < setting 2 < setting 3 < setting 4 < setting 5 < setting 6.

FIG. 11-13(B) is a diagram showing a notification effect content determination table. The pattern of the notification performance contents to be executed differs depending on the number of wins in the pending storage buffer. Then, the determination ratio of the pattern of the notification effect content differs depending on the set value. First, when the number of wins in the pending storage buffer is 1, "V x 1" is determined as the common notification effect content in settings 1 to 6. When the number of wins is 1, a common effect will be executed regardless of the set value. Further, when the number of wins in the pending storage buffer is 2, a notification effect of "V x 2" or "V x 1" is executed. In the order of setting 1 < setting 2 < setting 3 < setting 4 < setting 5 < setting 6, the notification effect content of "V x 2" is likely to be determined.

Further, when the number of wins in the pending storage buffer is 3, one of the notification effects from among "Vx3", "Vx2", and "Vx1" is executed. In the order of setting 1 < setting 2 < setting 3 < setting 4 < setting 5 < setting 6, the notification effect content of "V x 2" or "V x 3" is more likely to be determined. Further, in each set value, "Vx3" is more easily determined than "Vx2". Also, when the number of wins in the pending storage buffer is 4, one of the notification effects from "V x 4", "V x 3", "V x 2", and "V x 1" will be executed. . In the order of setting 1 < setting 2 < setting 3 < setting 4 < setting 5 < setting 6, the notification effect content of "V x 3" or "V x 4" is more likely to be determined. In addition, when the setting value is low, a high percentage of "V x 1" or "V x 2" is decided, and when the setting value is high, "V x 3" or "V x 4" is decided. The percentage is high.

FIG. 11-13(C) is a diagram showing the V mode determination table. The V mode includes a first mode indicated by a small white V and a second mode indicated by a red large V. At any setting value, the first mode is more likely to be determined than the second mode. Further, the ratio of the second mode being determined increases in the order of setting 1 < setting 2 < setting 3 < setting 4 < setting 5 < setting 6.

FIG. 11-13(D) is a winning suggestion effect execution determination table. If there is a hit in the pending storage buffer, it is determined that the suggestion effect is always executed regardless of the set value. FIG. 11-13(E) is a no time hit suggestion performance execution determination table. If there is no hit in the pending storage buffer, regardless of the set value, execution of the suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 30%, and execution of the suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 70%.

FIG. 11-14 is a flowchart showing the notification effect processing. The notification effect process is included in the process executed in the prefetch notice setting process (S161 in FIG. 7). The performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the current gaming state is at the start of a jackpot (152FS001). Whether or not to execute the notification effect and the content of the notification effect are determined at the timing when the jackpot starts. If it is not the time to start a jackpot (152FS001;N), the process ends. If it is the start of a jackpot (152FS001; Y), check the contents of the pending storage buffer provided in the RAM 122 (152FS002). This makes it possible to check whether information regarding various flags and commands is in the pending storage buffer.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the notification performance completed flag, which is set when the notification performance is executed, is set (152FS003). If the notification effect completed flag is set (152FS003; Y), the process ends. If the notification effect completion flag is not set (152FS003; N), it is determined whether there is a pending memory of a jackpot or a small win (152FS004). If there is a pending memory of a jackpot or small win (152FS004; Y), it is determined whether or not to execute the notification effect according to the set value based on the notification effect execution/non-execution determination table shown in FIG. 11-13(A). 152FS005).

After 152FS005, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the notification performance (152FS006). If it has been determined not to perform the notification effect (152FS006; N), the process moves to 152FS010. If it has been determined that the notification effect will be executed (152FS006; Y), the notification effect completed flag is set (152FS007). Next, the content of the notification performance according to the number of wins and the set value is determined using the notification performance content determination table shown in FIG. 11-13(B) (152FS008). Next, the V mode is determined using the V mode determination table shown in FIG. 11-13(C) (152FS009). Next, it is determined whether or not to execute the suggestion performance based on the winning suggestion performance execution determination table shown in FIG. 11-13(D) (152FS010). Note that in 152FS010, it is determined that the suggestion effect is always executed. Thereafter, the process moves to 152FS011.

If it is determined in 152FS004 that there is no pending memory of a jackpot or small win (152FS004;N), it is determined whether or not to execute a suggestion effect using the hitless suggestion effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 11-13 (E). Decide (152FS012). Thereafter, the process moves to 152FS011. In the process of 1523FS011, various determined performances are set to be executed during the ending of the jackpot (152FS011). Then, the process ends.

[Main configurations and effects obtained by characteristic parts 152F and 153F]
[1] If you perform hold continuous notification on a gaming machine that has a setting function, there is a risk that the execution rate of hold continuous notification will depend on the setting value and it may not be possible to perform the notification effect appropriately because the jackpot probability differs depending on the setting value. be. In the feature section 152F, the performance control CPU 120 executes a notification performance that notifies that the winning series is controlled to be a hit (big hit or small hit) during the ending period of the jackpot game state. Then, in the feature section 152F, as shown in FIG. 11-13(A), when there is a pending memory of a jackpot or a small win, the execution or non-execution of the notification effect is determined at different rates according to the setting values 1 to 6. Ru. Thereby, by changing the execution rate of the notification effect according to the set value, it becomes possible to execute the notification effect according to the situation. In this way, the interest in the game can be improved by suitably performing notification effects in a gaming machine with a setting function.

[2] As shown in FIG. 11-13(A), setting 6 is determined to be executed at a higher rate than setting 1. Specifically, execution of the notification effect is likely to be determined in the order of setting 1 < setting 2 < setting 3 < setting 4 < setting 5 < setting 6. Thereby, by executing the notification effect, the player can expect that the setting will be high, and the interest in the game will increase.

[3] As shown in FIG. 11-13(B), the execution rate of the notification effect indicating that a plurality of wins are stored is higher in setting 6 than in setting 1. Specifically, when multiple wins are stored in the pending storage buffer, notification effects for the same number of wins are executed in the order of setting 1 < setting 2 < setting 3 < setting 4 < setting 5 < setting 6. It is becoming easier to As a result, a notification effect is executed that indicates that a plurality of pieces of pending information of a hit (big hit or small hit) that is determined to be controlled to a jackpot gaming state (including a jackpot via a small win) is stored. Since the setting is high, the player can have high expectations, which increases the interest of the game.

[4] The effect control CPU 120 can execute the suggestion effect using the suggestion image 152F001 shown in FIG. 11-12(a). As shown in FIGS. 11-13(D) and (E), the suggestive effect has a common execution rate for settings 1 to 6. As a result, the suggestion performance is executed at a common rate regardless of the set value, so that the player's expectations for the notification performance can be aroused, and the interest in the game is improved.
[5] If you perform hold continuous notification on a gaming machine that has a setting function, there is a risk that the execution rate of hold continuous notification will depend on the setting value and it may not be possible to perform the notification effect appropriately because the jackpot probability differs depending on the setting value. be. In the feature section 153F, the performance control CPU 120 executes a notification performance that notifies that the winning series is controlled to be a hit (big hit or small hit) during the ending period of the jackpot game state. In the feature section 153F, as shown in FIG. 11-13(C), if there is a pending memory of a jackpot or a small win, the notification performance in one of the V modes is performed at a different rate depending on the setting values 1 to 6. determined to be executed. Thereby, by changing the mode of the notification effect according to the setting value, it becomes possible to estimate the setting value based on the mode of the notification effect. In this way, the interest in the game can be improved by suitably performing notification effects in a gaming machine with a setting function.

[6] As shown in FIG. 11-13(C), it is determined that the notification effect in the large red V mode is executed at a higher rate in setting 6 than in setting 1. Specifically, the V mode of the second mode with large red color is likely to be determined in the order of setting 1 < setting 2 < setting 3 < setting 4 < setting 5 < setting 6. As a result, by executing the notification effect according to the second aspect, the player can expect that the setting will be high, and the interest in the game will increase.

[Other modifications of characteristic parts 1522F and 153F]
[1] After being controlled to the jackpot gaming state for a specific number of times, if the notification effect is not executed while being controlled to the jackpot gaming state for the specific number of times, the high setting (for example, setting 6) The notification effect may be executed at a higher rate than the rate at which the execution of the notification effect is determined in . Specifically, when the notification effect was not executed even though there was a case in which the winning pending information was stored when the jackpot was controlled 10 times, setting 6 determines that the notification effect should be executed. The notification effect may be executed at a rate higher than 60%. If the notification effect is not executed for too long, there is a risk that the interest in the game will decrease; however, by doing this, it is possible to prevent the decrease in the gameplay due to the notification effect not being executed a specific number of times, for example, 10 times, and the notification effect can improve interest. In addition, the specific number of times is not limited to 10 times, but may be any number of times, and only the number of jackpots is counted when there is a hit in the pending memory buffer but the notification effect is not executed, and if there is no hit, then the number of jackpots is counted. The number of jackpots may not be counted. Furthermore, the higher the number of jackpots in which the notification effect is not performed regardless of whether or not there is a hit, the higher the ratio of the determination that the notification effect is to be executed becomes higher.

[2] A plurality of jackpots with different advantages may be provided in the jackpot game state. For example, a 4R jackpot and a 15R jackpot with different numbers of rounds may be provided. During the jackpot game state, if there is a pending memory of 4R jackpot, it is possible to execute the notification effect at a higher rate in setting 6 than in setting 1, and if there is pending memory of 15R jackpot, The notification effect may be executed at a common ratio between setting 1 and setting 6. In other words, if there is a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the advantageous person in the pending memory buffer, it is determined that the higher the setting is, the more likely the notification effect will be executed. The notification effect may be executed at a common rate regardless of the value. In this way, even if a jackpot with a low advantage is subsequently executed, the player can expect a high setting although the advantage is low, and thus the interest in the game can be improved.

[3] When a plurality of wins are stored in the pending storage buffer, notification effects using the large red V mode may be executed at a higher rate than the small white V mode. In this way, when the notification performance in the large red V mode is executed, it is possible to expect that a plurality of pending information that has been determined to be controlled to a jackpot gaming state is stored, The interest in playing games improves.

[4] Regarding the embodiments described above, there is a variable winning means (V winning device) into which gaming media can enter in a predetermined state (small win), and a specific area provided within the variable winning means into which gaming media can enter. (V winning opening), a first state control means (per type) that controls to an advantageous state based on the display result, and a specific area within the variable winning means that controls to a predetermined state (small win) based on the display result. A game machine has been described which is equipped with a second state control means (for two types) which sets the game medium in a state where it can enter, and controls the game medium to an advantageous state based on the game medium entering a specific area in the predetermined state. To summarize, in the embodiment described above, a jackpot is achieved based on a game ball winning a prize (V winning) in a specific winning opening (V winning opening) in a V winning device (so-called accessory) provided in the gaming area. Although we have explained gaming machines that shift to a gaming state (so-called second type gaming machines), gaming machines that shift to a jackpot gaming state based on the variable display results of special symbols or performance symbols (so-called first type gaming machines) May be applied to Even in such a case, the execution rate of the notification effect may increase as the set value increases. Further, the higher the setting value is, the easier it is to perform the notification effect in the second mode. In this way, if it is a type 1 + type 2 type of gaming machine, the high setting can be appealed by notification effect, and if it is a type 2 type of gaming machine, the notification is not based on the jackpot probability due to the setting difference. It becomes possible to easily adjust the performance execution ratio.

[5] In the embodiment described above, the case where the notification effect is executed during the jackpot ending effect period has been described. However, the notification effect may be performed during other periods. For example, it may be executed in a round immediately after the jackpot starts or in a round during a jackpot game. Furthermore, the notification effect may be executed at multiple timings during the jackpot game. For example, the notification effect may be performed during the round and during the ending period. Further, the ratio at which the notification effect is executed among the plurality of timings may be varied depending on the setting value.

[6] In the embodiment described above, the total number of balls acquired during the round may be displayed when the jackpot ends. Then, while the display is being executed, an effect may be executed in which the jackpot appears to end and is revived. Further, a notification effect may be executed when the revival effect is executed.

[7] In the above-described embodiment, the contents of the pending storage buffer are checked at the start of a jackpot, and if the pending winning information is stored, the decision as to whether or not to execute the notification effect is performed by one lottery. I explained the case. However, if there are multiple wins, a lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to perform the notification effect for each win. Further, the ratio of execution/non-execution of the notification effect may vary depending on the number of hits. For example, when there are multiple wins in the pending storage buffer, the execution rate of the notification effect may be higher than when there is only one win. This makes it easier to estimate the set value when the probability of occurrence is low, such as when there are multiple wins in the pending memory buffer, and it is possible to perform notifications that are advantageous to players in such a situation. can. Further, the execution rate of the notification performance may be made to differ depending on the timing at which the hold information in which the win is stored is executed. Specifically, the execution rate of the notification effect when the next variable display executed after the jackpot is a win is higher than the execution rate of the notification effect when the variable display four positions ahead after the jackpot is a win. You may do so.

[8] In the embodiment described above, the case where the execution rate of the notification effect is higher as the setting is higher is explained. However, the execution rate of the notification effect may be set higher as the setting is lower. In this way, even if the setting is low, it is possible to improve the interest of the performance during the jackpot due to the notification performance. Furthermore, even if the setting is low, it can create a sense of expectation for the high setting. Further, the execution rate of the notification effect may be adjusted to be the same between the high setting and the low setting. In this way, the notification performance will be executed at the same rate regardless of whether the setting is high with a high jackpot probability or low setting with a low jackpot probability, making it difficult to guess the current setting value.

[9] In the embodiments described above, the first aspect of the small white color and the second aspect of the large red color were explained as the V aspect. However, there may be more than one type of V aspect, and they may be different in color or shape. Further, there may be a mode in which the information is displayed only with specific setting values. Specifically, there may be a rainbow-colored V mode as a third mode that is displayed only when the setting is 4 or higher (setting 6 may be confirmed, etc.). Further, at a high setting, the second mode may be displayed at a higher rate than the first mode.

[10] In the embodiment described above, a plurality of types of aspects may be provided for the suggestion image. Then, depending on the mode of the suggested image that is executed, it is suggested whether or not an image of V, which is a notification effect, can be acquired (displayed or not), and the number of V, which is the content of a notification effect, that can be obtained. Good too. Specifically, white, blue, and red modes are provided as suggestion images, and the expectation of acquiring V and the expectation of the number of V when acquired increase in the order of white < blue < red. good.

[11] In the embodiment described above, a high setting confirmation pattern may be provided in the V mode, and the high setting confirmation pattern may be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, when a predetermined condition is satisfied that there are four wins in the pending storage buffer at settings 5 and 6, the notification effect may be executed with a 100% probability.

[12] In the embodiment described above, a pattern may be provided in which a specific setting value is denied. Specifically, if the notification effect is not executed even though there are four wins in the pending storage buffer, setting 1 may be denied. In this way, it is possible to draw attention to the period during which the pending winnings will be completed.

[13] In the embodiment described above, the expectation level of the high setting may be higher when the same number of wins as the actual number of wins is reported than when the number of wins is different from the actual number of wins. Specifically, when the number of wins is 3, the expectation is set higher when announcing "V x 3" than when the number of wins is 4 and announcing "V x 3". The degree may be increased.

[14] In the embodiments described above, a case has been described in which the display of the V mode displayed on the screen is different as a change in the mode of the notification effect. However, as a change in the mode of the notification effect, changes such as outputted sound, light emission by a lamp for a game effect, vibration, or air blowout may be performed. Specifically, in the notification effect consisting of the first aspect and the second aspect, the same display is displayed on the screen, but when the notification effect of the second aspect is performed, the notification effect is displayed in a way that only the player who is playing the game can experience. Vibration may also be applied. In this way, only the player who is playing the game can know the suggestion of a high setting, so it is possible to prevent another player who sees the display on the screen from playing the game machine. can. Alternatively, the high setting may be announced by using a sound or a lamp to emphasize the high setting. In this way, it is possible to give a feeling of elation to a player who plays a game on a machine with a high setting suggestion.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 003AK)
Next, feature 003AK will be explained. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature part 003AK is controlled to an advantageous state (a jackpot gaming state or a small winning gaming state that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state by winning a V prize), a hold corresponding to being controlled to the advantageous state occurs. It is possible to execute a notification effect (hold continuous notification) that informs that information is stored (that there is a jackpot in the hold, that there is a consecutive win in the hold), and by executing the notification effect, a specific display ( The specific display means is equipped with a specific display means capable of displaying a display indicating that pending information corresponding to being controlled in an advantageous state is stored, and the specific display means displays a specific display in at least a first mode and the first mode. The second mode is more advantageous to the player than the second mode, and when the specific display of the first mode is being displayed, When a condition for displaying a specific display of an aspect is satisfied, it is possible to execute a change effect that changes the specific display from the first aspect to the second aspect.

In other words, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to 003AK, there is pending information that is controlled to be advantageous by executing the notification effect and displaying a specific display (that there is a jackpot in the pending, that there is a consecutive game in the pending, etc.). The specific display may change to a display mode that is more advantageous in a situation where the following is indicated. Thereby, when the specific display of the first mode is displayed, it is possible for the player to expect the mode to change to a mode with a high degree of advantage, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Hereinafter, the characteristic parts of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with feature 003AK will be explained. For other parts not explained here, the structure of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above and the structure of other characteristic parts may be adopted as appropriate.

First, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the feature 003AK will be explained. FIG. 12-1 is a flowchart showing the operation of the continuous notification process for holding continuous notification of the feature section 003AK in the jackpot game state. The hold continuous notification process is executed within the jackpot production process of step S176 in FIG. In the hold continuous notification process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is the execution timing of the hold continuous notification (step 003AKS001). If it is determined that it is not the timing to execute the hold continuous notification (step 003 AKS001; No), the hold continuous notification setting process is ended.

The execution timing of the continuous notification on hold may be set at any timing from the start to the end of the advantageous state. In this embodiment, a predetermined round (for example, 4th round, etc.) in a jackpot game state is in progress. In step 003 AKS001, it may be determined whether or not it is the start of the fourth round, for example. Note that there may be a plurality of types of execution timing, and one of them may be determined. Moreover, the execution timing and the determination ratio of the execution timing may be made to differ depending on the type of jackpot in the jackpot gaming state being controlled and the type of jackpot in the pending state.

The execution timing of the hold continuous notification may be during the small winning game state in which the game ball can be won in the V judgment winning device 87 as shown in FIG. 11-1. That is, the pending continuous notification may be executed during a small winning game state in which V winning is possible as an advantageous state. In addition, although the advantageous state has not actually started, the interval from when the decorative symbols are aligned in a winning combination until the advantageous state starts, and the variable display that is controlled to be advantageous (for example, the executed pending state) The pending continuous notification may be executed during the variable display of the subject of the continuous notification, etc.). In addition, in order to prevent the frequency of short-term jackpots from becoming excessive, if there is an interval between the winning combination of decorative symbols and the start of an advantageous state, a pending continuous notification may be set during the interval. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the performance from being delayed and the interest from decreasing.

If it is determined that it is the timing to execute the hold continuous notification (step 003 AKS001; Yes), the hold continuous notification flag indicating that the hold continuous notification has been executed and the specific display is being displayed (hold continuous notification in progress) is on. It is determined whether or not (Step 003AKS002). In this embodiment, in response to execution of the continuous notification on hold, a specific display indicating that there is a hit in the hold is continuously displayed until the notification target is hit. Corresponding to the fact that such a specific display is displayed, if the pending continuous notification flag is on (step 003 AKS002; Yes), the pending continuous notification setting process is ended and a new pending continuous notification is executed. do not.

Note that a new hold continuous notification may be executed while the specific display is being displayed. In such a case, a new specific display may be displayed, or the display mode of the specific display may be changed in response to execution of a new continuous notification of suspension.

If the hold continuous notification flag is in the OFF state (step 003 AKS002; No), the hold information that is a hit (small hit or jackpot) with the hold information of the currently stored hold numbers 1 to 3 (second hold information) is displayed. It is determined whether there is one (Step 003AKS003).

The production control CPU 120 produces the information based on, for example, receiving from the main board 11 a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize or a production control command for specifying the judgment result of the pre-reading judgment. It is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (effect control hold information storage area) as control hold information. FIG. 12-2 shows an example of a reservation information storage area for effect control. As shown in Figure 12-2, the "holding number" corresponding to the storage order of the holding information and the "display result" specified from the production control command for specifying the judgment result of the prefetch judgment are associated and put on hold. It is stored as information. The hold information with hold number 0 in FIG. 12-2 is hold information corresponding to the variable display being executed. In addition, each suspension information includes information that allows identification of the "notification target" of the suspension continuous notification, information indicating the "change timing" when executing the change effect described later, and timing to execute the erasure effect described later. Information indicating "erasure timing" is stored in association with the data. Information other than these (for example, fluctuation pattern information, etc.) may be stored in association with each other as pending information. In the performance control hold information storage area, new hold information is stored within the upper limit (4 pieces) each time a new starting prize occurs, and the hold number is stored each time a variable display ends or starts. The hold information of 0 is deleted, and the hold information after hold number 1 is shifted to the next lower hold number and updated.

In FIG. 12-2, the variable display being executed is a small hit, and in the jackpot game state via the small win, the pending continuous notification is executed for the pending information of pending numbers 2 and 3. . Furthermore, execution timings of change effects and erasure effects, which will be described later, are also stored. In addition, the example shown in FIG. 12-2 assumes the winning types as shown in FIG. 11-2 (including the winning types in which a big hit occurs via a small hit).

In the process of step 003AKS003, it is only necessary to refer to the performance control reservation information storage area and determine whether or not the second reservation information of reservation numbers 1 to 3 stores reservation information whose display result is a hit.

In addition, the reservation information storage area for performance control should just be provided with the reservation information corresponding to the 1st special figure and the reservation information corresponding to the 2nd special figure. The production control reservation information storage area shown in FIG. 12-2 corresponds to the second special symbol.

Since the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, after the end of the jackpot game state, in the high base state, the game usually progresses by the variable display of the second special figure. be done. Therefore, in this embodiment, the continuous notification of pending status is executed for the second pending information corresponding to the second special drawing (winning into the second starting prize opening) as the subject of continuous continuous notification of pending status. Therefore, in step 003 AKS003, it is determined whether or not there is a hit in the second pending information. Although it is omitted in the figure, in the case of a jackpot in the normal state, it is assumed that there is no or a small number of second pending information, so in this example, in the high base state (time saving state). In the case of a jackpot, a pending continuous notification is executed in a jackpot gaming state (advantageous state). It should be noted that the continuous notification of suspension may be executed regardless of the gaming state.

In addition, you may make it carry out a pending continuous notification about the 1st pending information corresponding to a 1st special figure (winning to a 1st starting prize opening). For example, in the case of a jackpot in the normal state, continuous notification of pending status may be executed regarding the first pending information. The presentation mode of the continuous notification of suspension in this case may be different from the presentation mode of the continuous notification of suspension regarding the second suspension information.

Up to four pieces of second hold information can be stored, but in this embodiment, hold continuous notification can be executed for second hold information with hold numbers 1 to 3. Therefore, in step 003 AKS003, it is determined whether or not there is a hit in the second hold information of hold numbers 1 to 3, rather than all hold numbers.

For example, in a state where 4 pieces of second hold information are stored and hold number 4 is the only hold information that results in a win, if hold continuous notification is executed for hold number 4, the jackpot gaming state ends. After that, the variable display of the second special symbol will be executed three times before the variable display that becomes the hit that becomes the hold continuous notification is actually executed. If this is the longest variable display time (e.g. 2 minutes) that can be selected in these three variable displays, the longest time after the jackpot game state in which the pending continuous notification is executed until the variable display that becomes a jackpot starts. It takes about 6 minutes, and it takes up to about 8 minutes to reach the jackpot game state. In this way, in order to prevent the process up to the jackpot corresponding to the hold continuous notification from becoming redundant even though the hold continuous notification has been executed, in this embodiment, the hold information for hold number 4 is It is not subject to continuous notification on hold. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the performance from being delayed after the continuous notification of suspension, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Note that it is not limited to excluding the hold information with hold number 4 from being subject to continuous notification of hold; it is also possible to exclude the hold information of hold number 4 from being subject to continuous notification of hold, or to exclude the hold information of hold numbers 3 and 4 from being subject to hold continuous notification. It may be excluded from continuous notification. Furthermore, hold information with hold numbers 2 or lower may be excluded from the hold continuous notification. For example, a variation pattern (variation time) corresponding to each suspension information may be read in advance, and it may be determined which suspension information is to be subject to continuous notification of suspension according to the fluctuation time. For example, hold information may be targeted for hold continuous notification until the total fluctuation time corresponding to the stored hold information falls within a specific range. By doing this, it is possible to secure an opportunity to execute the continuous notification of the hold while preventing the delay in the performance after the continuous notification of the hold according to the variable time corresponding to the stored hold information, and to suitably Hold continuous notification can be executed.

If there is no matching second hold information for the currently stored hold numbers 1 to 3 (step 003 AKS003; No), the hold continuous notification setting process ends. If there is a hit in the second hold information of currently stored hold numbers 1 to 3 (step 003 AKS003; Yes), it is determined whether to execute hold continuous notification (step 003 AKS004).

In step 003AKS004, for example, it is determined (determined) whether or not to execute the hold continuous notification at the rate shown in FIG. 12-3(A). As shown in FIG. 12-3(A), in step 003AKS004, it is determined that the hold continuous notification will be executed at a rate of 30%, and it is determined that the hold continuous notification will not be executed at a rate of 70%. If there are a plurality of pending hits, it is determined whether or not to execute pending continuous notification for each pending pending hit. In addition, the execution determination rate of pending continuous notification may be different depending on the number of pending hits, whether the pending hits are jackpots or small hits, the type of winning (number of rounds, presence or absence of probability variable control or time saving control, etc.). You can also let Further, the execution determination ratio may be any ratio as long as the continuous notification of suspension can be suitably executed.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not it was determined in step 003AKS004 that the hold continuous notification is to be executed (step 003AKS005). If it is determined not to perform the hold continuous notification (step 003 AKS005; No), the hold continuous notification setting process is ended.

If it is determined that the continuous notification on hold is to be executed (step 003AKS005; Yes), the execution timing of the erasure effect is determined (step 003AKS006). In this embodiment, a specific display indicating that there is a hit in the hold is displayed in a predetermined display area on the image display device 5 in response to execution of the hold continuous notification. Then, the specific display is erased in response to execution of the erase effect on the variable display that is the target of the continuous notification of suspension. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-4, the execution timing of the erasing effect is the timing TA before the execution of the ready-to-reach effect in the variable display that is the target of the pending continuous notification, and the timing TB during the execution of the ready-to-reach effect. It is provided.

In step 003AKS006, the execution timing of the erasure effect is determined, for example, at the rate shown in FIG. 12-3(B). As shown in FIG. 12-3(B), in step 003AKS006, timing TA is determined at a rate of 40% and timing TB is determined at a rate of 60% as the execution timing (erasure timing) of the elimination effect. If there are a plurality of targets for execution of continuous notification on hold, the erasing timing is determined for each hit within the hold. In addition, the determination ratio of the erasure timing is different depending on the number of pending hits, whether the pending wins are jackpots or small hits, the type of winnings (number of rounds, presence or absence of probability variable control or time saving control, etc.). Good too. Further, the determined ratio may be any ratio as long as the erasing effect can be suitably executed. Note that in this embodiment, the ratio of timing TB, which is a later timing than timing TA, being determined is high. By doing this, even if the elimination effect is not executed at timing TA, the player's anticipation can be maintained until timing TB.

As described above, in this embodiment, the erasing effect is executed in the variable display that is the target of the continuous notification of suspension, and a plurality of execution timings of the erasing effect are provided in the variable display. Thereby, the variable display of the execution target of the suspension continuous notification is made clear by the erasure performance, and by providing a plurality of execution timings of the deletion performance, the variations of the performance are diversified, and the interest of the game is improved.

Note that the execution timing of the erasing effect is not limited to the timings TA and TB in FIG. 12-4, but may be any timing until a hit becomes the execution target of the continuous notification of suspension. Further, the execution timing is not limited to two types, but may be three or more types, or may be executed in a variable display other than the execution target of the continuous notification of hold. Furthermore, the execution timing of the erasing effect may be constant. Furthermore, at the execution timing of the erasing effect, an effect may be executed to incite whether or not the erasing effect is executed. Then, the rate at which the erasing effect is executed may vary depending on the effect mode of the inciting effect. By doing so, it is possible to improve the performance effects of the on-hold continuous notification and deletion performance, and the interest is increased.

When there are a plurality of targets for execution of continuous notification on hold, the erasure timing may be set so that the erasure effect is always executed on the variable display with the smallest pending number (the variable display execution order is earliest). If the erasure timing of a specific display cannot be determined due to a malfunction or noise in the control or RAM 122, or if the erasure timing has been determined but cannot be read out, the erasure effect cannot be executed and the erasure is performed after the original timing when it should be erased. There is also a risk that a specific display may continue to be displayed. Therefore, after executing the pending continuous notification and displaying the specific display, the production control CPU 120 receives a production control command (win start designation command, etc.) indicating that it will be the first win after the continuous continuous notification is executed. Based on this, an erasing effect may be executed. For example, if a specific display of the first mode is displayed based on reception of the production control command, an erasing effect is executed to erase the specific display of the first mode, and a specific display of the second mode is executed. If the specific display is displayed, an erasing effect may be executed in which the specific display of the second mode is erased and changed to the specific display of the first mode. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the specific display from continuing to be displayed due to a malfunction, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or distrustful.

After determining the execution timing of the erasing effect in step ASK006, a specific display pattern corresponding to the specific display mode to be displayed in response to execution of the continuous notification on hold is determined (step 003 AKS007).

In this embodiment, a first mode and a second mode indicating that there are a plurality of pending hits are provided as display modes of the specific display. Therefore, the specific display in the second mode is more advantageous to the player than the specific display in the first mode. In this way, by providing the second mode that indicates that there are multiple pending wins, it is possible to notify that there will be multiple wins in one notification, and the player can receive a specific display in the second mode. They will come to expect more things, and the interest of the production will improve.

In this embodiment, specific display patterns include a specific display pattern A that displays a specific display in a first mode, and a specific display pattern B that displays a specific display in a second mode. Further, the pachinko game machine 1 according to the feature section 003AK is provided with a specific display pattern C in which the specific display is displayed in the first mode and then changes to the second mode by executing a change effect. In this way, the specific display may change from the first mode to the second mode, which indicates that there are multiple pending hits and is more advantageous, so the first mode of specific display is displayed. It is possible to make the player expect that the change performance will be executed and change to the second mode when the player is playing the game, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Note that the second mode was a mode that was more advantageous for the player by showing that the number of pending hits was greater than the first mode, but the second mode was more advantageous than the first mode. Any mode with a high degree of degree is sufficient. For example, the second aspect may be an aspect indicating that the winning type of the pending hit is more advantageous than the first aspect. For example, the second aspect may be a mode indicating that the number of rounds in the pending jackpot game state and the number of prize balls that can be obtained are greater than the first aspect, or the second aspect may be a mode that indicates that the number of rounds in the jackpot game state with a pending hit or the number of prize balls that can be acquired is greater than the first aspect, or the second aspect may be a mode that indicates that the game state after the end of the jackpot game state (probability change control It is also possible to adopt a mode that indicates that the presence or absence of the above, the number of shortened working hours, etc.) is advantageous.

In step 003AKS007, a specific display pattern is determined, for example, at the rate shown in FIG. 12-3(C), depending on the number of pending notifications to be executed. As shown in FIG. 12-3 (C), in step 003 AKS007, if there is one hit in the hold that is the target of execution of the continuous notification of hold, the specific display pattern A is determined, and the If there are two or more hits, the specific display pattern B is determined at a rate of 40%, and the specific display pattern C is determined at a rate of 60%. In addition, the number of pending hits including those not subject to continuous continuous notification, whether the pending continuous notification is a jackpot or small hit, the type of win (number of rounds, presence or absence of probability variable control or time-saving control) etc.) The determination ratio of the specific display pattern may be changed depending on the display pattern. Moreover, the determined ratio may be any ratio as long as a specific display can be suitably displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, if there are two or more pending hits to be executed for the continuous notification, the specific display pattern C in which the change effect is executed is determined over the specific display pattern B in which the change effect is not executed. The percentage of people who do so is increasing. By doing this, even if there are two or more pending notifications to be executed, the percentage of display in the first mode will increase, so when the specific display is displayed in the first mode, It is possible to suppress the player's disappointment and increase the sense of expectation that the change production will be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, as the display mode of the specific display, the first mode and the second mode indicating that there are multiple hits in the pending are provided, but as the display mode of the specific display, each of the modes for indicating the number of hits in the pending is Three or more types of display modes may be provided in which the expected value of the number and the degree of advantage of the winning type are different. The display mode may be configured to be changeable from a less advantageous display mode to a more advantageous display mode as the change effect is executed. For example, a first aspect, a second aspect that is more advantageous than the first aspect, and a third aspect that is more advantageous than the second aspect are provided, and the first aspect changes to the second aspect, and A specific display pattern that changes to the third mode or a specific display pattern that changes from the first mode to the third mode may be provided. By doing so, the performance related to the specific display becomes diverse, and the interest of the game during the continuous notification of hold can be improved.

In this embodiment, when executing the continuous notification on hold, it is determined whether to execute the change effect (or not to use the specific display pattern C) based on the number of hits in the hold that are the targets of the continuous notification on hold. It has become. By doing this, it is determined whether or not to execute the change performance based on the pending information at the time of executing the continuous continuous notification, so there is no need to monitor the pending information after the continuous continuous notification is executed, reducing the processing burden. You can perform changes without increasing the amount.

After determining the specific display pattern in step 003AKS007, it is determined whether or not it has been decided to execute a change effect, that is, whether or not the specific display pattern C has been determined (step 003AKS008).

When it is determined to execute the change effect (step 003AKS008; Yes), the execution timing of the change effect is determined (step 003AKS009). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-5, the execution timing of the change effect is the timing 1-ta immediately after the start of the first variation after the end of the jackpot game state in which the pending notification was executed, and the subsequent timing. 1-tb, a timing 2-ta immediately after the start of the second variation after the execution of the hold continuous notification, and a subsequent timing 2-tb. Note that the timing (time from the start of the fluctuation) for each fluctuation of timing 1-ta and timing 2-ta is the same, and the timing for each fluctuation of timing 1-tb and timing 2-tb is the same, and the first numerical value indicates the number of changes after the end of the jackpot game state. That is, timings 1-ta and 1-tb are the timings ta and tb of the first variation after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and timings 2-ta and 2-tb are the timings of the second variation after the end of the jackpot gaming state. ta, tb.

Note that the execution timings ta and tb of the change effect in the first variable display are earlier than the timings TA and TB, which are the execution timings of the erasure effect in the first variable display. By doing so, it is possible to prevent inconsistencies in the effects such as the deletion effect being executed and the specific display being erased before the change effect is executed. In addition, it becomes possible to perform a change effect and then perform a deletion effect in the first variable display, making the effects more diverse and more interesting. Furthermore, by setting the executable timing of the erasure effect in advance after the executable timing of the change effect in this way, it becomes unnecessary to adjust the execution timing of each effect, and an increase in control burden can be prevented.

As shown in Figure 12-5, since the changing effect is executed in one of multiple variable displays, the variations of the effect are diverse, and the specific display changes to a highly expected form at any timing. It is possible to draw attention to the execution of the performance, and the interest is increased.

In step 003AKS009, for example, the execution timing of the change effect is determined at the rate shown in FIG. 12-3(D) according to the first winning hold number. As shown in FIG. 12-3 (D), in step 003AKS009, if the first hit is pending number 1, the execution timing (change timing) of the change performance is after the end of the jackpot game state in which the pending continuous notification was executed. It is determined at a rate of 40% at timing 1-ta of the first variation of , and at a rate of 60% at timing 1-tb. In this way, when the first win is the reservation number 1, the erasing effect is executed in the first variation after the end of the jackpot game state and becomes a win, so the change effect is executed in this variation. In addition, if the first hit is pending number 2, the execution timing (change timing) of the change effect is determined at a rate of 10% at timing 1-ta, and at a rate of 20% at timing 1-tb, It is determined at a rate of 30% at timing 2-ta, and at a rate of 40% at timing 2-tb.

In addition, the determination ratio of the change timing may be varied depending on whether the pending hit is a big hit or a small hit, the type of hit (number of rounds, presence or absence of probability variable control, time saving control, etc.). Moreover, the determined ratio may be any ratio as long as the change effect can be suitably executed. Note that in this embodiment, a higher percentage of the change timings that can be executed are determined later. By doing this, even if the change performance is not executed at the previous change timing, the player's sense of anticipation can be maintained until the subsequent change timing.

Note that the execution timing of the change effect is not limited to the timings 1-ta, 1-tb, 2-ta, and 2-tb in FIG. 12-5, and may be any timing until the erasure effect is executed. good. Furthermore, the execution timing is not limited to two types for each variation, but may be three or more types for each variation, or may be constant. Further, the execution timing of the change effect may be executed at a predetermined variation (for example, the first variation after the jackpot game state). Furthermore, at the execution timing of the change performance, a performance that prompts whether or not the change performance will be executed may be performed. Then, the rate at which the specific display changes may vary depending on the presentation mode of the inciting presentation. By doing so, it is possible to improve the production effect of the continuous notification of suspension and the change production, and the interest is improved.

After executing the process of step 003AKS009, or if it is determined not to execute the change effect (step 003AKS008; No), the image display device 5 etc. executes the continuous notification of the suspension, and as shown in FIG. 12-5, the relevant After execution of the continuous notification on hold, settings are made to display a specific display in the display area of the image display device 5 in the first mode or the second mode according to the determination result in step 003AKS007 (step 003AKS010). Specifically, the performance control data for executing the continuous notification on hold is read out, and the continuous notification on hold is executed based on the performance control data. If specific display pattern A or specific display pattern C is determined in step 003AKS007, the specific display is displayed in the first mode, and if specific display pattern B is determined, the specific display is displayed in the second mode. control to do so. Further, the RAM 122 is provided with a specific display mode storage area that stores information that can specify the display mode of the specific mode being displayed. 2) is stored in the specific display mode storage area.

After that, according to the decision results in steps 003AKS004, 003AKS006, and 003AKS008, the "notification target", "change timing", and "deletion timing" of the pending information in the performance control pending information storage area shown in FIG. 12-2 are updated. (Step 003AKS011). Specifically, information (such as a flag) indicating that the continuous notification of hold is to be executed is stored in the "notification target" of the hold information determined to be executed in step 003AKS004, and the information (flag, etc.) indicating that the continuous notification of hold is to be executed is stored. The "erasure timing" is stored in association with the corresponding suspension information of the notification target, and the "change timing" determined in step 003AKS008 is stored in association with the suspension information corresponding to the change timing.

Specifically, when timing 1-ta or 1-tb is determined in step 003AKS008, ta or tb is stored in association with the "change timing" of the pending information of pending number 1, and timing 2-ta or 1-tb is stored in association with the "change timing" of the pending information of pending number 1. If it is determined to be 2-tb, ta or tb is stored in association with the "change timing" of the hold information of hold number 2. Thereby, by referring to the "change timing" of the hold information with hold number 0 at the start of the change, it is possible to execute a change effect in the change and to specify the change timing.

Next, the hold continuous notification flag indicating that the hold continuous notification is being executed and a specific display is being displayed (hold continuous notification) is set to the on state (step 003AKS012), and the hold continuous notification setting process is ended. do.

In this embodiment, the erasure timing of the specific display and the change timing of the specific display are determined at the execution timing of the continuous notification on hold (Step 003AKS006, Step 003AKS009). The timing of erasing the specific display and the timing of changing the specific display may be determined at any timing from when the specific display is being displayed until it is erased. For example, at the start of a change while a specific display is being displayed, it may be determined whether or not to perform a change effect in the change, and the timing of the change in the case of execution. Further, when the change is a change subject to continuous notification on hold at the start of the change while the specific display is being displayed, the erasure timing may be determined. When determining the erasure timing, if it has been decided to perform a change effect with the variation, the erasure timing may be determined to be later than the change timing. By doing so, it is possible to prevent inconsistencies from occurring regarding the effects (changing effects, erasing effects) related to the specific display.

FIG. 12-6(A) is a flowchart showing the operation of the change effect setting process. The change effect setting process is executed in the variable display start setting process of step S171 in FIG. 7 before the start of the variable display. The change effect setting process is a process for executing a so-called false change effect in a variable display when the specific display is displayed in the first mode and for which it has not been determined that a change effect will be executed.

The fake change performance is a change performance that suggests that the performance mode of a specific display will change, but it is a change performance in which the performance mode of the specific display does not change as a result. By executing such a fake change performance, the frequency of execution of the change performance increases, so that when the specific display of the first mode is displayed, the player expects that the specific display will change to the second mode. The frequency of this can be improved, and the expectations of the players can be effectively aroused.

Note that when a change effect is executed without performing a fake change effect, the display mode of the specific display may always change.

As shown in FIG. 12-6(A), in the change effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first refers to the specific display mode storage area to determine whether the specific display is displayed in the first mode or not. (Step 003AKS021). If the specific display is not displayed in the first mode (step 003 AKS021; No), the change effect setting process is ended.

When the specific display is displayed in the first mode (step 003 AKS021; Yes), by referring to the "change timing" of the hold information of hold number 0 in the hold information storage area for production control, the change in the current variable display is It is determined whether or not the specific display changes by executing the effect (change effect that is not a fake effect) (Step 003AKS022). In step 003AKS022, it is determined whether or not information indicating change timing is stored in the reservation number 0 of the performance control reservation information storage area. If the change effect is executed in the current variable display and the specific display changes (step 003 AKS022; Yes), the change effect setting process is ended because the fake change effect is not executed.

If the specific display does not change in the current variable display (step 003AKS022; No), it is determined whether or not to perform a fake change effect (step 003AKS023). In step 003AKS023, it is determined whether or not to perform the false change effect, for example, at the rate shown in FIG. 12-6(B). As shown in FIG. 12-6(B), in step 003AKS023, it is determined that the false change effect will be executed at a rate of 10%, and it is determined that the false change effect will not be executed at a rate of 90%. In addition, depending on the number of pending hits, whether the pending hits are jackpots or small hits, and the type of win (number of rounds, presence or absence of probability change control or time saving control, etc.), the decision ratio of the false change performance may be different. You can also let Moreover, the determined ratio may be any ratio as long as it is possible to suitably perform the false change effect.

In addition, although it is the first mode, a specific display is displayed and it is certain that the winning will occur soon, so the percentage determined to execute the false change effect is the same as that of the false change effect. It is preferable that the ratio is lower than the percentage determined not to. That is, it is preferable that the frequency of execution of the false change effect is not extremely high. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the interest that has been heightened by the display of the specific display from decreasing due to excessive execution of the false change effect.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not it has been decided to perform the false change effect (step 003AKS024). If it has not been determined to perform the false change effect (step 003 AKS024; No), the change effect setting process is ended.

If it is determined that the false change effect is to be executed (Step 003AKS024; Yes), settings for executing the false change effect are made on the image display device 5, etc. (Step 003AKS025. In Step 003AKS025, the false change effect is executed. Based on the corresponding performance control data, control for executing the false change performance is performed.Then, the change performance setting process is ended.

FIG. 12-7 is a flowchart showing the operation of the erasure effect setting process. The erasure effect process is executed in the variable display effect process of step S172 in FIG. 7 during variable display. The erasing effect process is a process for executing an erasing effect according to the display mode of the specific display at the erasing timing determined in the hold continuous notification setting process of FIG. 12-1.

In the erasure performance process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether it is the execution timing of the deletion performance based on the performance control reservation information storage area and the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation (step 003 AKS031). In step 003AKS031, it is determined whether or not information indicating the erasure timing (information indicating TA, TB) is stored in the pending information with the pending number 0 in the production control pending information storage area, and the information indicating the erasing timing is stored. If so, it is determined whether the elapsed time since the start of the fluctuation has reached the erasure timing. Information indicating the erasing timing is stored in the suspension information of the suspension number 0, and when it is determined that the erasing timing has been reached, it is determined that it is the timing to execute the erasing effect. If it is not the timing to execute the erasing effect (step 003 AKS031; No), the erasing effect processing is ended.

If it is the timing to execute the erasure effect (step 003AKS031; Yes), it is determined whether the specific display is displayed in the first mode by referring to the specific display mode storage area (step 003AKS032).

When the specific display is displayed in the first mode (step 003AKS032; Yes), settings are made in the image display device 5 to execute a first erasing effect as an erasing effect for erasing the specific display (step 003AKS033). In step 003AKS033, control for executing the first erasure effect is performed based on the effect control data corresponding to the first erasure effect. This causes the specific display to be erased.

Thereafter, the pending continuous notification flag is reset to the off state (step 003 AKS034), and the erasure effect processing is ended.

If the specific display is not displayed in the first mode (step 003 AKS032; No), that is, if the specific display is displayed in the second mode, the image display device 5 displays a second erase effect to erase the specific display. Settings are made to execute the erasing effect (step 003AKS035). In step 003AKS035, control for executing the second erasure effect is performed based on the effect control data corresponding to the second erasure effect.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the specific display is displayed in the first mode, the first erasing effect is executed, and when the specific display is displayed in the second mode, the first erasing effect is the effect of the effect mode. A different second erasing effect is executed. For example, the second elimination performance is performed in a situation more advantageous to the player than the first elimination performance, so it may be performed in a flashier manner, more intense manner, or in a manner with a larger amount of production (volume, light amount, etc.) than the first elimination performance. It may also be executed with By doing so, it is possible to execute an erasing performance that matches the degree of advantage for the player, and the performance effect of the erasing performance can be enhanced, thereby improving interest.

In this embodiment, when the second erasing effect is executed, the specific display in the second mode is erased, but the specific display is displayed again in the first mode. Therefore, after executing the process in step 003AKS035, display settings are made to display the specific display in the first mode in the display area of the image display device 5 (step 003AKS036). Thereafter, the erasure effect processing is ended.

Next, an example of the performance operation of the feature section 003AK will be explained. FIG. 12-8 shows an example of performance operation when continuous notification of suspension is executed in the jackpot game state. FIG. 12-8(A) shows the image display device 5 when the display result is a jackpot. On the image display device 5, the words "Jackpot!" are displayed, and the number "777" (small symbol) is displayed in the upper right corner, indicating that the display result is a jackpot.

Thereafter, the first round of the jackpot game state is started. In the jackpot game state, for example, as shown in FIG. 12-8(B), the current round display is displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, the fourth round in the jackpot game state is the execution timing of the pending notification. When it is decided to execute the hold continuous notification, when the rounds in the jackpot gaming state are completed and the fourth round is reached, as shown in Figure 12-8 (C), there is a hit in the hold (the hold continuous notification). A specific display 003AK001 (first specific display 003AK001) in the first mode showing a "V" is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 as a pending continuous notification to notify the user of the pending notification. As shown in FIG. 12-8(D), the first specific display 003AK001 is moved to a display area 003AK002 provided in the lower right portion of the image display device 5, and is displayed in a reduced size. Such display of continuous notification of hold and specific display is executed based on the process of step 003 AKS010 of FIG. 12-1.

The first specific display 003AK001 is continuously displayed in the display area 003AK002 after the execution of the pending continuous notification at least until the variable display that corresponds to the notification target is executed. As a result, it is possible to continuously notify that there is a hit in the hold (consecutive wins in the hold), and the variable display of the notification target becomes easy to understand.

Note that the specific display does not need to be always displayed after the execution of the pending continuous notification until at least the variable display that becomes the hit of the notification target is executed, for example, when a predetermined effect (notice effect or reach effect) is executed. In some cases, it may be made temporarily invisible.

Thereafter, when the jackpot game state ends, for example, as shown in FIG. An ending performance in which "XXXX pt") is displayed is executed, and the jackpot game state ends.

When the jackpot game state ends, as shown in FIG. 12-8(F), variable display of decorative symbols based on the reservation information is started on the image display device 5. FIG. 12-8(F) shows that decorative symbols are variably displayed in each decorative symbol display area indicated by a downward arrow.

If it is decided to execute the change effect at the first variation after the end of the jackpot game state, the first specific display 003AK001 jumps out from the display area 003AK002 and the image is displayed as shown in Figure 12-8 (G). It is enlarged and displayed in the center of the device 5, and the first specific display 003AK001 becomes invisible due to the effect shown in FIG. 12-8(H).

After that, when the effect disappears, as shown in FIG. 12-8(I), the second specific display 003AK003 (second specific Display 003AK003) is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 12-8(G) to (I), a change effect is an effect in which the specific display changes from the first specific display 003AK001 to the second specific display 003AK003. The second specific display 003AK003 is a display mode of a specific display indicating that there are multiple hits in the hold, and is more advantageous than the first specific display 003AK001. In this way, by making it possible to execute a change performance that improves the advantage of the specific display, it is possible to increase the player's expectations when the first specific display 003AK001 is displayed, and improve interest.

In addition, for the changing effects shown in FIGS. 12-8(G) to (I), the effect control pending information storage area is referred to in the variable display effect processing in step S172 of FIG. 7, and the effect control pending information is When the change timing is stored in the storage area, control is performed to execute the change effect at the change timing (timing ta or tb).

Thereafter, the second specific display 003AK003 moves to the display area 003AK002 provided in the lower right portion of the image display device 5, and is displayed in a reduced size, as shown in FIG. 12-8(D).

Note that if the specific display pattern is determined to be specific display pattern B in which the specific display is displayed in the second mode from the beginning, the second specific display 003AK003 is displayed at the stage of FIG. 12-8(C). Continuous notification will be executed.

In addition, if settings are made to execute a false change effect in step 003AKS025 of Figure 12-6, effects similar to those shown in Figures 12-8 (G) and (H) will be executed. After that, an effect is executed in which the first specific display 003AK001 is displayed without changing the specific display.

FIG. 12-9 shows an example of the effect operation when the first erasing effect is executed. In FIG. 12-9(A), the first specific display 003AK001 is displayed in the display area 003AK002 of the image display device 5, and the decorative symbol "7" is stopped in the left and right decorative symbol display areas, and the reach state is reached. It shows that

For example, if it is decided to execute the erasure effect at timing TB (timing during reach) during this fluctuation, the first specific display 003AK001 will be moved from the display area 003AK002 as shown in It pops out and is enlarged and displayed in the center of the image display device 5.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-9(C), the entire image display device 5 is blacked out and becomes unrecognizable, and a first erasing effect is executed in which the first specific display 003AK001 is erased. .

After that, as shown in FIG. 12-9(D), the decorative symbol "7" stops in the decorative symbol display area inside, and the display result becomes a jackpot. In this way, in the variable display that is the target of the continuous notification of suspension, an erasing effect is performed in which the specific display is erased. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that makes it appear as if the player has won a hit (jackpot) by completing the specific display.

FIG. 12-10 shows an example of the effect operation when the second erasing effect is executed. In FIG. 12-10(A), the second specific display 003AK003 is displayed in the display area 003AK002 of the image display device 5, and the decorative pattern "7" is stopped in the left and right decorative pattern display areas, and a reach state is reached. It shows that

For example, if it is decided to execute the erasure effect at the fluctuating timing TB (timing during reach), the second specific display 003AK003 is moved from the display area 003AK002 as shown in FIG. It pops out and is enlarged and displayed in the center of the image display device 5.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-10(C), a second erasing effect is executed in which an effect as if the image display device 5 is torn apart is displayed and the second specific display 003AK003 is erased.

The second elimination performance is executed in a situation more advantageous to the player than the first elimination performance, so it is executed in a flashier manner, more intense manner, and in a manner with a larger amount of production (volume, light intensity, etc.) than the first elimination performance. It is also possible to do so. For example, no sound may be output in the first erasing effect, and sound may be output in the second erasing effect. In addition, in the second elimination performance, the performance accessory moves, whereas in the first elimination performance, the performance accessory may not move, and in the first elimination performance, the amount of movement of the performance accessory may be less than the first erasing effect. By doing so, it is possible to perform different erasure effects depending on the display mode of the specific display. Then, it is possible to execute an erasing performance that matches the player's advantage level, and the performance effect of the erasing performance can be enhanced, thereby improving interest.

After that, as shown in FIG. 12-10(D), the decorative symbol "7" stops in the decorative symbol display area inside, and the display result becomes a jackpot. When the second erasing effect is executed, the second specific display 003AK003 is erased, but the first specific display 003AK001 is displayed in the display area 003AK002. As a result, the second specific display 003AK003 is erased, making it possible to perform an effect that appears to be a jackpot, and by redisplaying the first specific display 003AK001, it is possible to continue to see that there is a hit in the hold. Can be reported.

In addition, after the second erasure effect is executed, without re-displaying the first specific display 003AK001, in the subsequent advantageous state, the pending continuous notification is executed again, and the first specific display is executed according to the execution of the pending continuous notification. Specific display 003AK001 may be displayed. By doing this, if you win while the second specific display 003AK003 is displayed, the pending continuous notification will be executed again, so you can expect the pending continuous notification to loop. become.

Furthermore, after the second erasing effect is executed, the second specific display 003AK003 may remain displayed in the display area 003AK002. In this case, the second specific display 003AK003 may be continuously displayed until the deletion effect for the subject of the pending continuous notification is executed. By doing so, the control burden for changing the specific display can be reduced.

As shown in Figures 12-9 and 12-10, by executing a deletion effect that erases a specific display in the variable display that is the target of the continuous notification on hold, the variable display that is the target of the continuous notification on hold becomes easier to understand. . Furthermore, since the erasing effect is executed when the specific display is erased, it becomes clear that the specific display has been erased, and the discomfort of erasing the specific display can be alleviated. Furthermore, the variable display corresponding to the specific display becomes clear, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for players to understand.

It should be noted that the display mode of the pending continuous notification, the display mode of the specific display, the display mode of the change effect, and the mode of display of the deletion effect shown in FIGS. 12-9 and 12-10 shown in FIG. 12-8 are examples. The specific display may be sufficient as long as it can notify that there is a hit on hold. Furthermore, the change effect may be any effect that indicates that the display mode of the specific display changes, and the erasure effect may be any effect that is executed when the specific display is erased. As long as such a performance is provided, each performance may be any performance performed by a performance device such as the image display device 5, sound, lamp, movement of an accessory, or the like.

For example, when it is possible to execute a pending change effect that changes the display mode of the pending display (or active display) to a highly anticipated mode that is controlled to an advantageous state (big hit/small win) in a time-saving state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In this case, a change performance that changes the specific display and a pending change performance may be started in the same or similar manner, and a performance in which either the specific display or the pending display changes as a result of the performance may be made executable. By doing so, there are cases where the specific display changes and cases where the pending display changes after the same or similar effect is started, so it is possible to perform a surprising effect. When performing such identical or similar effects, it is preferable that the rate at which the pending display changes is higher than the rate at which the specific display changes. By doing so, it is possible to increase the surprise when the specific display changes after being started with the same or similar effect. Note that, on the contrary, the change performance for changing the specific display and the pending change performance may be executed in different manners. Further, the process may be started in the same or similar manner, and may be executed in a different manner. By doing this, the presentation becomes more diverse and more interesting.

Further, for example, in the change effect shown in FIG. 12-8(G), the first specific display 003AK001 jumps out from the display area 003AK002, is enlarged and displayed in the center of the image display device 5, and is displayed in the second specific display 003AK003. However, after the first specific display 003AK001 remained displayed in the display area 003AK002 and a production image was executed in which a production image flew to the display area 003AK002, it changed to the second specific display 003AK003. A change effect that changes (or does not change) may be executed.

Furthermore, the change effect shown in FIG. 12-8 (G) and the erasure effect shown in FIG. A similar effect, enlarged and displayed in the center of the screen, would be executed, and then branch to a change effect or an elimination effect. By doing this, when the first specific display 003AK001 is enlarged and displayed in the center of the image display device 5, a change effect that increases the degree of advantage will be executed, or a winning result will occur due to the change. The player pays attention to whether the notified erasure performance is executed, and the interest in the game is improved. In addition, in the above embodiment, the execution timing of the change performance and the deletion performance were different, but they may be executed at the same timing. By doing this, it becomes difficult to tell whether the performance will branch into a change performance or a deletion performance, and the interest of the performance can be improved.

Note that the introduction part between the change effect and the erasure effect is not limited to executing the same effect, but may be made to be clearly distinguishable, or may be provided with a clearly distinguishable pattern. Further, the performance mode may be changed depending on the execution timing of the change performance or the deletion performance. For example, when executing a change effect or a deletion effect at timings that do not overlap, the effects may be executed in such a manner that it is clear which one will be executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from having unnecessary expectations.

(Modified example of characteristic part 003AK)
This feature section is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further features may be added. Moreover, all of the configurations described in the above embodiments are not essential configurations, and some of them may be missing. Further, this characteristic part and other characteristic parts may be combined as appropriate.

In the above embodiment, only one specific display is displayed, but a plurality of specific displays may be displayed simultaneously. For example, in a case where the degree of advantage of a win type is indicated by the display mode of a specific display, the number of pending wins may be indicated by the number of specific displays.

In the above embodiment, it is determined whether or not to execute the change effect based on the pending information (the number of pending information that becomes a hit) at the time of executing the continuous notification of pending notification (step 003AKS007 in FIG. 12-1). On the other hand, it may be determined whether or not to perform the change performance based on the newly stored suspension information while the suspension notification is executed and the specific display is displayed.

FIG. 12-11 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a change effect setting process in a modified example in which it is determined whether or not to execute a change effect based on newly stored hold information while a specific display is being displayed. . In the change effect setting process shown in FIG. 12-11, the same step numbers are given to the same steps as in the change effect setting process shown in FIG. 12-6, and the description thereof will be omitted. In the variation effect setting process shown in FIG. 12-11 of the modified example, in addition to the process of determining whether or not to perform a fake change effect, it is also determined whether or not to execute a change effect that changes a specific display.

Specifically, processes from step 003AKS041 to step 003AKS043 are added. As shown in FIG. 12-11, if the specific display is displayed in the first mode (step 003 AKS021; Yes) and the specific display does not change with the current variable display (step 003 AKS022; No), the production control Referring to the hold information storage area, it is determined whether or not the number of hits on hold has increased after the hold continuous notification (step 003 AKS042). In step 003 AKS042, for example, the number of pending information at the time of continuous notification of pending notification is stored, and newly stored pending information is identified from the number of fluctuations executed after that, and there is pending information that is a hit among them. Determine whether or not. If the number of hits on hold has not increased after the continuous notification of hold (step 003 AKS041; No), the process moves to step 003 AKS023 and it is determined whether to execute a false change effect or not.

If the number of hits on hold has increased after the hold continuous notification (step 003 AKS041; Yes), a change effect is executed during the current change for the specific display of the first mode during display to change it to the second mode. Settings are made (step 003AKS042). Based on performance control data corresponding to the change performance, control for executing the change performance is performed. Then, the "notification target" of the hold information corresponding to the increased hold hit in the hold information storage area for effect control is updated (step 003AKS043), and the change effect setting process is ended.

In this way, in the modified example, it is possible to execute a change effect based on the hold information stored after the hold continuous notification is executed, so it is possible to flexibly execute the change effect according to the situation of the starting prize after the hold continuous notification. , it is possible to increase the chances of executing change effects.

The processing contents, determination ratios, and methods for determining various effects in the flowcharts shown in the above embodiments and modified examples are merely examples, and the effects similar to those in the above embodiments can be achieved. Any method may be used as long as it can be executed suitably.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 003AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to feature part 003AK is:
A gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to characteristic part 003AK) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state, a small winning gaming state) that is advantageous for the player,
a reservation storage means (for example, a reservation information storage area for performance control) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as reservation information;
When controlled to be in the advantageous state, notification that can execute a notification effect (for example, continuous notification of hold) that notifies that the hold storage means stores hold information corresponding to being controlled to be in the advantageous state. Production execution means (for example, production control CPU 120 that executes the processing of steps 003AKS004 and 003AKS010),
A specific display means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 003 AKS010) capable of displaying a specific display when the notification performance is executed,
The specific display means is
A plurality of types of specific displays including at least a first mode (for example, first specific display 003AK001) and a second mode (for example, second specific display 003AK003) that is more advantageous for the player than the first mode. It can be displayed in any of the following ways,
The specific display of the first aspect can be displayed based on a first condition being satisfied (for example, it is determined as Yes in step 003AKS003), and a second condition different from the first condition is being satisfied. (For example, it is possible to display the specific display of the second aspect based on the fact that there are multiple pending hits in step 003 AKS007, and that it is determined as Yes in step 003 AKS041),
When the specific display of the first mode is displayed and the second condition is satisfied, a change effect (for example, a diagram) that changes the specific display from the first mode to the second mode 12-8(G) to (I)) can be executed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the specific display, and the interest of the game is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The specific display may be continuously displayed until the variable display corresponding to the specific display is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-8 to 12-10).
According to such a configuration, the execution target of the notification effect becomes easy to understand, and the interest of the game is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The specific display may be erased at any one of a plurality of timings in the variable display corresponding to the specific display (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-4).
According to such a configuration, it becomes easy to understand the target of the notification performance, and the variation of the performance becomes rich, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(4) In any of the gaming machines set forth in (1) to (3) above,
It may be provided with an erasure effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the erase effect process shown in FIG. 12-7) that executes a specific display erase effect (for example, an erase effect) when erasing a specific display.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort when erasing a specific display.

(5) In any of the gaming machines set forth in (1) to (4) above,
At least the suspension storage means includes a notification performance limiting means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 003AKS003) that restricts not to execute notification performance for the hold information that is the upper limit number of hold information that can be stored by the hold storage means. You can do it like this.
According to such a configuration, the display period of the specific display becomes longer, so that it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player is given a delay.

(6) In any of the gaming machines set forth in (1) to (5) above,
The second condition is that a plurality of reservation information corresponding to being controlled to the advantageous state are stored in the reservation storage means (for example, there is a plurality of reservation hits in step 003AKS007, Yes in step 003AKS041). (determined to be true).
According to such a configuration, after the notification performance is executed, the game may be controlled to be advantageous multiple times, so that the interest in the game is improved.

(7) In any of the gaming machines set forth in (1) to (6) above,
The specific display means is capable of executing the change performance based on the fact that the second condition is satisfied (for example, there are multiple pending hits in step 003AKS007) when displaying the specific display. You can also do this.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably perform change effects.

(8) In any of the gaming machines set forth in (1) to (6) above,
After displaying the specific display of the first aspect, the specific display means can execute the change effect based on the second condition being satisfied (for example, it is determined as Yes in step 003 AKS041). You can do it like this.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably perform change effects.

(9) In any of the gaming machines set forth in (1) to (8) above,
There may be a plurality of execution timings for the change effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-5).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the timing at which the change effect is executed, and the interest of the game is improved.

(10) In any of the gaming machines set forth in (1) to (9) above,
It is possible to execute a pseudo change effect (for example, a fake change effect) that suggests that the specific display changes from the first mode to the second mode, and does not change in the first mode (for example, the process of step 003AKS025) may be implemented).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to effectively encourage whether or not to change from the first mode to the second mode, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 004AK)
Characteristic portion 003AK includes characteristic portion 004AK.
(1) The gaming machine related to feature part 004AK is:
A gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to characteristic part 004AK (003AK)) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state, a small winning gaming state) that is advantageous for the player,
a reservation storage means (for example, a reservation information storage area for performance control) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as reservation information;
When controlled to be in the advantageous state, notification that can execute a notification effect (for example, continuous notification of hold) that notifies that the hold storage means stores hold information corresponding to being controlled to be in the advantageous state. Production execution means (for example, production control CPU 120 that executes the processing of steps 003AKS004 and 003AKS010),
A specific display means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 003AKS010) that can display a specific display when the notification performance is executed;
In a variable display corresponding to a specific display, erasing effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that executes the erasing effect process shown in FIG. 12-7) capable of executing a specific display erasing effect (e.g., erasing effect) for erasing the specific display. and,
The specific display means displays the specific display in at least a first mode (for example, first specific display 003AK001) and a second mode (for example, second specific display 003AK003) that is more advantageous for the player than the first mode. It can be displayed in any one of multiple display modes including
The erasing effect execution means executes the specific display erasing effect in different execution modes between the specific display of the first mode and the specific display of the second mode (for example, FIGS. 12-9 and 12-10). .
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a specific display erasing performance that matches the degree of advantage for the player, and the performance effect of the specific display erasing performance can be enhanced, thereby improving interest.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The specific display may be continuously displayed until the variable display corresponding to the specific display is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-8 to 12-10).
According to such a configuration, the execution target of the notification effect becomes easy to understand, and the interest of the game is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The specific display may be erased at any one of a plurality of timings in the variable display corresponding to the specific display (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-4).
According to such a configuration, it becomes easy to understand the target of the notification performance, and the variation of the performance becomes rich, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(4) In any of the gaming machines set forth in (1) to (3) above,
At least the suspension storage means includes a notification performance limiting means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 003AKS003) that restricts not to execute notification performance for the hold information that is the upper limit number of hold information that can be stored by the hold storage means. You can do it like this.
According to such a configuration, the display period of the specific display becomes longer, so that it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player is given a delay.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 010AK)
Next, feature 010AK will be explained. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 of characteristic part 010AK is controlled to an advantageous state (a jackpot gaming state or a small winning gaming state that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state by winning a V prize), a hold corresponding to being controlled to the advantageous state is set. It is possible to execute a notification effect (hold continuous notification) that informs that information is stored (that there is a jackpot in the hold, that there is a consecutive win in the hold), and by executing the notification effect, a specific display ( a specific display means capable of displaying a display (indicating that pending information corresponding to being controlled in an advantageous state is stored); and a specific display means for erasing the specific display at a predetermined timing of a variable display corresponding to the specific display. An erasing effect execution means capable of executing a display erasing effect (erase effect). By performing such a deletion effect, it becomes easier to understand the target of the continuous notification of suspension. In addition, since the specific display continues to be displayed until the elimination effect is executed, it is possible to continuously notify that there is a pending jackpot.

Then, in the characteristic section 010AK, if the specific display is not erased at the predetermined timing due to the occurrence of a predetermined event while the specific display is being displayed, the specific display is deleted at a specific timing after the predetermined timing. Special control to erase can be executed. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature part 010AK, if a predetermined event such as a malfunction occurs and the specific display is not erased at a predetermined timing, the specific display is erased at the specific timing, so that the suspension connection is not canceled. It is possible to prevent a specific display from continuing to be displayed and giving the player a sense of distrust even though the control has been made to an advantageous state that is the target of notification. Thereby, continuous notification of hold can be suitably executed.

Below, the characteristic parts of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with feature 010AK will be explained. For other parts not explained here, the structure of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above and the structure of other characteristic parts may be adopted as appropriate.

First, the operation of the pachinko game machine 1 having the feature 010AK will be explained. FIG. 13-1 is a flowchart showing the operation of the continuous notification process of the feature section 010AK for executing the continuous notification of the pending state in the jackpot game state. The hold continuous notification process is executed within the jackpot production process of step S176 in FIG. In the hold continuous notification process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is the execution timing of the hold continuous notification (step 010AKS001). If it is determined that it is not the timing to execute the hold continuous notification (step 010 AKS001; No), the hold continuous notification setting process is ended.

The execution timing of the continuous notification on hold may be set at any timing from the start to the end of the advantageous state. In this embodiment, a predetermined round (for example, 4th round, etc.) in a jackpot game state is in progress. In step 010AKS001, it may be determined whether or not it is the start of the fourth round, for example. Note that there may be a plurality of types of execution timing, and one of them may be determined. Moreover, the execution timing and the determination ratio of the execution timing may be made to differ depending on the type of jackpot in the jackpot gaming state being controlled and the type of jackpot in the pending state.

The execution timing of the hold continuous notification may be during the small winning game state in which the game ball can be won in the V judgment winning device 87 as shown in FIG. 11-1. That is, the pending continuous notification may be executed during a small winning game state in which V winning is possible as an advantageous state. In addition, although the advantageous state has not actually started, the interval from when the decorative symbols are aligned in a winning combination until the advantageous state starts, and the variable display that is controlled to be advantageous (for example, the executed pending state) The pending continuous notification may be executed during the variable display of the subject of the continuous notification, etc.). In addition, in order to prevent the frequency of short-term jackpots from becoming excessive, if there is an interval between the winning combination of decorative symbols and the start of an advantageous state, a pending continuous notification may be set during the interval. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the performance from being delayed and the interest from decreasing.

If it is determined that it is the timing to execute the hold continuous notification (step 010 AKS001; Yes), the hold continuous notification flag indicating that the hold continuous notification has been executed and the specific display is being displayed (hold continuous notification in progress) is in an on state. It is determined whether or not (step 010AKS002). In this embodiment, in response to execution of the continuous notification on hold, a specific display indicating that there is a hit in the hold is continuously displayed until the notification target is hit. Corresponding to the fact that such a specific display is displayed, if the pending continuous notification flag is on (step 010 AKS002; Yes), the pending continuous notification setting process is ended and a new pending continuous notification is executed. do not.

Note that a new hold continuous notification may be executed while the specific display is being displayed. In such a case, a new specific display may be displayed, or the display mode of the specific display may be changed in response to execution of a new continuous notification of suspension.

If the hold continuous notification flag is in the OFF state (step 010 AKS002; No), the hold information that will be a hit (small hit or jackpot) with the hold information (second hold information) of hold numbers 1 to 3 currently stored is It is determined whether there is one (step 010AKS003).

The production control CPU 120 produces the information based on, for example, receiving from the main board 11 a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize or a production control command for specifying the judgment result of the pre-reading judgment. It is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (effect control hold information storage area) as control hold information. FIG. 13-2 shows an example of a reservation information storage area for effect control. As shown in Figure 13-2, the "holding number" corresponding to the storage order of the holding information and the "display result" specified from the production control command for specifying the judgment result of the prefetch judgment are associated and put on hold. It is stored as information. The hold information with hold number 0 in FIG. 13-2 is hold information corresponding to the variable display being executed. Further, each piece of suspension information is stored in association with information that allows identification of the “notification target” of the suspension continuous notification. Information other than these (for example, fluctuation pattern information, etc.) may be stored in association with each other as pending information. In the performance control hold information storage area, new hold information is stored within the upper limit (4 pieces) each time a new starting prize occurs, and the hold number is stored each time a variable display ends or starts. The hold information of 0 is deleted, and the hold information after hold number 1 is shifted to the next lower hold number and updated.

In FIG. 13-2, the variable display being executed is a small hit, and in the jackpot game state via the small win, the pending continuous notification is executed for the pending information of pending numbers 2 and 3. . In addition, the example shown in FIG. 13-2 assumes the winning types as shown in FIG. 11-2 (including the winning types in which a big hit occurs via a small hit).

In the process of step 010AKS003, it is only necessary to refer to the performance control reservation information storage area and determine whether or not the second reservation information of reservation numbers 1 to 3 stores reservation information whose display result is a hit.

In addition, the reservation information storage area for performance control should just be provided with the reservation information corresponding to the 1st special figure and the reservation information corresponding to the 2nd special figure. The performance control reservation information storage area shown in FIG. 13-2 corresponds to the second special symbol.

Since the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, after the end of the jackpot game state, in the high base state, the game usually progresses by the variable display of the second special figure. be done. Therefore, in this embodiment, the continuous notification of pending status is executed for the second pending information corresponding to the second special drawing (winning into the second starting prize opening) as the subject of continuous continuous notification of pending status. Therefore, in step 010AKS003, it is determined whether or not there is a hit in the second pending information. Although it is omitted in the figure, in the case of a jackpot in the normal state, it is assumed that there is no or a small number of second pending information, so in this example, in the high base state (time saving state). In the case of a jackpot, a pending continuous notification is executed in a jackpot gaming state (advantageous state). It should be noted that the continuous notification of suspension may be executed regardless of the gaming state.

Further, the continuous notification of pending status may be executed regarding the first pending information corresponding to the first special drawing (winning into the first starting prize opening). For example, in the case of a jackpot in the normal state, continuous notification of pending status may be executed regarding the first pending information. The presentation mode of the continuous notification of suspension in this case may be different from the presentation mode of the continuous notification of suspension regarding the second suspension information.

Up to four pieces of second hold information can be stored, but in this embodiment, hold continuous notification can be executed for second hold information with hold numbers 1 to 3. Therefore, in step 010AKS003, it is determined whether or not there is a hit in the second hold information of hold numbers 1 to 3, rather than all hold numbers.

For example, in a state where 4 pieces of second hold information are stored and hold number 4 is the only hold information that results in a win, if hold continuous notification is executed for hold number 4, the jackpot gaming state ends. After that, the variable display of the second special symbol will be executed three times before the variable display that becomes the hit that becomes the hold continuous notification is actually executed. If this is the longest variable display time (e.g. 2 minutes) that can be selected in these three variable displays, the longest time after the jackpot game state in which the pending continuous notification is executed until the variable display that becomes a jackpot starts. It takes about 6 minutes, and it takes up to about 8 minutes to reach the jackpot game state. In this way, in order to prevent the process up to the jackpot corresponding to the hold continuous notification from becoming redundant even though the hold continuous notification has been executed, in this embodiment, the hold information for hold number 4 is It is not subject to continuous notification on hold. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the performance from being delayed after the continuous notification of suspension, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Note that it is not limited to excluding the hold information with hold number 4 from being subject to continuous notification of hold; it is also possible to exclude the hold information of hold number 4 from being subject to continuous notification of hold, or to exclude the hold information of hold numbers 3 and 4 from being subject to hold continuous notification. It may be excluded from continuous notification. Furthermore, hold information with hold numbers 2 or lower may be excluded from the hold continuous notification. For example, a variation pattern (variation time) corresponding to each suspension information may be read in advance, and it may be determined which suspension information is to be subject to continuous notification of suspension according to the fluctuation time. For example, hold information may be targeted for hold continuous notification until the total fluctuation time corresponding to the stored hold information falls within a specific range. By doing this, it is possible to secure an opportunity to execute the continuous notification of the hold while preventing the delay in the performance after the continuous notification of the hold according to the variable time corresponding to the stored hold information, and to suitably Hold continuous notification can be executed.

If there is no matching second hold information for the currently stored hold numbers 1 to 3 (step 010 AKS003; No), the hold continuous notification setting process ends. If there is a hit (small hit or jackpot) in the second hold information of currently stored hold numbers 1 to 3 (step 010AKS003; Yes), it is determined whether to execute hold continuous notification ( Step 010AKS004).

In step 010AKS004, for example, it is determined (determined) whether or not to execute the hold continuous notification at the rate shown in FIG. 13-3(A). As shown in FIG. 13-3(A), in step 010AKS004, it is determined that the hold continuous notification will be executed at a rate of 30%, and it is determined that the hold continuous notification will not be executed at a rate of 70%. In addition, the execution determination rate of pending continuous notification may be different depending on the number of pending hits, whether the pending hits are jackpots or small hits, the type of winning (number of rounds, presence or absence of probability variable control or time saving control, etc.). You can also let Further, the execution determination ratio may be any ratio as long as the continuous notification of suspension can be suitably executed.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not it was determined in step 010AKS004 to execute the hold continuous notification (step 010AKS005). If it is determined not to execute the hold continuous notification (step 010AKS005; No), the hold continuous notification setting process is ended.

When it is determined that the hold continuous notification is to be executed (step 010AKS005; Yes), a specific display pattern corresponding to the specific display mode to be displayed in response to the execution of the hold continuous notification is determined (step 010AKS006).

In this embodiment, a first mode and a second mode indicating that there are a plurality of pending hits are provided as display modes of the specific display. Therefore, the specific display in the second mode is more advantageous to the player than the specific display in the first mode. In this way, by providing the second mode that indicates that there are multiple pending wins, it is possible to notify that there will be multiple wins in one notification, and the player can receive a specific display in the second mode. They will come to expect more things, and the interest of the production will improve.

In this embodiment, specific display patterns include a specific display pattern A that displays a specific display in a first mode, and a specific display pattern B that displays a specific display in a second mode.

In step 010KS006, a specific display pattern is determined, for example, at the rate shown in FIG. 13-3(B), depending on the number of pending notifications to be executed. As shown in FIG. 13-3 (B), in step 010AKS006, if there is one hit in the pending execution target of the pending continuous notification, the specific display pattern A is determined. If there are two or more hits, specific display pattern A is determined at a rate of 20%, and specific display pattern B is determined at a rate of 80%. By doing so, when the specific display is displayed in the second mode, it is possible to notify that there are two or more hits on hold. Further, even if there are two or more pending hits, the specific display pattern A may be determined. Therefore, even if the specific display is displayed in the first mode, there may be two or more pending hits, so it is possible to reduce player disappointment when the specific display is displayed in the first mode. .

This determination ratio is just an example, and the number of pending hits including those not subject to pending continuous notification, whether the pending continuous notification target is a jackpot or small hit, the type of win (number of rounds), etc. , the presence or absence of probability variable control, time-saving control, etc.), the determination ratio of the specific display pattern may be varied. That is, the degree of advantage other than the number of hits may be suggested by the display mode of the specific display. Moreover, the determined ratio may be any ratio as long as a specific display can be suitably displayed.

Further, as the display mode of the specific display, another display mode having a different degree of advantage from the first mode and the second mode may be provided, and similarly to the characteristic part 003AK, the first mode may be changed from the second mode. It may also be possible to perform changing effects.

After determining the specific display pattern in step 010AKS006, the image display device 5 or the like executes a continuous notification of pending status, and after executing the continuous continuous notification of pending status, the specific display is changed to the first mode or Settings for displaying in the display area of the image display device 5 in the second mode are performed (step 010AKS007). Specifically, the performance control data for executing the continuous notification on hold is read out, and the continuous notification on hold is executed based on the performance control data. If specific display pattern A is determined in step 010AKS006, the specific display is displayed in the first mode, and if specific display pattern B is determined, control is performed to display the specific display in the second mode. conduct. Further, the RAM 122 is provided with a specific display mode storage area that stores information that can specify the display mode of the specific mode being displayed. 2) is stored in the specific display mode storage area.

Thereafter, in accordance with the determination result in step 010AKS004, the "notification target" of the reservation information in the performance control reservation information storage area shown in FIG. 13-2 is updated (step 010AKS008). Specifically, information (flag, etc.) indicating that the continuous notification on hold is to be executed is stored in the "notification target" of the hold information determined to execute the continuous notification on hold in step 010AKS004.

Next, the hold continuous notification flag indicating that the hold continuous notification has been executed and a specific display is being displayed (hold continuous notification) is set to the ON state (step 010AKS009), and the hold continuous notification setting process is ended. do.

FIG. 13-4 is a timing chart showing the execution timing of the erasing effect of the characteristic part 010AK. As shown in FIG. 13-4, when the pending continuous notification is executed in the jackpot gaming state (jackpot gaming state is ON), a specific display is displayed (specific display is ON).

Thereafter, when the jackpot game state ends, variation (variable display) is executed based on the stored pending information (variation is ON). If the variation is a variation subject to continuous notification on hold, an elimination effect is executed in the variation (variation subject to continuous notification on hold). In this example, as shown in FIG. 13-4, the execution timing (erase timing) of the elimination effect is timing TA immediately after the start of variation, timing TB at the start of normal reach (when the left and right symbols are aligned), and timing TB for the development of super reach. A later timing TC is provided.

In this embodiment, at the start of the change in the pending continuous notification target variation, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution timing of the erasing effect based on the effect control command received from the main board 11. At the start of variation, as shown in Figure 13-4, a background specification command (here, the second time saving state specification command), a variation special figure specification command (here, the second symbol variation specification command), a display result specification command, and a variation pattern are executed. A plurality of production control commands such as specified commands are transmitted. In this embodiment, the execution timing of the erasing effect is determined based on the presence or absence of the effect specified from the variation pattern and the variation time.

In this way, when the command is normally received at the start of the variation and the performance control CPU 120 executes normal processing, one of timings TA, TB, and TC is determined as the execution timing of the erasure performance. However, if the execution timing of the deletion effect is not determined normally due to the occurrence of some event (predetermined event) such as an error on the effect control board 12 side or an error on the effect control board 12 side, the pending continuous notification target There is a possibility that the specific display may remain displayed without performing the erasing effect during the fluctuation.

At the time of such an abnormality (when a predetermined event occurs), the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature section 010AK receives a small winning start designation command (also referred to as a fanfare command), as shown in FIG. 13-4. Based on this, the specific display is erased at timing TD during the jackpot game state of jackpot via small win.

In other words, when the small hit start designation command is received, even though the small hit is subject to pending continuous notification, if the elimination effect is not executed and the specific display remains displayed, the specified display is not executed at the timing TD. Clear the display. By doing so, even if the erasing effect is not executed normally, the specific display can be suitably erased. In addition, even though the player has won a small hit that is subject to a pending continuous notification (a jackpot via a small hit), the specific display has not been erased and the player is misled into thinking that he or she still has the right to win. It can be prevented.

In addition, in the case of a symbol jackpot not via a small hit, the specific display may be erased at the timing TD based on the reception of the jackpot start designation command.

As shown in Figure 13-4, the specific display erasure timing TD (specific timing) when a predetermined event occurs is later than the specific display erasure timing TA to TC (predetermined timing) during normal operation. . By doing so, it is possible to prevent the specific display from being erased at a specific timing even though there is still a predetermined timing at which the erasing effect can be executed, which may cause a sense of discomfort.

FIG. 13-5(A) is a flowchart showing the operation of the erasure effect setting process. The erasure effect setting process is executed in the variable display start setting process of step S171 in FIG. 7 during the variable display. The erasing effect setting process is a process for determining the execution timing of the erasing effect when the variation is to erase a specific display (variation resulting in a win).

In the erasing effect setting process shown in FIG. 13-5(A), the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not the fluctuation pattern designation command has been received from the main board 11 by checking the received command buffer of the RAM 122. Determination is made (step 010AKS021). If the fluctuation pattern designation command has not been received (step 010AKS021; No), the erasure effect setting process is ended.

If the fluctuation pattern designation command has been received (step 010AKS021; Yes), it is determined whether the holding continuous notification flag is on (step 010AKS022). When the pending continuous notification flag is in the off state (step 010AKS022; No), the erasure effect setting process is ended.

If the on-hold continuous notification flag is on (step 010 AKS022; Yes), check whether the current change is subject to continuous notification by checking the hold number 0 in the hold information storage area for production control. (Step 010AKS023). If it is not the notification target of the pending continuous notification (step 010AKS023; No), the erasure effect setting process is ended.

If it is a notification target of continuous notification on hold (step 010AKS023; Yes), the execution timing of the erasure effect is determined based on the fluctuation pattern specified from the received fluctuation pattern designation command (step 010AKS024).

In step 010AKS024, the execution timing of the erasure effect is determined according to the variation pattern, for example, at the rate shown in FIG. 13-5(B). In this embodiment, as a winning fluctuation pattern that is subject to the pending continuous notification, for example, as shown in FIG. There are a variation pattern A in which the winning symbols are aligned after the normal reach, a variation pattern B in which the winning symbols are aligned after the normal reach, and a variation pattern C in which the reach performance of the super reach is executed after the normal reach and the winning symbols are aligned thereafter.

As shown in FIGS. 13-5(B) and (C), the fluctuation pattern A has a short fluctuation time, and is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation ends before reaching the timing TB shown in FIG. 13-4, for example. Therefore, when the variation pattern is variation pattern A, the timing is determined to be 100% timing TA.

Further, the variation pattern B has a medium variation time, and is a variation pattern in which the variation ends after reaching the timing TB and before reaching the timing TC shown in FIG. 13-4, for example. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern B, timing TA is determined 50% of the time, and timing TB is determined 50% of the time.

Further, the variation pattern C has a long variation time, and is a variation pattern in which the variation ends after reaching the timing TC shown in FIG. 13-4, for example. Therefore, when the variation pattern is variation pattern C, timing TA is determined 50% of the time, timing TB is determined 25% of the time, and timing TC is determined 25% of the time.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the execution timing is determined at which the erasing effect can be executed according to the variation pattern. Thereby, the erasing effect can be executed at a suitable execution timing. In addition, the elimination performance will be performed depending on the number of pending hits, whether the pending notification is a jackpot or small hit, the type of win (number of rounds, presence or absence of probability change control, time saving control, etc.), etc. The determination ratio of the execution timing may be made different. Moreover, the determined ratio may be any ratio as long as it can provide a suitable erasing effect.

Subsequently, settings are made to execute the erasure effect at the execution timing determined in step 010AKS024 (step 010AKS025). In step 010AKS025, for example, at the execution timing (timing TA, TB, or TC) determined in step 010AKS024, performance control data for executing the erasure performance is read and performance control based on the performance control data is started. do. Thereafter, the erasure effect setting process is ended.

FIG. 13-6 is a flowchart showing the operation of the erasure effect processing. The erasure effect process is executed in the variable display effect process of step S172 in FIG. 7 during variable display. The erasing effect process is a process for executing an erasing effect according to the display mode of the specific display at the erasing timing of the specific display determined in the erasing effect setting process of FIG. 13-5(A).

In the erasing effect process shown in FIG. 13-6, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether it is the timing to execute the erasing effect based on the determination result of the erasing timing in the erasing effect setting process and the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation. (Step 010AKS031). In step 010AKS031, if the current change is a notification target of pending continuous notification and the erasure timing has been determined in the erasure effect setting process, it is determined whether the erasure timing (timing TA, TB, or TC) has come. judge. If it is not the timing to execute the erasure effect (step 010AKS031; No), the erasure effect processing is ended.

If it is the timing to execute the erasure effect (step 010AKS031; Yes), it is determined whether the specific display is displayed in the first mode by referring to the specific display mode storage area (step 010AKS032).

When the specific display is displayed in the first mode (step 010AKS032; Yes), settings are made in the image display device 5 to execute a first erasing effect as an erasing effect for erasing the specific display (step 010AKS033). In step 010AKS033, control for executing the first erasing effect is performed based on the effect control data corresponding to the first erasing effect. This causes the specific display to be erased.

Thereafter, the pending continuous notification flag is reset to the off state (step 010AKS034).

If the specific display is not displayed in the first mode (step 010 AKS032; No), that is, if the specific display is displayed in the second mode, the image display device 5 displays a second erase effect to erase the specific display. Settings for executing the erasing effect are made (step 010AKS035). In step 010AKS035, control for executing the second erasing effect is performed based on the effect control data corresponding to the second erasing effect.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the specific display is displayed in the first mode, the first erasing effect is executed, and when the specific display is displayed in the second mode, the first erasing effect is the effect of the effect mode. A different second erasing effect is executed. For example, the second elimination performance is performed in a situation more advantageous to the player than the first elimination performance, so it may be performed in a flashier manner, more intense manner, or in a manner with a larger amount of production (volume, light amount, etc.) than the first elimination performance. It may also be executed with By doing so, it is possible to execute an erasing performance that matches the degree of advantage for the player, and the performance effect of the erasing performance can be enhanced, thereby improving interest.

In this way, in this embodiment, the mode of erasure effect is different depending on the display mode of the specific display, but the same erasure effect may be performed regardless of the display mode of the specific display, or the same It may be arranged such that an erasing effect may be executed. Furthermore, the performance mode of the deletion performance may be varied depending on other conditions such as the execution timing of the deletion performance.

In this embodiment, when the second erasing effect is executed, the specific display in the second mode is erased, but the specific display is displayed again in the first mode. Therefore, after executing the process of step 010AKS035, display settings for displaying the specific display in the first mode in the display area of the image display device 5 are performed (step 010AKS036).

After executing the processing in step 010AKS034 or step 010AKS036, the erasure effect completed flag indicating that the erasure effect has been executed in the current variable display is set to the on state (step 010AKS037), and the erase effect setting process is ended. do.

If the erasure timing is normally determined in the erasure effect setting process of Figure 13-5 (A) at the start of the target change of the pending continuous notification, the erasure effect setting process shown in Figure 13-6 is executed. , an erasing effect for erasing the specific display will be executed.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern specification command is missed, if the normal command cannot be received due to noise etc., a processing error occurs in the erasure effect setting process, or the erasure effect cannot be executed for the variation pattern by mistake. If a predetermined event occurs, such as when the erasure timing is determined (for example, when timing TB or TC is determined for fluctuation pattern A), and the erasure timing is not determined, or when the erasure effect is not executed normally. If the specific display is not erased, the second erasure effect setting process shown in FIG. 13-7 is executed in the special figure hit waiting process of step S173 in FIG. 7, and the specific display is erased. will be done.

In the second erasing effect setting process shown in FIG. It is determined whether a start designation command) has been received (step 010AKS041). If the winning start designation command has not been received (step 010AKS041; No), the second elimination effect setting process is ended.

If the hit start designation command has been received (step 010 AKS041; Yes), the change executed this time (this time's win) will be reflected in the pending continuous notification by checking the pending number 0 in the production control pending information storage area, etc. It is determined whether or not it is a target for notification (step 010AKS042). If it is not the notification target of the continuous notification on hold (step 010AKS042; No), the second deletion effect setting process is ended.

If it is the notification target of the pending continuous notification (Step 010AKS042; Yes), it is determined whether the erasure effect completed flag indicating that the erasure effect has been executed in the variation executed this time is in the on state (Step 010AKS043 ). If the erasure effect completed flag is in the on state (step 010 AKS043; Yes), this means that the erasure effect was executed normally in the change of the notification target of the current pending continuous notification, so the erasure effect completed flag is reset to the off state. (Step 010AKS044), and the second deletion effect setting process is ended.

If the erasure performance complete flag is off (step 010 AKS043; No), this means that the erasure performance has not been executed normally in the change of the notification target of the current pending continuous notification, so the jackpot game state (jackpot via small hit ) Settings are made to execute the erasing effect at timing TD, which is the timing in ) (step 010AKS045). In this way, control for erasing the specific display based on reception of the winning start designation command when the erasing effect is not normally executed due to the change in the notification target of the continuous notification on hold is also referred to as specific control.

Thereafter, by referring to the specific display mode storage area, it is determined whether the specific display is displayed in the first mode (step 010AKS046). When the specific display is displayed in the first mode (Step 010AKS046; Yes), the pending continuous notification flag is reset to the off state (Step 010AKS047), and the second deletion effect setting process is ended.

If the specific display is not displayed in the first mode (step 010 AKS046; No), that is, if the specific display is displayed in the second mode, the specific display is displayed in the first mode in the display area of the image display device 5. Display settings are made for this (step 010AKS048), and the second erasing effect setting process is completed. In this way, when the specific display is displayed in the second mode and the erasing effect is not executed normally, the second mode is displayed as in the case where the normal erasing effect is executed. Control is performed to change the specific display to the first mode. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the specific display of the second mode advantageous to the player from being continuously displayed and giving the player a sense of discomfort or distrust.

Next, an example of the performance operation of the characteristic section 010AK will be explained. FIG. 13-8 shows an example of performance operation in a case where a pending continuous notification is executed in a jackpot game state and an elimination performance is executed in a pending continuous notification target change. FIG. 13-8(A) shows the image display device 5 when a jackpot is achieved. The image display device 5 displays a character image with a piece and the words "Jackpot", and the number "777" (small symbol) is displayed in the upper right corner, indicating a jackpot (a jackpot via a symbol jackpot or a jackpot via a small jackpot). It is shown that it has happened.

Thereafter, the first round of the jackpot game state is started. In the jackpot game state, for example, as shown in FIG. 13-8(B), the current round display is displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, the fourth round in the jackpot game state is the execution timing of the pending notification. When it is decided to execute the hold continuous notification, when the rounds in the jackpot gaming state are completed and the fourth round is reached, as shown in Figure 13-8 (C), there is a hit in the hold (the hold continuous notification). A specific display 010AK001 (first specific display 010AK001) in the first mode showing a "V" is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 as a pending continuous notification to notify the user of the pending notification. As shown in FIG. 13-8(D), the first specific display 010AK001 is moved to a display area 010AK002 provided in the lower right portion of the image display device 5, and is displayed in a reduced size. Such display of continuous notification of hold and specific display is executed based on the process of step 010AKS007 in FIG. 13-1.

The first specific display 010AK001 is continuously displayed in the display area 010AK002 after the execution of the pending continuous notification at least until the variable display that corresponds to the notification target is executed. As a result, it is possible to continuously notify that there is a hit in the hold (consecutive wins in the hold), and the variable display of the notification target becomes easy to understand.

Note that the specific display does not need to be always displayed after the execution of the pending continuous notification until at least the variable display that becomes the hit of the notification target is executed, for example, when a predetermined effect (notice effect or reach effect) is executed. In some cases, it may be made temporarily invisible.

Thereafter, when the jackpot game state ends, for example, as shown in FIG. An ending performance in which "XXXX pt") is displayed is executed, and the jackpot game state ends.

When the jackpot game state ends, as shown in FIG. 13-8(F), variable display of decorative symbols based on the reservation information is started on the image display device 5. FIG. 13-8(F) shows that decorative symbols are variably displayed in each decorative symbol display area indicated by a downward arrow.

If it is a target change of pending continuous notification, for example, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (G), the decorative symbol "7" stops in the left and right decorative symbol display areas and becomes a ready-to-reach state.

For example, if it is decided to execute the erasure effect at the timing TB during this fluctuation (timing at the start of normal reach), as shown in FIG. 13-8 (H), the first specific display 010AK001 becomes The image jumps out from the screen and is enlarged and displayed in the center of the image display device 5.

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-8(I), the entire image display device 5 becomes blacked out and becomes unrecognizable, and a first erasing effect is executed in which the first specific display 010AK001 is erased. .

After that, as shown in FIG. 13-8(I), the decorative symbol "7" stops in the decorative symbol display area inside, and the display result becomes a winning symbol. In this way, in the variable display that is the target of the continuous notification of suspension, an erasing effect is performed in which the specific display is erased. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that makes it appear as if the player has won a hit (jackpot) by completing the specific display.

FIG. 13-9 shows an example of performance operation in a case where a pending continuous notification is executed in a jackpot game state, and an elimination performance is not executed in a pending continuous notification target change. The presentation operations shown in FIGS. 13-9(A) to 13-9(G) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 13-8(A) to 13-8(G). If the execution timing of the erasing effect cannot be determined normally due to a predetermined event (missing command, error in the effect control board 12, etc.) occurring at the start of the pending continuous notification target change, the process shown in Figure 13-9 (H) As shown, the display result becomes a winning symbol with the first specific display 010AK001 being displayed in the display area 010AK002 without executing the erasing effect.

After that, by receiving the small winning start designation command (fanfare command), the character image with the piece and the words "Jackpot" are displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 13-9 (I). , the number "777" (small symbol) is displayed in the upper right corner, notifying you that you have hit the jackpot (jackpot via small hit).

Next, the first round of the jackpot gaming state starts based on the occurrence of a V win in the small winning gaming state, but as shown in FIG. 13-9 (J), the first specific display is displayed from the display area 010AK002. 010AK001 has been deleted. This becomes the erasing effect at timing TD.

In this embodiment, the image display device 5 is provided with a plurality of display layers, and each display layer can display a different image. A display priority is set for each display layer, and the image of the display layer with a higher display priority is displayed on the near side when viewed from the player. As shown in Figure 13-9 (I), the effect (fanfare effect) that notifies you of a jackpot can be performed from the display area 010AK002 (specific display) by setting the display layer higher than the display area 010AK002. are also prioritized for display. In this way, by erasing the specific display at the timing TD during the fanfare performance when the display area 010AK002 (specific display) is hidden, the player may feel that the specific display is suddenly erased. can be prevented.

It should be noted that the specific timing for erasing the specific display when the erasure performance is not normally executed is not limited to the timing TD of the jackpot game state. For example, the specific timing may be a timing during fluctuation, or may be a timing when the symbols are aligned. In this case, it is preferable that the specific timing is a timing at which the specific display can be erased without causing discomfort. For example, when the specific timing is set to be variable, it is preferable that the specific timing is later than the latest predetermined timing among the predetermined timings for executing the erasure effect. By doing this, it is possible to prevent inconsistencies in the effects, and it is also possible to prevent a specific display from being erased regardless of the erase effect at a stage where the erase effect could still be executed, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable or distrustful. can.

Further, the specific timing may be set to the same timing as the execution timing of another effect, and the specific display may be erased while the other effect is being executed. By doing so, the specific display can be erased without causing any discomfort. For example, the specific timing may be the execution timing of an effect that causes the accessory to move. For example, when displaying an accessory action effect on the image display device 5 in conjunction with a performance that makes the accessory move, the display layer of the accessory action effect is set higher than the specific display, and the accessory action effect is set to a higher level than the specific display. The specific display may be erased while the effect is being displayed. By doing so, the specific display can be erased without causing any discomfort during the performance in which the accessory is operated. In addition, when the specific timing was set to the jackpot game state, the specific display was erased based on the receipt of the hit designation command, but if the specific timing is set during fluctuation or when the symbol is confirmed, it will be deleted from the start of fluctuation. The specific display may be erased based on the elapsed time or reception of the symbol confirmation designation command.

FIG. 13-10 shows an example of the effect operation when the second erasing effect is executed. In FIG. 13-10(A), a second specific display 010AK003 (second specific display 010AK003) indicating "W" is displayed in the display area 010AK002 of the image display device 5, and in the left and right decorative pattern display areas. The decorative pattern "7" has stopped, indicating that the player is in a ready-to-reach state.

For example, if it is decided to execute the erasing effect at the timing TB during this fluctuation, the second specific display 010AK003 jumps out from the display area 010AK002 and the image display device It is enlarged and displayed in the center of 5.

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-10(C), a second erasing effect is executed in which an effect as if the image display device 5 is torn apart is displayed and the second specific display 010AK003 is erased. In this way, the performance mode of the second elimination performance is different from the performance format of the first deletion performance shown in FIG. 13-8(I).

The second elimination performance is executed in a situation more advantageous to the player than the first elimination performance, so it is executed in a flashier manner, more intense manner, and in a manner with a larger amount of production (volume, light intensity, etc.) than the first elimination performance. It is also possible to do so. For example, no sound may be output in the first erasing effect, and sound may be output in the second erasing effect. In addition, in the second elimination performance, the performance accessory moves, whereas in the first elimination performance, the performance accessory may not move, and in the first elimination performance, the amount of movement of the performance accessory may be less than the first erasing effect. By doing so, it is possible to perform different erasure effects depending on the display mode of the specific display. Then, it is possible to execute an erasing performance that matches the player's advantage level, and the performance effect of the erasing performance can be enhanced, thereby improving interest.

After that, as shown in FIG. 13-10(D), the decorative symbol "7" stops in the decorative symbol display area inside, and the display result becomes a jackpot. When the second erasing effect is executed, the second specific display 010AK003 is erased, but the first specific display 010AK001 is displayed in the display area 010AK002. As a result, the second specific display 010AK003 is erased, making it possible to perform an effect that makes it seem like a jackpot, and by redisplaying the first specific display 010AK001, it is possible to continue to see that there is a hit in the hold. Can be reported.

In addition, after the second erasure effect is executed, without re-displaying the first specific display 010AK001, in the subsequent advantageous state, the pending continuous notification is executed again, and the first specific display is executed according to the execution of the pending continuous notification. Specific display 010AK001 may be displayed. By doing this, if you win while the second specific display 010AK003 is displayed, the pending continuous notification will be executed again, so you can expect the pending continuous notification to loop. become.

As shown in FIG. 13-10, by executing a deletion effect that erases a specific display in the variable display that is the target of the continuous notification on hold, the variable display that is the target of the continuous notification on hold becomes easier to understand. Furthermore, since the erasing effect is executed when the specific display is erased, it becomes clear that the specific display has been erased, and the discomfort of erasing the specific display can be alleviated. Furthermore, the variable display corresponding to the specific display becomes clear, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for players to understand.

FIG. 13-11 shows an example of the performance operation when the deletion performance (second deletion performance) is not executed in the pending continuous notification target variation while the second specific display 010AK003 is displayed. In FIG. 13-11(A), a second specific display 010AK003 (second specific display 010AK003) indicating "W" is displayed in the display area 010AK002 of the image display device 5, and in the left and right decorative pattern display areas. The decorative pattern "7" has stopped, indicating that the player is in a ready-to-reach state.

If the execution timing of the erasing effect cannot be determined normally due to a predetermined event (missing command, error in the effect control board 12, etc.) occurring at the start of the pending continuous notification target change, the process shown in Figure 13-11 (B) As shown, the display result becomes a winning symbol with the second specific display 010AK003 being displayed in the display area 010AK002 without the erasing effect being executed.

After that, by receiving the small winning start designation command (fanfare command), as shown in FIG. 13-11(C), the character image with the piece and the words "Jackpot" are displayed on the image display device 5. , the number "777" (small symbol) is displayed in the upper right corner, notifying you that you have hit the jackpot (jackpot via small hit).

Subsequently, the first round of the jackpot game state is started, but as shown in FIG. 13-11(D), the second specific display 010AK003 in the display area 010AK002 has been changed to the first specific display 010AK001. This becomes the second erasing effect at timing TD.

In this way, when the second specific display 010AK003 is displayed, if the erasure effect (second erasure effect) is not executed in the pending continuous notification target change, the second specific display 010AK003 is displayed at the timing TD. Control to change the display to 1 specific display 010AK001 is executed. As a result, even though the jackpot gaming state (small winning gaming state) has been controlled, the specific display of the second mode, which is an advantageous mode for the player, continues to be displayed, causing the player to have excessive expectations. It is possible to prevent the player from becoming distrustful because the player is not as advantageous as expected afterwards.

(Modified example of characteristic part 010AK)
This feature section is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further features may be added. Moreover, all of the configurations described in the above embodiments are not essential configurations, and some of them may be missing. Further, this characteristic part and other characteristic parts may be combined as appropriate. For example, a change effect related to the characteristic portion 003AK may be executed. Moreover, the means of the characteristic part 003AK and the characteristic part 004AK may be adopted as the characteristic part 010AK.

In the above embodiment, only one specific display is displayed, but a plurality of specific displays may be displayed simultaneously. For example, in a case where the degree of advantage of a win type is indicated by the display mode of a specific display, the number of pending wins may be indicated by the number of specific displays.

The continuous notification of suspension, specific display, erasure effect, and effect mode and display mode when erasing the specific display at a specific timing in the above embodiments are merely examples, and the effect mode and display mode of each effect may be arbitrary. For example, in the above embodiment, there are multiple types of performance modes for specific display and erasure performance, but there may be only one type.

The processing contents, determination ratios, and methods for determining various effects in the flowcharts shown in the above embodiments and modified examples are merely examples, and the effects similar to those in the above embodiments can be achieved, and the effects shown in the above embodiments can be Any method may be used as long as it can be executed suitably.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 010AK)
(1) The gaming machine according to feature part 010AK is:
A gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to characteristic part 010AK) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state, a small winning gaming state) that is advantageous for the player,
a reservation storage means (for example, a reservation information storage area for performance control) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as reservation information;
When controlled to be in the advantageous state, notification that can execute a notification effect (for example, continuous notification of hold) that notifies that the hold storage means stores hold information corresponding to being controlled to be in the advantageous state. Production execution means (for example, production control CPU 120 that executes the processing of steps 010AKS004 and 010AKS007),
A specific display means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 010AKS007) that can display a specific display when the notification performance is executed;
Erase effect execution means (for example, step 010AKS024, A production control CPU 120) that executes the process of step 010AKS025,
If the specific display is not erased at the predetermined timing due to a predetermined event (for example, missing a variable pattern command or an error in the erasure effect setting process) while the specific display is being displayed, It is also possible to perform special control to erase the specific display at a later specific timing (for example, timing TD) (for example, it is possible to execute the process of step 010AKS045).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the specific display from continuing to be displayed and giving the player a sense of distrust, and it is possible to suitably execute the notification effect.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A game control means (for example, main board 11, game control microcomputer 100, CPU 103) that controls the progress of the game;
A performance control means (for example, performance control board 12, performance control CPU 120) that controls the performance based on information from the game control means,
The performance control means controls the game control when the specific display is not erased at the predetermined timing due to failure to normally receive information (for example, a variable pattern designation command) from the game control means at the start of the variable display. The special control may be executable based on information (for example, a winning start designation command) received from the means at the start of the advantageous state.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the specific display from continuing to be displayed and giving the player a sense of distrust, and it is possible to suitably execute the notification effect.

(3) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
The advantageous state start effect executed based on the information received at the start of the advantageous state is set to have a higher display priority than the specific display,
During the effect period at the start of the advantageous state, the specific display may be erased (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-9 (H) to (J)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the specific display from continuing to be displayed and giving the player a sense of distrust, and it is possible to suitably execute the notification effect.

(4) In any of the gaming machines set forth in (1) to (3) above,
There are multiple predetermined timings,
The specific timing may be a timing later than the last timing among a plurality of predetermined timings (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-4).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the specific display from being erased in a situation where there is still time to execute the specific display erasing effect and giving the player a sense of discomfort.

(5) In any of the gaming machines set forth in (1) to (4) above,
The specific display means can display the specific display in one of a plurality of display modes including at least a first mode and a second mode that is more advantageous to the player than the first mode. ,
If the specific display is not erased at the predetermined timing due to the occurrence of a predetermined event while the specific display is displayed in the second mode, the display mode of the specific display is changed to the first mode at the specific timing. It may be possible to perform control for changing the mode to the second mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-11).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the specific display of the second mode from continuing to be displayed and giving the player a sense of distrust, and it is possible to suitably execute the notification effect.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration related to a characteristic part may be combined with a part or all of each configuration related to other characteristic parts as appropriate. Features combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with part or all of the configurations of other features as appropriate.

The embodiments disclosed this time should be considered to be illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 CPU for production control
75SG001 Pachinko gaming machine 300 First presentation unit 301 Base member 302 Cover member 303 LED board 331 Decorative pattern 400 Second presentation unit 401 Base member 402 Cover member 403 LED board 420 Decoration section 600 Third presentation unit 800 Fourth presentation unit 801 Base Member 802 Cover member 803 LED board

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a retention storage means capable of storing information regarding the variable display as retention information;
Notification performance execution means capable of executing a notification performance for notifying that suspension information corresponding to being controlled to the advantageous state is stored in the suspension storage means when the system is controlled to be in the advantageous state;
A specific display means capable of displaying a specific display upon execution of the notification effect;
erasing effect execution means capable of executing a specific display erasing effect for erasing the specific display at a predetermined timing of the variable display corresponding to the specific display;
An electronic component that is visible to the player;
a specific member provided around the electronic component;
a translucent member that is a translucent member and is provided so that a player can visually recognize the electronic component and the specific member through the member;
Equipped with
special control for erasing the specific display at a specific timing later than the predetermined timing, if the specific display is not erased at the predetermined timing due to a predetermined event occurring while the specific display is being displayed; is executable,
The predetermined event is that the process for executing the specific display erasing effect was not executed normally ;
There are a plurality of predetermined timings at which the specific display can be erased,
The specific display means can display the specific display in one of a plurality of display modes including a first mode and a second mode that is more advantageous to the player than the first mode. can be,
The predetermined timing at which the specific display can be erased is different between when the specific display is displayed in the first mode and when the specific display is displayed in the second mode.
A gaming machine characterized by: